JP7431467B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, for example.

BACKGROUND ART Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is received in a starting slot, an internal lottery is performed, and an effect image is displayed on, for example, a liquid crystal display based on the result of the internal lottery. Then, if the result of the internal lottery is a jackpot, a jackpot game is executed.

This type of gaming machine has a screen sheet placed in front of the display that switches between a transparent state and a milky white state (opaque state) when the power is turned on and off, and outputs a laser beam when the screen sheet is in an opaque state. There are known gaming machines that do this (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP2014-200478A

According to the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, by combining the image display on the screen sheet and the display on the display section, it is possible to give a visual impact to the player. However, in recent years, there has been a demand for gaming machines that can increase interest by providing performances that can give an even greater visual impact.

The present invention has been made in view of these points, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can increase interest.

The gaming machine according to the present invention includes:
A gaming machine comprising a lottery means (for example, a main CPU 721) for performing a lottery, and in which a game proceeds based on the result of the lottery,
A movable accessory (for example, large accessory main body part 230) that can be operated based on the result of the lottery;
a movable control means (for example, an accessory control circuit 739) that controls the operation of the movable accessory;
a first display area (for example, an upper rear screen 2902) capable of displaying information based on the lottery results and provided toward the front of the gaming machine;
a second display area (for example, lower rear screen 2904) capable of displaying information based on the lottery results and provided toward the front of the gaming machine;
a third display area (for example, a front screen 512) capable of displaying information based on the lottery results and provided toward the front of the gaming machine;
Equipped with
The first display area is
The movable accessory can be displayed behind the movable accessory by display control by a first display control means (for example, a first rear projector control circuit 735),
The display may become difficult to see due to the operation of the movable accessory,
The second display area is
Display control by a second display control means (for example, a second rear projector control circuit 736) different from the first display control means allows a position shifted in the front-rear direction from the first display area and a position of the first display area to be It can be displayed at a position vertically shifted from the center,
The display will not become difficult to see due to the operation of the movable accessory, and
The third display area is
Due to display control by a third display control means (for example, front projector control circuit 734) different from the first display control means and the second display control means, the display area is larger than the first display area and the second display area. It can be displayed in front,
Even when the display is performed in the third display area, it is possible to visually recognize the movable accessory in operation and the display in the first display area and/or the second display area,
The movable accessory is
It has a first movable accessory (for example, front light guide plate 234) and a second movable accessory (for example, rear light guide plate 236),
configured to be able to advance into a production space formed between the first display area or the second display area and the third display area in the front-rear direction ,
The movable control means is
When it is determined to operate both the first movable accessory and the second movable accessory, the timing of starting the operation of the first movable accessory and the start of the operation of the second movable accessory starting the respective operations at different timings , and the operation performance of the first movable accessory performed after the operation of the first movable accessory starts , and the second movable accessory. The present invention is characterized in that it is possible to perform, in the performance space, an operation performance that is performed on a different trajectory from the movement performance of the second movable accessory that is performed after the movement of the second movable accessory is started.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can increase interest.

1 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of a pachinko gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention. 1 is an example of an exploded perspective view of a pachinko game machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 1 is an example of a perspective view showing a rear unit of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 1 is an example of a longitudinal cross-sectional view showing a rear unit of the pachinko game machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 1 is an example of a perspective view showing a game presentation unit of a pachinko game machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention. 1 is an example of a front view showing a game production unit of a pachinko game machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention. 1 is an example of a perspective view showing a game presentation unit of a pachinko game machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 1 is an example of a perspective view showing a state in which a large accessory unit is attached to the main body frame of the game production unit of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 9 is an example of a perspective view showing a state in which a left vertical cover and a right vertical cover, which will be described later, are removed from the main body frame shown in FIG. 8. FIG. It is an example of a perspective view showing a large accessory unit in a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is an example of the perspective view which looked at the large accessory unit in the 1st Embodiment of this invention from the rear side. It is an example of the perspective view of the large-sized accessory main body part supported by the large-sized accessory support arm. It is an example of the front view of the large-sized accessory main body part supported by the large-sized accessory support arm. It is an example of a perspective view of the large-sized accessory main body part supported by the large-sized accessory support arm, Comprising: It is an example of the perspective view when the cover member of the front side of the large-sized accessory main body part is removed. It is an example of an exploded perspective view of a large-sized accessory main body part and a large-sized accessory support arm. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing a state in which an LED board is assembled to a rear light guide plate. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing a state where the LED board is separated from the rear light guide plate. FIG. 2 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the rear light guide plate rotation drive mechanism and the large accessory support arm as viewed from the rear. FIG. 3 is an example of a perspective view of the front light guide plate rotation drive mechanism and the rear light guide plate rotation drive mechanism as viewed from the front. It is an example of the side view of the large-sized accessory main body part seen from the right side. It is a back view of the large-sized accessory main body part when a rear side light-guide plate is in an origin position in a rotation direction. It is a rear view of the large-sized accessory main body part in the state where the rear light guide plate has moved from the origin position in the rotation direction by rotational movement. It is a back view of the large-sized accessory main body part when a rear side light guide plate is in an origin position (uppermost position) in the up-down direction. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the large accessory main body when the rear light guide plate is at the lowest position in the vertical direction. It is a front view of a large-sized accessory main body part, and is a figure which shows the aspect in which the front side light guide plate and the rear side light guide plate operated with respect to a large-sized accessory. It is an exploded perspective view of a large accessory left drive mechanism. It is an example of a perspective view which shows the lock mechanism and its support structure in the 1st Embodiment of this invention, and is a figure which shows an example of the holding state which holds a large-sized accessory support arm from below. It is a perspective view showing a lock mechanism and its support structure in a 1st embodiment of the present invention, and is a figure showing an example of a released state where a holding state which holds a large accessory support arm from below is released. It is a perspective view showing a rear screen unit in a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is an example of the perspective view of the cross section cut in the longitudinal direction of the rear screen unit, seen from the rear. It is a perspective view showing a game panel in a first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing the front door unit according to the first embodiment of the present invention, as viewed diagonally from the front. It is a perspective view showing the state where the front door unit in a 1st embodiment of the present invention was seen diagonally from behind. It is an exploded perspective view showing a part of constituent elements of a front door unit in a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a perspective view showing a front screen unit in a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a sectional view of the front screen unit in a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is an example of a perspective view of a left side decorative accessory. It is an example of the perspective view of a decorative lens seen from the upper left. It is an example of a top view of only a decorative lens and an LED board. It is an example of the longitudinal cross-sectional view of the upper part of a front door unit. It is an example of the perspective view when a decorative accessory cover is seen from the front. It is an example of a perspective view when a decorative accessory cover is seen from the rear. It is an example of a perspective view when an LED board is seen from the front. It is an example of a perspective view when an LED board is seen from the rear. It is an example of the front view of a decorative accessory drive mechanism. It is an example of the back view of a decorative accessory drive mechanism. It is an example of the front view of a decorative accessory drive mechanism, and shows when the decorative accessory drive mechanism has descended to the lowest end. FIG. 3 is a schematic side view showing an example of a mode in which an image is projected onto a rear screen unit and a front screen, respectively, by image light projected from a rear projection device and a front projection device, respectively. It is an example of a block diagram showing a main control circuit. It is a diagram showing a functional flow of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the hit random number determination table memorize|stored in the main ROM of a main control circuit. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol determination table memorize|stored in the main ROM of a main control circuit. It is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot type determination table stored in the main ROM of the main control circuit. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of power-on processing by the main CPU. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of system timer interrupt processing by the main CPU. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of switch input detection processing performed by the main CPU. It is a flowchart showing an example of starting opening winning detection processing by the main CPU. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a variation pattern determination process performed by the main CPU. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of main control main processing by a main CPU. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol control processing by the main CPU. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol storage check processing by the main CPU. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol display time management processing by the main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows an example of time saving number subtraction processing by a main CPU. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot end interval processing by the main CPU. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a variation pattern table setting process by the main CPU. It is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol control processing by the main CPU. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of main processing by a sub CPU. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of command analysis processing by a sub CPU. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of command transmission processing by a sub CPU. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of message setting processing by a sub CPU. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a directory table registration process performed by a sub CPU. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of message transmission processing by a sub CPU. FIG. 3 is a schematic perspective view showing an example of a mode in which images are projected on both a front screen and a rear screen unit. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating an example of a performance in which different images are projected on an upper rear screen, an intermediate rear screen, and a lower rear screen. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of a performance in which different images are projected on an upper rear screen and a lower rear screen, but the boundaries between the screens are difficult to discern. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating an example of a performance in which an upper rear screen, an intermediate rear screen, and a lower rear screen constitute one projection surface, and a continuous image is projected onto this one projection surface. It is a front view of a gaming machine showing an example of a performance projected when the result of an internal lottery to be described later is a jackpot. It is an example of a front view of a gaming machine showing an example of a performance in which an image emphasizing the large accessory 2 is projected on the front screen and the upper rear screen when the large accessory main body advances into the performance space. 49 is a diagram illustrating an example of a mode in which images are projected onto a rear screen unit and a front screen using image lights projected from each of a rear projection device and a front projection device, and is a modification of FIG. 48. FIG. It is an example which shows the front view of the gaming machine of 2nd embodiment. 81 is an example of a schematic diagram showing a cross section taken along line XX shown in FIG. 80. FIG. 83 is an example of a diagram showing the progress of performances executed in the gaming machine according to the second embodiment, and is a diagram following FIG. 83. FIG. 82 is an example of a diagram showing the progress of performances executed in the gaming machine according to the second embodiment, and is a diagram continued from FIG. 82. FIG. 83 is an example of a diagram showing the progress of performances executed in the gaming machine according to the second embodiment, and is a diagram continued from FIG. 83. FIG. 84 is an example of a diagram showing the progress of performances executed in the gaming machine according to the second embodiment, and is a diagram continued from FIG. 84. FIG. 85 is an example of a diagram showing the progress of performances executed in the gaming machine according to the second embodiment, and is a diagram continued from FIG. 85. FIG. The display of a simulated image imitating a large accessory that appears in the lower display window, the display of the imitative image imitating a large accessory displayed on the liquid crystal display, and the operation of the large accessory that is an actual object are respectively executed. This is an example of a time chart showing the timing. This is an example of a modification of the effect shown in FIG. 84. It is an example which shows the front view of the gaming machine of 3rd embodiment. FIG. 89 is a schematic diagram showing a cross section taken along the YY line shown in FIG. 89, and is an example of a diagram showing an aspect when the large accessory is at the origin position. 89 is a schematic diagram showing a cross section taken along the YY line shown in FIG. 89, and is an example of a diagram showing a state when a large accessory is lowered. It is an example of a front view when a descending effect of lowering a large accessory is executed in the gaming machine according to the third embodiment. 89 is a schematic diagram showing a cross section taken along the line YY shown in FIG. 89, and is an example of a diagram showing a state when the large accessory and the liquid crystal display device advance above the upper horizontal frame. It is an example of the front view when the raising effect which raises a large-sized accessory is performed in the gaming machine based on 3rd Embodiment. FIG. 89 is a schematic diagram showing a cross section taken along the line YY shown in FIG. 89, and is an example of a diagram illustrating a state in which the large accessory and the liquid crystal display device move further forward after advancing above the upper horizontal frame. It is. It is an example of a front view of the gaming machine 3000 of the fourth embodiment. 97 is a schematic diagram showing a cross section taken along the Z-Z line shown in FIG. 96, and is an example of a diagram showing an aspect when the large accessory is at the origin position. 97 is a schematic diagram showing a cross section taken along the ZZ line shown in FIG. 96, and is an example of a diagram showing a state when the large accessory unit advances above the upper horizontal frame. In the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment, it is an example of a front view when the large accessory unit is advanced to above the upper horizontal frame.

Hereinafter, gaming machines according to each embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. Note that the present invention is not limited to the embodiments described below, and design changes can be made as appropriate within the scope of the present invention.

First, a gaming machine 1 according to a first embodiment will be explained. The gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment is described using a pachinko gaming machine as an example, so it may also be referred to as a "pachinko gaming machine 1."

FIG. 1 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of a pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment of the present invention.

In this embodiment, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine 1 (for example, see FIG. 1) that can play various games by rolling and flowing game balls as game media in a game area. This will be explained using the form.

In this specification, unless otherwise specified, the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment (hereinafter referred to as the "gaming machine 1") (see FIG. 1) as seen from the player is the front side. , the back side is defined as the back side, and the front-back direction is defined. Further, when viewing the gaming machine 1 from the player, the left-hand side is defined as the left side, and the right-hand side is defined as the right side, and the left-right direction is defined. Further, the side that is visible when viewed from the player side is defined as the front side, and the side that is visible when viewed from the side opposite to the player is defined as the back side. Note that the same provisions apply to the second to fourth embodiments to be described later.

The gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment includes a rear unit 100, a game presentation unit 200, and a front door unit 500, as shown in FIG. Among these, the rear unit 100 is the rearmost one, and the rear unit 100, the game production unit 200, and the front door unit 500 are lined up in this order from the rear side to the front side. Each component will be explained in detail below.

[1. Rear unit]
The configuration of the rear unit 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 3 and 4. FIG. 3 is an example of a perspective view showing the rear unit 100 of the gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 4 is an example of a longitudinal sectional view showing the rear unit 100 of the gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment of the present invention.

As shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the rear unit 100 includes a housing 110 and a rear projection device 120.

[1-1. Housing]
The housing 110 is a box-shaped member that can accommodate the rear projection device 120 and that extends in the vertical direction and is open at the front.

[1-2. Rear projection device]
The rear projection device 120 includes a first rear projector 122, a second rear projector 124, and a rear mirror 126.

The first rear projector 122 is a projector placed at the top inside the housing 110. The first rear projector 122 is arranged so that it can project image light forward. Image light projected from the first rear projector 122 is projected onto a rear screen unit 290, which will be described later. More specifically, the first rear projector 122 includes an upper rear screen 2902 (see, for example, FIG. 29, which will be described later) and an intermediate rear screen 2906 (for example, see FIG. 29, which will be described later) as a rear screen unit 290, which will be described later. It is arranged so that image light is projected.

Note that there is no particular limitation on which area of the rear screen unit 290 (for example, see FIG. 2) the first rear projector 122 is arranged so that the image light is projected; for example, the upper side The arrangement may be such that the image light is projected only toward the rear screen 2902 (for example, see FIG. 29 described later), or the image light may be projected toward substantially the entire area of the rear screen unit 290. May be placed.

The second rear projector 124 is a projector placed below the first rear projector 122 within the housing 110. The second rear projector 124 is arranged so that it projects image light toward the rear mirror 126, and the reflected light reflected by the rear mirror 126 is projected onto a rear screen unit 290, which will be described later. More specifically, in the second rear projector 124, the image light reflected by the rear mirror 126 is transmitted to a lower rear screen 2904 (for example, see FIG. 29 described later) and an intermediate rear screen 2906 (for example, , see FIG. 29 described below). Note that there is no particular limitation as to which area of the rear screen unit 290 the second rear projector 124 is arranged so that the image light is projected. The rear screen unit 290 may be arranged so that the image light is projected toward the rear screen unit 290, or may be arranged so that the image light is projected toward substantially the entire area of the rear screen unit 290.

The rear mirror 126 is a member that reflects image light projected from the second rear projector 124 toward a rear screen unit 290, which will be described later. On the rear screen unit 290, an image is projected by this reflected image light. The rear mirror 126 is arranged below the second rear projector 124.

In this embodiment, the image light projected from the first rear projector 122 is projected forward without being reflected, and the image light projected from the second rear projector 124 is directed forward by the rear mirror 126. However, this is not limited to this. For example, both the image light projected from the first rear projector 122 and the image light projected from the second rear projector 124 may be reflected forward by a reflecting member (for example, a mirror). Furthermore, both the image light projected from the first rear projector 122 and the image light projected from the second rear projector 124 may be projected forward without being reflected. Further, the image light projected from the first rear projector 122 is reflected forward by a reflecting member (for example, a mirror), and the image light projected from the second rear projector 124 is reflected forward without being reflected. You may also make it project toward the target.

[2. Game production unit]
FIG. 5 is an example of a perspective view showing the game production unit 200 of the gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 6 is an example of a front view showing the game presentation unit 200 of the gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 7 is an example of a perspective view showing the game production unit 200 of the gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment of the present invention. Although FIGS. 5 and 6 also illustrate the gaming area dividing glass 520 provided in the front door unit 500, FIG. 7 does not illustrate the gaming area dividing glass 520.

The configuration of the game production unit 200 will be described with reference to FIG. 2 and FIGS. 5 to 7. As shown in FIG. 2, the game production unit 200 includes a main body frame 210 fixed to a game machine island of a pachinko hall, and a large accessory that is heavy and operable. unit 220, and a rear screen unit 290 on which an image that can be viewed from the front is projected by image light projected forward from the rear projection device 120 (first rear projector 122, second rear projector 124) described above. , and a game panel 300 having a game area 320, which will be described later. The main body frame portion 210 is a vertically long rectangular frame portion, and a large accessory unit 220, a rear screen unit 290, and a game panel 300 are attached to this main body frame portion 210.

In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the size of the gaming panel 300 is smaller than that of the conventional gaming machine, and the diameter of the gaming area 320 (for example, see FIG. 31), which will be described later, is approximately 300 mm. Furthermore, a gaming area dividing glass 520 (for example, see FIG. 33 described later) is arranged on the front side of the gaming panel 300, and the gaming area dividing glass 520 separates the front side of the gaming area 320 from other areas. ing.

[2-1. Body frame]
The configuration of the main body frame portion 210 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 and 9. FIG. 8 is a perspective view showing a state in which a large accessory unit 220 is attached to the main body frame 210 of the game production unit 200 (for example, see FIG. 2) of the gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment of the present invention. This is an example. FIG. 9 is an example of a perspective view showing the main body frame 210 shown in FIG. 8 with a left vertical cover 2130 and a right vertical cover 2132, which will be described later, removed.

The main body frame 210 is mainly composed of a main body frame 212, and mounting fittings 214 are attached to the front side of each of the upper and lower ends of the left side of the main body frame 210. This mounting fitting 214 is a fitting for attaching the front door unit 500 (for example, see FIG. 2), and for example, a hinge is used. Furthermore, side members 216 are provided on both left and right sides of the large accessory 232, which will be described later, to close the space between the large accessory 232 and the main body frame 212. However, in FIG. 9, only the side member 216 provided on the left side of the large accessory 232 is illustrated, and illustration of the side member 216 provided on the right side of the large accessory 232 is omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the main body frame 212 includes, for example, a left vertical frame 2122, a right vertical frame 2124, an upper horizontal frame 2126, a lower horizontal frame 2128, a left vertical cover 2130, and a right vertical frame 2124. By integrally combining the cover 2132 with the cover 2132, it is formed into a rectangular frame shape that is longer in the vertical direction than in the left and right direction, and has an opening in the center. This central opening is used for an accessory effect in which the large accessory unit 220 operates based on the result of an internal lottery, which will be described later, or as an effect on the rear screen unit 290 (for example, see FIG. 29) based on the result of an internal lottery. It functions as a presentation area where a display presentation is performed in which images are projected.

The left vertical frame 2122 has a cutout in the front region of the upper portion, and a large accessory left drive mechanism 240, which will be described later, can be accommodated in the cutout region.

The right vertical frame 2124 has a cutout in the front area of the upper part, and a large accessory right drive mechanism 260, which will be described later, can be accommodated in the cutout area.

The upper horizontal frame 2126 connects the upper end of the left vertical frame 2122 and the upper end of the right vertical frame 2124, and the lower horizontal frame 2128 connects the lower end of the left vertical frame 2122 and the lower end of the right vertical frame 2124. It connects the

The left vertical cover 2130 covers the front side of the left vertical frame 2122, and closes the large accessory left drive mechanism 240 provided in the upper part of the left vertical frame 2122 from the front side.

The right vertical cover 2132 covers the front side of the right vertical frame 2124, and closes the large accessory right drive mechanism 260 provided in the upper part of the right vertical frame 2124 from the front side.

[2-2. Large role unit]
The configuration of the large accessory unit 220 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 and 11. FIG. 10 is an example of a perspective view showing the large accessory unit 220 in the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 11 is an example of a perspective view of the large accessory unit 220 according to the first embodiment of the present invention, viewed from the rear side.

The large accessory unit 220 includes a large accessory main body part 230 that has a feeling of weight, a large accessory support arm 238 that is long in the left-right direction and supports the large accessory main body part 230 at approximately the center in the left-right direction, and a large accessory main body part 230 that has a heavy feel. The large accessory drive mechanism (large accessory left drive mechanism 240, large accessory right drive mechanism 260) that supports the object support arm 238 is provided.

The large accessory left drive mechanism 240 supports the large accessory support arm 238 on the left side of the large accessory support arm 238, and together with the large accessory right drive mechanism 260, the large accessory support arm 238 supports the large accessory support arm 238. The large accessory 232 can be moved up and down. Further, the large accessory right drive mechanism 260 supports the large accessory support arm 238 on the right side of the large accessory support arm 238, and can move the large accessory support arm 238 up and down. As described above, the large accessory main body part 230 is supported by the large accessory support arm 238, so the large accessory main body part 230 is supported on both sides by the large accessory left drive mechanism 240 and the large accessory right drive mechanism 260. It will be supported and moved up and down.

On the front surface of the large accessory support arm 238, motors 2384 and 2392 (for example, in FIG. 14), and these motors 2384, 2392 are covered from the front by cover members 2384, 2386.

Rollers 280 and 284 that rotate in the vertical direction are provided at the upper ends of the cover members 2384 and 2386, respectively. These rollers 280, 284 are urged forward by an unillustrated urging member. A pair of pressing members 282, 286 are provided on both left and right sides of the rollers 280, 284 to press the roller 280, which is urged forward, backward. The pressing members 282, 286 support the shafts of the rollers 280, 284 such that the roller surfaces are within a certain range of the front side of the front surfaces of the cover members 2384, 2386.

The front surfaces of the cover members 2384 and 2385 face the back surface of the side member 216 in the upper position. At this time, since the rollers 280 and 286 mentioned above come into contact with the back surface of the side member 216 (for example, see FIG. 9), when the large accessory main body section 230 descends from the upper position, the front surface of the cover members 2384 and 2385 It is possible to prevent contact with the back surface of the side member 216, and it is possible to smoothly lower the large accessory main body part 230. Further, the large accessory body 230 is lowered to a position where the front surface of the cover members 2384, 2385 and the back surface of the side member 216 do not face each other, and then the front surface of the cover members 2384, 2385 and the back surface of the side member 216 face each other. When the cover member 2384 is raised to this position, the front surface of the cover member 2384 and the back surface of the side member 216 first come into contact with each other. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the front surfaces of the cover members 2384 and 2385 from coming into contact with the back surfaces of the side members 216, and it is possible to smoothly raise the large accessory main body section 230. In this way, the large accessory main body section 230 can be smoothly moved up and down.

[2-2-1. Large accessory body part]
With reference to FIGS. 12 and 13, the outline of the configuration of the large accessory main body section 230 will be described. FIG. 12 is an example of a perspective view of the large accessory main body part 230 supported by the large accessory support arm 238. FIG. 13 is an example of a front view of the large accessory main body part 230 supported by the large accessory support arm 238.

The large accessory main body part 230 includes a large accessory 232, a light guide plate (front light guide plate 234, rear light guide plate 236) arranged on the back side of the large accessory 232, and a light guide plate that can be rotated. Possible rotational drive mechanisms (a front light guide plate rotation drive mechanism 2340 that can rotationally drive the front light guide plate 234, a rear light guide plate rotation drive mechanism 2360 that can rotationally drive the rear light guide plate 236) (both (see FIG. 19 described later)) and light guide plate vertical drive mechanisms 239 and 270 (both see FIG. 23 described later) that can move both the front light guide plate 234 and the rear light guide plate 236 up and down. ing.

[2-2-1-1. Large accessories]
The large accessory 232 is a light-transmissive member imitating a pattern such as a "7", for example, and is attached and fixed to a large accessory support arm 238 extending in the left-right direction. In addition, this large accessory 232 is an accessory that can advance to the front of the upper rear screen 2902 (for example, see FIG. 29), as described later, and is designed so that it can perform an impactful accessory performance. , is large enough to occupy most of the area of the upper rear screen 2902 that can be viewed from the front. In addition, the large accessory 232 is constructed such that the thickness in the front-rear direction of the peripheral portion (outer peripheral portion) 2322 (see FIG. 15 described later) is larger than the thickness of the game panel 300 described later, so as to create a sense of weight. However, inside thereof is a housing space 2324 that can accommodate a front light guide plate rotation drive mechanism 2340 (see FIG. 15 described later) that rotates the front light guide plate 234.
(See FIG. 15, which will be described later). Further, the rear side surface of the large accessory 232 is a flat plane.

As shown in FIGS. 12 to 15 (particularly FIG. 15), the front light guide plate 234 is a plate-like member that has a substantially similar shape to the large accessory 232 when viewed from the front, and is located on the rear side of the large accessory 232. It is placed facing a plane. Further, the front light guide plate 234 has a size such that it slightly protrudes outward from the peripheral edge of the large accessory 232 around the entire circumference thereof. Although the details will be described later, this front light guide plate 234 is rotated by a front light guide plate rotation drive mechanism 2340 (for example, see FIG. 19) on the back side of the large accessory 232, and vertically moved by light guide plate up and down drive mechanisms 239 and 270. It is configured so that it can be used for both exercise and exercise. As a result, when viewed from the front, the rotation movement by the front light guide plate rotation drive mechanism 2340 and the light guide plate vertical drive mechanism 239 and 270 (for example, see FIG. 23), the combined (combined) movement can be visually recognized.

Note that FIG. 14 is an example of a perspective view of the large accessory main body part 230 supported by the large accessory support arm 238, and shows a cover member 2382 on the front side of the large accessory main body part 230 (for example, see FIG. 12). ) is an example of a perspective view when removed. FIG. 15 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the large accessory main body part 230 and the large accessory support arm 238.

[2-2-1-2. Light guide plate]
The light guide plates (front light guide plate 234, rear light guide plate 236) will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 and 17. FIG. 16 is a perspective view showing a state in which the LED board 237 is assembled to the rear light guide plate 236. FIG. 17 is a perspective view showing a state in which the LED board 237 is separated from the rear light guide plate 236.

Note that since the front light guide plate 234 and the rear light guide plate 236 have substantially the same shape and size, a description of the front light guide plate 234 will be omitted, and only the rear light guide plate 236 will be described.

Like the front light guide plate 234, the rear light guide plate 236 is a plate-like member having a shape substantially similar to the shape of the large accessory 232 when viewed from the front. It is located behind 236. Further, the rear light guide plate 236 has a size that slightly protrudes outward from the peripheral edge of the large accessory 232 around the entire circumference (for example, see FIG. 13). This rear light guide plate 236 performs both rotational movement by a rear light guide plate rotation drive mechanism 2360 (described later) and vertical movement by light guide plate vertical drive mechanisms 239 and 270 (described later) on the back surface of the large accessory 232. is configured to allow. As a result, when viewed from the front, on the back surface of the large accessory 232, the rotational movement by the rear light guide plate rotation drive mechanism 2360 and the vertical drive of the light guide plate are performed in a state where the large accessory 232 is placed so as to closely face the front light guide plate 234. The movement combined with the vertical movement by the mechanisms 239 and 270 can be visually recognized.

Note that the front light guide plate 234 and the rear light guide plate 236 are approximately the same in shape and size, but the shapes may be slightly different, or one may be larger than the other, at least if it is visible when activated. It's okay.

Further, the front light guide plate 234 and the rear light guide plate 236 are rotated by different drive mechanisms (the front light guide plate 234 is driven by a front light guide plate rotation drive mechanism 2340 (for example, see FIG. 15), and the rear light guide plate 236 is driven by a front light guide plate rotation drive mechanism 2340 (for example, see FIG. 15); The rear light guide plate rotation drive mechanism 2360 (for example, see FIG. 15) performs the vertical movement, but the vertical movement is performed by the same drive mechanism (light guide plate up and down drive mechanisms 239 and 270 (for example, see FIG. 23)).

Further, the number of light guide plates arranged on the back surface of the large accessory 232 does not necessarily have to be two (front light guide plate 234, rear light guide plate 236) as in this embodiment, and may be one. However, the number may be three or more.

Furthermore, an opening 2361 is formed in the rear light guide plate 236. The LED board 237 is fitted into the opening 2361 so that light is transmitted from inside the opening 2361 along the surface of the rear light guide plate 236. The LED board 237 fitted into the opening 2361 is held between a pressing plate 2375 on the front side and a pressing plate 2376 on the back side.

A plurality of LEDs 2372 are provided on the LED board 237 along the outer periphery of the LED board 237. In the example shown in FIG. 17, the plurality of LEDs 2372 are provided at approximately equal intervals around the entire outer periphery of the LED board 237. When the LED 2372 emits light with the LED board 237 fitted into the opening 2361 of the rear light guide plate 236, light is emitted along the surface of the rear light guide plate 236 from the entire inner circumference of the opening 2361 to the outside in the radial direction. transmits light, and the rear light guide plate 236 emits light from the surface.

Note that an opening is formed in the front light guide plate 234 as well as in the rear light guide plate 236, and although not shown, light is allowed to pass through this opening from inside the opening along the surface of the front light guide plate 234. An LED board is fitted so that light is transmitted through it.

Further, an opening 2374 is formed in the LED board 237. This opening 2374 is formed in a size that allows the rear light guide plate rotation drive mechanism 2360 to be inserted therethrough. Specifically, when the LED board 237 (rear light guide plate 236) makes a predetermined movement that combines rotation and vertical movement with respect to the large accessory 232, the opening 2374 connects the LED board 237 and the rear light guide plate 236. The size is such that it does not interfere with the light plate rotation drive mechanism 2360. The same applies to the LED board fitted into the opening of the front light guide plate 234.

[2-2-1-3. Light guide plate rotation drive mechanism]
The light guide plate rotation drive mechanism (front light guide plate rotation drive mechanism 2340, rear light guide plate rotation drive mechanism 2360) will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 to 21. FIG. 18 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the rear light guide plate rotation drive mechanism 2360 and the large accessory support arm 238 when viewed from the rear. FIG. 19 is an example of a perspective view of the front light guide plate rotation drive mechanism 2340 and the rear light guide plate rotation drive mechanism 2360 when viewed from the front. FIG. 20 is an example of a side view of the large accessory body 230 viewed from the right side. FIG. 21 is a rear view of the large accessory main body section 230 when the rear light guide plate 236 is at the origin position in the rotation direction.

Note that although the front light guide plate rotation drive mechanism 2340 and the rear light guide plate rotation drive mechanism 2360 drive different light guide plates, they have substantially the same structure and operation. The explanation will be omitted, and only the rear light guide plate rotation drive mechanism 2360 will be explained.

The rear light guide plate rotation drive mechanism 2360 is a mechanism that rotates the rear light guide plate 236 relative to the large accessory 232.

As shown in FIGS. 18, 19, and 21, the rear light guide plate rotation drive mechanism 2360 has a drive mechanism mounting plate 23601, a drive motor 23602 (see FIG. 21), and the rotational force of the drive motor 23602 is transmitted to the rear light guide plate rotation drive mechanism 2360. and each driven gear (first driven gear 23606, second driven gear 23608, third driven gear 23610, fourth driven gear 23612, fifth driven gear 23614) to which the rotational force of this driving gear 23604 is transmitted. , sixth driven gear 23616), a link connecting gear 23622 to which the rotational force of the second driven gear 23608 is transmitted, a link member 23620 coaxially connected to the link connecting gear 23622, and the rotational force of the sixth driven gear 23616. It includes a link connecting gear 23632 to which is transmitted, and a link member 23630 coaxially connected to the link connecting gear 23632.

The drive mechanism attachment plate 23601 is a plate-like member for attaching various members constituting the rear light guide plate rotation drive mechanism 2360. The drive mechanism attachment plate 23601 is a plate-like member for attaching various members constituting the rear light guide plate rotation drive mechanism 2360. 24) so that it can move up and down. The light guide plate vertical drive mechanism 239 will be described later. Note that a guide plate 2707 (described later) extends from the left end of the drive mechanism mounting plate 23601 to the left, and a guide plate 2397 (described later) extends from the right end of the drive mechanism mounting plate 23601 to the right. It has been extended.

The drive motor 23602 (see FIG. 21) is, for example, a stepping motor, and is fixed to the front surface of the drive mechanism mounting plate 23601. Note that in FIG. 21, the illustration of the drive mechanism attachment plate 23601 is omitted for convenience so that the members attached to the front side of the drive mechanism attachment plate 23601 can be visually recognized.

The drive gear 23604 is a gear coaxially connected to the output shaft of the drive motor 23602 (see FIG. 21), and is arranged on the rear side of the drive mechanism mounting plate 23601.

The first driven gear 23606 is disposed on the rear side of the drive mechanism mounting plate 23601 in a state where it meshes with the drive gear 23604. The second driven gear 23608 is disposed on the rear side of the drive mechanism mounting plate 23601 in mesh with the first driven gear 23606. The third driven gear 23610 is disposed on the rear side of the drive mechanism mounting plate 23601 in mesh with the second driven gear 23608. The fourth driven gear 23612 is disposed on the rear side of the drive mechanism mounting plate 23601 in mesh with the third driven gear 23610. The fifth driven gear 23614 is disposed on the rear side of the drive mechanism mounting plate 23601 in mesh with the fourth driven gear 23612. The sixth driven gear 23616 is disposed on the rear side of the drive mechanism mounting plate 23601 in mesh with the fifth driven gear 23614.

The link connecting gear 23622 is disposed on the rear side of the drive mechanism mounting plate 23601 in a state where it meshes with the second driven gear 23608.

One end of the link member 23620 is coaxially connected to the link connecting gear 23622 on the right side of the rear light guide plate 236 when viewed from the front, and the other end is rotatably connected to the front side of the rear light guide plate 236. installed. The link member 23630 has one end coaxially connected to the link connecting gear 23632 on the left side of the rear light guide plate 236 when viewed from the front, and the other end rotatably toward the rear surface of the rear light guide plate 236. installed.

The link connecting gear 23632 is disposed on the rear side of the drive mechanism mounting plate 23601 in a state where it meshes with the sixth driven gear 23616.

The link member 23630 is arranged on the front side of the drive mechanism mounting plate 23601, with one end of the link member 23630 coaxially connected to the link connecting gear 23632.

As shown in FIG. 19, a drive mechanism mounting plate 23601 to which various members constituting the rear light guide plate rotation drive mechanism 2360 are attached, and a drive mechanism to which various members constituting the front light guide plate rotation drive mechanism 2340 are attached. The mounting plate 23401 is integrally configured to face the mounting plate 23401 with a predetermined space.

As shown in FIG. 15, in a predetermined space between the drive mechanism attachment plate 23601 to which the rear light guide plate 236 is attached and the drive mechanism attachment plate 23401 to which the front light guide plate 234 is attached, there is a front light guide plate rotation drive mechanism. A drive motor 23402 that is a drive source of the light guide plate 2340, a drive motor 23602 that is a drive source of the rear light guide plate rotation drive mechanism 2360 (see FIG. 21), a front light guide plate 234, and a rear light guide plate 236 are arranged. . At this time, the drive motor 23402, which is the drive source for the front light guide plate 234, and the drive motor 23602, which is the drive source for the rear light guide plate 236, are arranged side by side in the left-right direction on substantially the same plane. After each drive motor 23402, 23602 is arranged in the above-mentioned predetermined space, the drive mechanism mounting plate 23401 and the drive mechanism mounting plate 23601 are connected to the opening formed in the light guide plate 234, 236 (more specifically, the LED board). 2344, 2374 and are attached and integrated. The drive mechanism mounting plate 23401 and the front light guide plate 234 are connected by link members 23420 and 23440, and the drive mechanism mounting plate 23601 and the rear light guide plate 236 are connected by link members 23620 and 23630 (for example, FIG. reference).

In this way, the front light guide plate rotation drive mechanism 2340, the drive mechanism mounting plate 23401, the rear light guide plate rotation drive mechanism 2360, the drive mechanism mounting plate 23601, the front light guide plate 234, and the rear light guide plate 236. are integrally constructed. Since a part of the integrated structure is accommodated in the accommodation space 2324 for the large accessory 232, the size in the depth direction occupied by the light guide plate rotation drive mechanisms 2340 and 2360 can be suppressed. , it is possible to make the front light guide plate 234 and the rear light guide plate 236 close to each other, thereby making it compact.

Further, the front light guide plate rotation drive mechanism 2340 is disposed on the front side of the front light guide plate 234 and is partially housed in the housing space 2324, while the rear light guide plate rotation drive mechanism 2360 is disposed on the front side of the front light guide plate 234. It is arranged on the rear side of the light guide plate 236. In other words, the front light guide plate 234 is driven by a front light guide plate rotation drive mechanism 2340 that is disposed further forward than the front light guide plate 234 , while the rear light guide plate 236 is driven by the front light guide plate 234 . It is driven by a rear light guide plate rotation drive mechanism 2360 arranged on the rear side. Furthermore, a part of the front light guide plate rotation drive mechanism 2340 is accommodated in the accommodation space 2340. Therefore, the flat surface on the rear side of the large accessory 232 and the front light guide plate 234 can be closely opposed to each other, and the front light guide plate 234 and the rear light guide plate 236 can be closely opposed to each other. A front light guide plate 234 and a rear light guide plate 236 can be operated behind the light guide plate 232 .

(Explanation of the operation of the rear light guide plate by the rear light guide plate rotation drive mechanism)
The movement of the rear light guide plate 236 by the rear light guide plate rotation drive mechanism 2360 will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22. FIG. 22 is a rear view of the large accessory body 230 in a state in which the rear light guide plate 236 has been moved from its original position in the rotational direction due to rotational movement.

When the drive motor 23602 rotates, the rotation causes the drive gear 23604, the first driven gear 23606, the second driven gear 23608, the third driven gear 23610, the fourth driven gear 23612, the fifth driven gear 23614, and the sixth driven gear. 23616, link connection gear 23622, and link connection gear 23632 rotate. When the link connecting gear 23622 rotates, the link member 23620 rotates around one end of the link member 23620 coaxially connected to the link connecting gear 23622. Further, when the link connecting gear 23632 rotates, the link member 23630 rotates around one end of the link member 23630 coaxially connected to the link connecting gear 23632. When the drive motor 23602 rotates, the link member 23620 and the link member 23630 rotate in synchronization, and the rear light guide plate 236 can be rotated.

Here, as described above, the large accessory 232 is fixedly attached to the large accessory support arm 238. Although not shown in FIG. 21, the drive mechanism attachment plate 23601 to which the rear light guide plate rotation drive mechanism 2360 is attached is attached to the large accessory support arm 238, as described above. Therefore, when the link members 23620 and 23630 are rotated by the drive of the drive motor 23602, as shown in FIG.
(For example, see FIG. 121) The rear light guide plate 236 rotates relative to the rear light guide plate 236 (see FIG. 121, for example). This allows the large accessory 232 to appear larger than its actual size, and even if the large accessory 232 is stationary with respect to the large accessory support arm 238, it appears that the large accessory 232 is moving. It can be made to look like.

Note that the front light guide plate rotation drive mechanism 2340 rotates the front light guide plate 234 with respect to the large accessory 232. The front light guide plate rotation drive mechanism 2340 operates in the same manner as the rear light guide plate rotation drive mechanism 2360, so a description of its operation will be omitted.

Furthermore, the movement of the front light guide plate 234 by the front light guide plate rotation drive mechanism 2340 is similar to the movement of the rear light guide plate 236 by the rear light guide plate rotation drive mechanism 2360, and the drive motor of the front light guide plate rotation drive mechanism 2340 When 23402 rotates, each driven gear, each link connection gear, and each link member rotates, and the front light guide plate 234 rotates relative to the large accessory 232.

However, in this embodiment, when the driving start conditions for the light guide plates (the front light guide plate 234 and the rear light guide plate 236) are satisfied (for example, it is decided to advance the large accessory main body part 230 into the production space 700, which will be described later). ), the sub CPU 731, which will be described later, sets different timings to start driving the front light guide plate rotation drive mechanism 2340 and a timing to start driving the rear light guide plate rotation drive mechanism 2360, and performs each drive. Start. Specifically, the sub CPU 731 first starts driving the front light guide plate rotation drive mechanism 2340, and after a predetermined time has elapsed since starting the drive of the front light guide plate rotation drive mechanism 2340, the sub CPU 731 starts driving the rear light guide plate rotation drive mechanism 2340. Driving of the rotational drive mechanism 2360 is started. Here, since the rotation movement of the front light guide plate 234 by the front light guide plate rotation drive mechanism 2340 and the rotation movement of the rear light guide plate 236 by the rear light guide plate rotation drive mechanism 2360 are performed in the same manner, the front light guide plate 234 The rotation trajectory of the rear light guide plate 236 is the same as the rotation trajectory of the rear light guide plate 236.

Further, the drive motor 23402 and the drive motor 23602 rotate at substantially the same rotational speed, and the front light guide plate rotation drive mechanism 2340 and the rear light guide plate rotation drive mechanism 2360 have the same reduction ratio. Therefore, the front light guide plate 234 and the rear light guide plate 236 have a predetermined phase difference, and the rear light guide plate 236 rotates at approximately the same speed so as to follow the front light guide plate 234 that is disposed close to and facing each other. That will happen. In other words, the front light guide plate 234 and the rear light guide plate 236 rotate at substantially the same speed while drawing substantially the same trajectory with a predetermined time difference.

Note that in this embodiment, the front light guide plate 234 and the rear light guide plate 236 rotate while drawing substantially the same locus, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the front light guide plate 234 and the rear light guide plate 236 rotate on different trajectories. It is also possible to make a rotational movement as if drawing . Furthermore, the movements of the front light guide plate 234 and the rear light guide plate 236 are not limited to rotational motion, and furthermore, when the front light guide plate 234 and the rear light guide plate 236 operate to draw different trajectories, The timing to start driving the front light guide plate rotation drive mechanism 2340 and the timing to start driving the rear light guide plate rotation drive mechanism 2360 may be substantially the same. Alternatively, the timing at which the front light guide plate rotation drive mechanism 2340 starts driving and the timing at which the rear light guide plate rotation drive mechanism 2360 starts driving may be set to be substantially the same, and the rotation speed may be changed.

Incidentally, the vertical movement of the light guide plates 234 and 236 is performed by the same drive mechanism (light guide plate vertical drive mechanisms 239 and 270). Moreover, as described above, both the light guide plates 234 and 236 are configured to emit surface light. Therefore, the light guide plates 234 and 236 perform a movement that is a combination of a rotational movement in which the light guide plates 234 and 236 rotate at substantially the same speed while drawing substantially the same locus with a predetermined phase difference, and a vertical movement in which they move up and down at the same speed while emitting surface light. The performance will be performed. Thereby, it is possible not only to make the large accessory 232 appear larger than its actual size, but also to make the thickness compact and to produce an impactful effect as a whole of the large accessory main body 230.

[2-2-1-4. Light guide plate vertical drive mechanism]
The light guide plate vertical drive mechanisms 239 and 270 will be described with reference to FIGS. 23 and 24. FIG. 23 is a rear view of the large accessory main body part 230 when the light guide plates 234 and 236 are at the origin position (uppermost position) in the vertical direction. FIG. 24 is a rear view of the large accessory body section 230 when the light guide plates 234, 236 are at the lowest end positions in the vertical direction. Note that the light guide plate vertical drive mechanisms 239 and 270 are attached to the large accessory support arm 238 as shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, but originally, as shown in FIGS. 21 and 22, the light guide plate A cover member (no reference numeral) is provided on the back side of the vertical drive mechanisms 239, 270. However, in FIGS. 23 and 24, for convenience of explanation, illustration of the cover member is omitted so that the light guide plate vertical drive mechanisms 239 and 270 can be visually recognized.

The light guide plate vertical drive mechanism 239 is a mechanism that reciprocates the light guide plates 234 and 236 in the vertical direction on the left side in rear view (left side in FIG. 23). The light guide plate up and down drive mechanism 270 is a mechanism that reciprocates the light guide plates 234 and 236 in the up and down direction on the right side in rear view (the right side in FIG. 23). The light guide plate vertical drive mechanism 239 and the light guide plate vertical drive mechanism 270 have substantially the same structure and operation, although they differ in whether the light guide plates 234 and 236 are operated on the left side or the right side when viewed from the rear. Therefore, in the following, the light guide plate vertical drive mechanism 239 will be explained, and the detailed explanation of the light guide plate vertical drive mechanism 270 will be omitted.

The light guide plate vertical drive mechanism 239 includes a drive motor 2392 (for example, see FIG. 14), a drive gear 2393, a first driven gear 2394, a second driven gear 2395, a third driven gear 2396, and a guide plate 2397. , and a guide 2398.

As shown in FIG. 14, the drive motor 2392 is a stepping motor, and is arranged on the right front side of the large accessory support arm 238 than the large accessory 232.

The drive gear 2393 is a gear coaxially connected to the output shaft of the drive motor 2392 (for example, see FIG. 14), and when the drive motor 2392 rotates, this rotational force is transmitted.

The first driven gear 2394 is arranged to mesh with the drive gear 2393, the second driven gear 2395 is arranged to mesh with the first driven gear 2394, and the third driven gear 2396 is arranged to mesh with the second driven gear 2393. 2395 and is arranged in a meshed state.

Note that the third driven gear 2396 is formed with a link portion 23960 that extends radially outward. A boss 23961 is provided at the tip of this link portion 23960. Therefore, when the third driven gear 2396 rotates, the boss 23961 revolves around the center of the third driven gear 2396.

As described above, the guide plate 2397 integrally extends rightward from the right end of the drive mechanism mounting plate 23601. A long hole 23970 extending in the left-right direction is formed in the guide plate 2397. The above-mentioned boss 23961 is slidably disposed within this elongated hole 23970. Further, the guide plate 2397 is formed with a guide hole 2399 (for example, see FIG. 18) into which a guide 2398 is inserted.

The guide 2398 is a vertically long rod-shaped member provided on the large accessory support arm 238, and is inserted into the guide hole 2399 as described above. The guide 2398 and the guide hole 2399 are slidable so that the guide plate 2397 can move up and down by driving the light guide plate up and down drive mechanism 239.

(Operation explanation of light guide plate vertical drive mechanism)
The vertical movement of the light guide plates 234 and 236 with respect to the large accessory support arm 238 (that is, the large accessory 232) can be realized by driving the light guide plate vertical drive mechanism 239 and the light guide plate vertical drive mechanism 270 in synchronization. However, since the operation of the light guide plate vertical drive mechanism 239 and the operation of the light guide plate vertical drive mechanism 270 are approximately the same, the operation of the light guide plate vertical drive mechanism 239 will be explained here, and the operation of the light guide plate vertical drive mechanism 270 will be explained here. Explanation will be omitted.

When the drive motor 2392 (for example, see FIG. 14) rotates, the first driven gear 2394, the second driven gear 2395, and the third driven gear 2396 rotate with the rotation. As the third driven gear 2396 rotates, the boss 23961 provided at the tip of the link portion 23960 rotates around the rotation center of the third driven gear 2396 and slides in the elongated hole 23970. . Along with this sliding, a force that moves the guide plate 2397 in the vertical direction acts, and the guide hole 2399 slides with respect to the guide 2398, so that the guide plate 2397 operates in the vertical direction. Here, as described above, the front light guide plate rotation drive mechanism 2340, the drive mechanism attachment plate 23401, the rear light guide plate rotation drive mechanism 2360, the drive mechanism attachment plate 23601, the front light guide plate 234, and the rear light guide plate. 236 are integrally constructed. Therefore, when the guide plate 2397 configured integrally with the drive mechanism mounting plate 23601 operates in the vertical direction, the guide plate 2397, the drive mechanism mounting plate 23601, the front light guide plate rotation drive mechanism 2340, and the drive mechanism mounting plate 23401 Then, the rear light guide plate rotation drive mechanism 2360, the front light guide plate 234, and the rear light guide plate 236 are operated in the vertical direction as one unit.

As described above, since the light guide plate vertical drive mechanism 270 operates in synchronization with the light guide plate vertical drive mechanism 239, the front light guide plate 234 and the rear side are driven by the light guide plate vertical drive mechanism 239 and the light guide plate vertical drive mechanism 270. The light guide plate 236 can be reciprocated in the vertical direction with respect to the large accessory support arm 238. In addition, since the large accessory 232 is attached and fixed to the large accessory support arm 238, the front light guide plate 234 and the rear light guide plate 236 are moved in the vertical direction by the light guide plate vertical drive mechanism 239 and the light guide plate vertical drive mechanism 270. Then, the front light guide plate 234 and the rear light guide plate 236 will move in the vertical direction relative to the large accessory 232, as shown in FIG. FIG. 25 is a front view of the large accessory main body part 230, and is a diagram showing a mode in which the light guide plates 234 and 236 operate with respect to the large accessory 232.

[2-2-2. Large accessory drive mechanism]
With reference to FIG. 26, the large accessory drive mechanism (large accessory left drive mechanism 240, large accessory right drive mechanism 260) will be described. FIG. 26 is an exploded perspective view of the large accessory left drive mechanism 240.

The large accessory left drive mechanism 240 and the large accessory right drive mechanism 260 differ in terms of whether the large accessory support arm 238 is supported on the left or right, but their structures and operations are generally similar. Since they are the same, a description of the large accessory right drive mechanism 260 will be omitted, and only the large accessory left drive mechanism 240 will be described.

The large accessory left drive mechanism 240 includes a left drive mechanism mounting base member 241 to which various members constituting the large accessory left drive mechanism 240 are attached, a drive motor 242 as a drive source, and an output shaft of the drive motor 242. A drive gear 243 that is coaxially connected and transmits the rotational force of the drive motor 242, a ball screw 245 that transmits the rotational force of the drive gear 243, and a large accessory that moves vertically when the ball screw 245 rotates. A pedestal 252 that supports the support arm 238 (for example, see FIG. 25) from below, a bar-shaped guide 246 that extends in the vertical direction substantially parallel to the ball screw 245 and guides the movement of the pedestal 252 in the vertical direction, and An arm support guide 247 that prevents the large accessory support arm 238 from falling, an arm support groove member 254 that supports the arm support guide 247, a guide support part 248 that supports the guide 246, and a large accessory support arm 238. It includes a lock mechanism 250 that is held from below and a lock mechanism support section 249 that supports the lock mechanism 250.

[2-2-2-1. Various parts such as drive mechanism mounting base members]
As shown in FIG. 26, the left drive mechanism mounting base member 241 is a rectangular member extending along the vertical direction, and is a cutout area ( For example, see FIG. 9).

The drive motor 242 is, for example, a stepping motor. The drive gear 243 is a gear coaxially connected to the output shaft of the drive motor 242. A driven gear (not shown) is a gear that meshes with the drive motor 242.

The ball screw 245 is connected to a driven gear (not shown) and rotates. The ball screw 245 is configured by a male threaded member 2450 and a female threaded member 2451 screwed together. The female thread member 2451 moves in the vertical direction as the male thread member 2450 rotates.

A pedestal 252 on which a large accessory support arm 238 can be placed is fixedly attached to the female threaded member 2451. A large accessory support arm 238 is placed on this pedestal 252 via an elastic buffer member 256 (for example, see FIG. 10 or 11), while maintaining a degree of freedom without being fixed upward. ing. Therefore, when the female screw member 2451 moves in the vertical direction, the large accessory main body part 230 moves in the vertical direction via the large accessory support arm 238.

The guide support portion 248 is fixed to the left drive mechanism mounting base member 241. The guide support portion 248 supports the guide 246 and rotatably supports the male threaded member 2450. Further, the lock mechanism support section 249 is fixed to the left drive mechanism mounting base member 241 via the guide support section 248.

The arm support guide 247 is slidably inserted into a guide hole formed in an arm support groove member 254 provided in the large accessory support arm 238 (for example, see FIG. 11). By inserting the arm support guide 247 into the guide hole formed in the arm support groove member 254, the movement of the large accessory support arm 238 in the front and rear direction is regulated. This prevents the large accessory support arm 238 from falling off the pedestal 252.

The guide 246 is slidably inserted into a guide hole formed in the female threaded member 2451. The guide 246 guides the vertical movement of the female screw member 2451.

Here, as described above, the large accessory support arm 238 (for example, see FIG. 10) is supported in the front-back direction by the arm support guide 247 described above, but is not fixed in the vertical direction with, for example, screws. Since it is not placed on the pedestal 252, the degree of freedom in the upward direction is large. In this embodiment, as described above, the large accessory main body part 230 (more specifically, the large accessory support arm 238) is supported on both sides by the large accessory left drive mechanism 240 and the large accessory right drive mechanism 260. Therefore, if the ascending and descending speed of the large accessory left drive mechanism 240 and the ascending and descending speed of the large accessory right drive mechanism 260 do not match, not only will it not be possible to move up and down smoothly, but in some cases, it may not be possible to go up and down. In particular, since the large accessory main body part 230 of this embodiment is large and heavy, this tendency is remarkable. A discrepancy between the lifting speed of the large accessory left drive mechanism 240 and the lifting speed of the large accessory right drive mechanism 260 may be caused by a trivial thing such as a foreign object getting caught. In this regard, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the large accessory support arm 238 is placed on the pedestal 252 on the left and right sides so as not to be fixed upward, so that the degree of freedom in the upward direction is increased. ing. Therefore, even if the ascending and descending speed of the large accessory left drive mechanism 240 and the ascending and descending speed of the large accessory right drive mechanism 260 do not necessarily match, it is possible to maintain smooth elevation as much as possible. As a result, it is possible to increase the size of the large accessory main body section 230, and it becomes possible to perform an accessory performance that can give a large impact.

In this embodiment, the large accessory support arm 238 is placed on the pedestal 252 so as not to be fixed upwardly on both the left and right sides, but this is not necessarily the case, and the degree of freedom in the upward direction is Even if only one of the left side and the right side has a large value, smooth ascending and descending can be maintained within a certain range.

Further, in this embodiment, the large accessory support arm 238 is placed on the pedestal 252 (that is, the large accessory support arm 238 is supported from below by the pedestal 252), but instead of this, the large accessory support arm 238 is placed on the pedestal 252. The accessory support arm 238 may be suspended so that it is supported above, thereby increasing the degree of freedom in the downward direction.

Furthermore, as described above, the large accessory support arm 238 of this embodiment (for example, see FIG. 10) is only placed on the pedestal 252 in the vertical direction. At times, there is a possibility that the large accessory support arm 238 lacks stability. That is, when the large accessory support arm 238 is raised and lowered, it may not slide smoothly between the guide 246 and the guide hole formed in the female threaded member, or the guide formed in the arm support guide 247 and the arm support groove member 254 may not slide smoothly. There is a risk that it will not slide smoothly between the holes.

Therefore, in this embodiment, in order to suppress the instability when the large accessory support arm 238 is raised and lowered, a tension applying member 258 that applies tension on the left side to the large accessory support arm 238, and a tension applying member 258 that applies tension to the large accessory support arm 238 on the left side, A tension applying member 278 (for example, see FIG. 10) that applies tension to the arm 238 on the right side is provided. Note that although the tension applying member 258 and the tension applying member 278 have different attachment parts in the left and right direction, they have the same structure and function. is omitted.

The tension applying member 258 includes a rotating member (not shown) that can rotate around its axis, a metal ribbon-shaped member (not shown) whose one end is fixedly attached to the axis of this rotating member, and this ribbon. The rotating member has a biasing member (not shown) that applies a biasing force to the rotating member so that the shaped member is wound in a coil shape around the axis. The other end of the ribbon-like member is attached to a large accessory support arm 238.

The tension applying member 258 is fixedly attached to the locking mechanism support portion 249 so as to rotate in the vertical direction when viewed from the front. As described above, since the locking mechanism support part 249 is fixed to the left drive mechanism mounting base member 241 via the guide support part 248, the tension applying member 258 is also fixed to the left drive mechanism mounting base member 241. Become. When the large accessory support arm 238 moves up and down, the large accessory support arm 238 moves relative to the left drive mechanism mounting base member 241, so when the large accessory support arm 238 moves downward, the tension applying member 258 applies tension in the opposite direction (upward). Similarly, since tension is applied in the opposite direction by the tension applying member 278, the instability of the large accessory support arm 238 when the large accessory support arm 238 is raised and lowered can be suppressed, and the large accessory support arm 238 can be moved smoothly. This makes it possible to move up and down.

Moreover, since the tension applying members 258 and 278 apply an upward force to the large accessory support arm 238, when the large accessory support arm 238 is moved upward, the tension applying members 258 and 278 are It also has a supporting function. This makes it even more so. It is possible to smoothly move the large accessory support arm 238 upward.

[2-2-2-2. Lock mechanism]
The configuration and operation of the locking mechanism 250 will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 and 28. Note that FIG. 27 is an example of a perspective view showing the lock mechanism and its support structure in the first embodiment of the present invention, and is a diagram showing an example of a holding state in which the large accessory support arm 238 is held from below. . FIG. 28 is a perspective view showing the lock mechanism and its support structure in the first embodiment of the present invention, and is a view showing an example of a released state in which the holding state in which the large accessory support arm 238 is held from below is released. It is.

The locking mechanism 250 is fixedly attached to the left drive mechanism mounting base member 241 (for example, see FIG. 26) via a locking mechanism support section 249 and a guide support section 248 (for example, both see FIG. 26).

As shown in FIG. 27, the locking mechanism 250 holds the large accessory body 230 from below via the large accessory support arm 238, and thereby enters the holding state in which the large accessory main body 230 is held above. can be maintained.

Further, as shown in FIG. 28, the lock mechanism 250 is configured to prevent interference with the large accessory main body 230 when the large accessory main body 230 moves downward when the above-mentioned holding mode is released. , retreats from the downward movement trajectory (trajectory) of the large accessory main body section 230. At this time, the large accessory support arm 238 is configured to retreat not by sliding relative to the lower surface of the support arm 238, but by rotational movement.

More specifically, the lock mechanism 250 includes a lock mechanism mounting base member 2502 (for example, see FIG. 26), a lock motor 2504 (for example, see FIG. 26), a lock drive gear 2506, and a lock driven gear 2508. , a pin 25082, a cylindrical roller 2510, a slider 2512, a stopper 2514, and a stopper support shaft 2516.

The lock mechanism attachment base member 2502 is fixed to the lock mechanism support section 249 (see, for example, FIG. 26). The locking motor 2504 (for example, see FIG. 26) is a stepping motor, and is fixed to the locking mechanism attachment base member 2502. The lock drive gear 2506 is a gear coaxially connected to the output shaft of the lock motor 2504. The lock driven gear 2508 is a gear that meshes with the lock drive gear 2506.

The pin 25082 has a cylindrical shape and is formed to protrude from the locking driven gear 2508. The cylindrical roller 2510 is a member that is provided so as to cover the outer periphery of the pin 25082 and is rotatably provided on the outer periphery of the pin 25802.

The slider 2512 converts the rotational force from the locking motor 2504 into vertical force and transmits it to the stopper 2514.

The slider 2512 includes a pin insertion hole 25122 into which the pin 25082 is inserted, and a locking rack 25124.

The stopper 2514 is a member bent into a substantially L-shape. A support hole 25142 is formed at one end of the stopper 2514, and a stopper support shaft 2516 is inserted through the support hole 25142. The stopper 2514 is rotatably attached to the lock mechanism attachment base member 2502 via a stopper support shaft 2516. Furthermore, a locking pinion 25144 is formed at the one end of the stopper 2514. The locking pinion 25144 meshes with the locking rack 25124 of the slider 2512.

(Operation explanation of lock mechanism)
The operation of the lock mechanism 250 will be explained. When the locking motor 2504 (for example, see FIG. 26) is rotated, the locking drive gear 2506 rotates and the locking driven gear 2508 further rotates. As the locking driven gear 2508 rotates, the pin 25082 rotates. When the pin 25082 rotates, the pin 25082 slides within the pin insertion hole 25122 of the slider 2512, and the slider 2512 moves in the vertical direction. When the slider 2512 moves in the vertical direction, the stopper 2514 rotates. Due to this rotation, the slider 2512 can be moved between a holding state in which the large accessory support arm 238 is held from below (for example, see FIG. 27) and a released state in which the holding state of the large accessory support arm 238 is released (for example, see FIG. 28) can be selectively adopted.

In this way, by being able to hold the large accessory support arm 238 from below, even if the weight increases due to the enlargement of the large accessory support arm 238 (large accessory support arm 232), the large accessory support arm 238 (large accessory support arm 238) can be held from below. Since it is possible to prevent the object 238 from falling naturally due to the action of gravity, it becomes possible to perform an effect performance that gives a large impact by using the enlarged large-sized accessory 232.

By the way, when supporting and holding the large accessory support arm 238 from below, such holding is achieved by sliding the locking mechanism 250 against the lower surface of the large accessory main body part 230 (large accessory support arm 238). If you try to release it, it will require considerable force due to the weight of the large accessory main body part 230. In this regard, according to the present embodiment, the holding state and the releasing state can be switched by the rotational movement of the locking mechanism 250 without sliding, so that the large accessory main body can be The locking mechanism 250 can be switched from a holding state to a releasing state with respect to the lower surface of the locking mechanism 230 .

[2-3. Rear screen unit]
The configuration of rear screen unit 290 will be described with reference to FIG. 29. FIG. 29 is a perspective view showing the rear screen unit in the first embodiment of the invention.

The rear screen unit 290 includes an upper rear screen 2902, a lower rear screen 2904, and an intermediate rear screen 2906.

As described above, an image is projected onto the upper rear screen 2902 by image light projected forward from the first rear projector 122 (for example, see FIG. 3). An image is projected onto the lower rear screen 2904 by image light projected from the second rear projector 124 (see, for example, FIG. 3), although it is reflected by the rear mirror 126 (see, for example, FIG. 3). An image is projected onto the intermediate rear screen 2906 by both the image light projected forward from the first rear projector 122 and the image light projected from the second rear projector 124. The image light projected forward from the first rear projector 122 and the image light projected forward from the second rear projector 124 also include images reflected by a reflecting member (for example, a mirror).

In this way, the rear screen unit 290 projects an image using image light projected from a plurality of rear projectors (the first rear projector 122 and the second rear projector 124 (both see FIG. 3, for example)). Clear images can be projected onto the rear screen unit 290 over a wide area while minimizing the distance between the rear screen unit 290 and the rear projector.

Note that an image may be projected onto the intermediate rear screen 2906 using only the image light projected forward from the first rear projector 122, or only the image light projected from the second rear projector 124. It is also possible to project a scent image.

Further, the number of projectors that project image light toward the rear screen unit 290 may be reduced to one if clear images can be projected over a wide area without increasing the distance between the rear screen unit 290 and the rear projector unnecessarily. Alternatively, there may be three or more if there is no problem in terms of installation space and cost.

The upper rear screen 2902, the lower rear screen 2904, and the intermediate rear screen 2906 are each formed into, for example, a substantially rectangular shape. The upper rear screen 2902 and the lower rear screen 2904 are disposed along the substantially vertical direction so as to be shifted from each other in the front-rear direction. More specifically, the upper rear screen 2902 and the lower rear screen 2904 are arranged so that the upper rear screen 2902 is located further back than the lower rear screen 2904 so that they do not overlap when viewed from the front. ing. As a result, while creating a space in front of the upper rear screen 2902 (above the lower rear screen 2904), both the image projected on the upper rear screen 2902 and the image projected on the lower rear screen 2904 can be viewed from the front. It can be seen visually.

A space formed in front of the upper rear screen 2902 (above the lower rear screen 2904) can be used as a performance space 700 (for example, see FIG. 48 described later) in which various performances are performed. In this embodiment, the large accessory body 230 (for example, see FIG. 8), which has a heavy feel, is held above (for example, at the rear position of the decorative accessory 560, which will be described later), and the internal lottery Based on the results, the large accessory left drive mechanism 240 and the large accessory right drive mechanism 260 (see FIG. 10, for example) are driven under control by a sub CPU 731 (see FIG. 49, for example) to be described later, and the large accessory is removed. The main body portion 230 (for example, see FIG. 10) is made to extend into the above-mentioned space.

Furthermore, the intermediate rear screen 2906 is arranged to fill the gap between the upper rear screen 2902 and the lower rear screen 2904. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 30, the lower side of the upper rear screen 2902 and the upper side of the intermediate rear screen 2906 are connected, for example, by a transparent connecting member 2908, and the upper side of the lower rear screen 2904 and the upper side of the intermediate rear screen 2906 are connected. The lower side of 2906 is connected. FIG. 30 is an example of a perspective view of a cross section of the rear screen unit 290 cut in the vertical direction, viewed from the rear. The lower rear screen 2904 and the intermediate rear screen 2906 have their end surfaces joined to each other without using the above-mentioned connecting member 2908, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the lower rear screen 2904 and the intermediate rear screen 2906 may The connection may also be made using a member similar to the transparent connecting member 2908 described above.

The intermediate rear screen 2906 slopes upward from the front to the rear. Therefore, the image projected on the intermediate rear screen 2906 can also be viewed from the front. In this way, the rear screen unit 290 has one surface formed by the upper rear screen 2902, the lower rear screen 2904, and the intermediate rear screen 2906, and functions as one projection area capable of projecting a continuous image. This makes it possible to project images with a sense of depth.

In this way, the rear screen unit 290 allows the area in front of the upper rear screen 2902 (above the lower rear screen 2904) to function as a production space 700 (for example, see FIG. 48 described later), while displaying continuous images over a wide area. It is possible to project the image onto a different production area, making it possible to perform new productions that have never been seen before.

Note that even if the upper rear screen 2902 and the lower rear screen 2904 are shifted in the front-rear direction, the intermediate rear screen 2906 is not necessarily an essential configuration. For example, when viewed from the front, if the upper rear screen 2902 and lower rear screen 2904 are arranged so that there is no gap between them and are shifted from each other in the front-rear direction, a continuous image can be projected onto the rear screen unit 290. However, the player can view such continuous images. However, depending on the angle at which the rear screen unit 290 is viewed, the gap may be visible and a continuous image may no longer be seen, so it is preferable that the gap be filled by the intermediate rear screen 2906.

Furthermore, even if the upper rear screen 2902 and the lower rear screen 2904 are shifted in the front-rear direction, either one of the upper rear screen 2902 and the lower rear screen 2904 can be curved and the other screen By connecting them, it is possible to prevent a gap from occurring between the upper rear screen 2902 and the lower rear screen 2904 without using the intermediate rear screen 2906.

Further, in this embodiment, the upper rear screen 2902 is arranged to be located on the rear side of the lower rear screen 2904, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the upper rear screen 2902 may be arranged to be located in front of the lower rear screen 2904, so that a production space can be created in front of the lower rear screen 2904 (below the upper rear screen 2902). . In addition, instead of dividing the screen vertically, it is divided horizontally, and either the left rear screen or the right screen is placed behind the other screen, and in front of the one screen ( A performance space may also be created on the side of the other screen.

Although the rear screen unit 290 is composed of a plurality of members such as an upper rear screen 2902, a lower rear screen 2904, and an intermediate rear screen 2906, it is made of a single member using a member that can be bent or curved. It may be configured.

[2-4. Game panel]
The configuration of the game panel 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 31. FIG. 31 is a perspective view showing the game panel 300 in the first embodiment of the present invention.

The game panel 300 is arranged in front of the lower rear screen 2904 (for example, see FIG. 29). Therefore, the above-mentioned performance space 700 (for example, see FIG. 48 described later) is located above the game panel 300.

The game panel 300 in this embodiment is made of a rectangular transparent member, and is configured to allow a game ball as a game medium fired from a firing handle 588 (for example, see FIG. 32), which will be described later, to flow down. It has a circular game area 320. This gaming area 320 is defined by rails 310. In addition, the game area 320 is provided with various accessories (for example, a center accessory) and various receiving openings (for example, a starting opening, a big prize opening, a passing gate), and guide nails are planted therein. Approximately in the center of the game area 320, there is a symbol presentation area 330. That is, the symbol presentation is performed in the symbol presentation area 330 by projecting the pattern presentation onto the lower rear screen 2904 (for example, see FIG. 29) at a position corresponding to the pattern presentation area 330.

Note that various accessories including rails and various reception ports provided in the game area 320 are arranged so that images projected on a lower rear screen 2904 (see FIG. 29, for example) located behind the game panel 300 can be viewed. In addition, it is preferably made of a colorless and transparent member. When it is desired to draw attention to the game in the game area 320 rather than the image projected on the lower rear screen 2904, the sub-CPU (for example, see FIG. 49) controls various colorless and transparent accessories and various reception openings. It is preferable to make it easier to visually recognize the various accessories and the various reception openings by projecting, for example, colored images along the various ornaments and the various reception openings at corresponding positions. As a result, when the effect projected on the lower rear screen 2904 is more important than the game in the gaming area 320, an image that can eliminate the presence of various accessories and various reception openings is projected, When the game in the game area 320 is more important than the performance projected on the side rear screen 2904, it is preferable to project images that can make the presence of various accessories and various entrances visible.

Note that the various accessories including the rail 310 provided in the gaming area 320 and the various receiving ports are not significantly different from the various accessories and various receiving ports provided in the gaming area of a general pachinko machine, so illustrations are omitted. The control in which the internal lottery is performed and the game progresses based on the winning of the game ball in the starting slot will be described later.

Here, the positional relationship between the game panel 300 and the lower rear screen 2904 of this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 29 and 31. The peripheral edge along the upper side of the game panel 300 is the connecting part between the lower rear screen 2904 and the intermediate rear screen 2906 (that is, the upper side of the lower rear screen 2904 (the lower side of the intermediate rear screen 2906)) when viewed from the front. They almost match. This makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize the boundary (connection portion) between the lower rear screen 2904 and the intermediate rear screen 2906. However, whether or not the peripheral edge along the upper side of the game panel 300 and the above connection part (the connection part between the lower rear screen 2904 and the intermediate rear screen 2906) are substantially on the same straight line when viewed from the front is determined by It also changes depending on the angle from which you view it from the front. Therefore, when the player is seated facing the gaming machine 1, the peripheral edge along the upper side of the gaming panel 300 and the above-mentioned connection section are configured to be on substantially the same straight line from the player's line of sight. Preferably. For example, when a player is seated facing a game machine, the player's line of sight looking at the top side of the game panel 300 (the line connecting the player's eyes and the top side of the game panel 300) is approximately horizontal. For example, it suffices if the peripheral edge along the upper side of the game panel 300 and the above-mentioned connecting portion are on substantially the same straight line in the substantially horizontal direction.

In addition, the peripheral edge along the upper side of the game panel 300 is the connecting part between the upper rear screen 2902 and the intermediate rear screen 2906 (that is, the lower side of the upper rear screen 2902 (the upper side of the intermediate rear screen 2906)) when viewed from the front. They may be made to substantially match.

Furthermore, the game panel 300 may be placed in front of the upper rear screen 2902 instead of being placed in front of the lower rear screen 2904 (for example, see FIG. 29). In this case, the peripheral edge along the lower side of the game panel 300 is viewed from the front as the connection area between the upper rear screen 2902 and the intermediate rear screen 2906 (that is, the lower side of the upper rear screen 2902 (the upper side of the intermediate rear screen 2906)). Alternatively, the connecting portion between the lower rear screen 2904 and the intermediate rear screen 2906 (that is, the lower side of the intermediate rear screen 2906 (the upper side of the lower rear screen 2904)) may be made to approximately coincide with the connecting portion between the lower rear screen 2904 and the intermediate rear screen 2906 when viewed from the front. preferable.

Note that since the game panel 300 of this embodiment is made of a transparent resin member, for example, the image projected on the lower rear screen 2904 can be viewed from the front through the game panel 300. Therefore, the player can see the game ball flowing down the game area 320, the image projected onto the rear screen unit 290 including the lower rear screen 2904 located behind the game panel 300, and the image in front of the upper rear screen 2902 ( This allows the entire movable performance by, for example, the large accessory main body part 230 in the performance space 700 (for example, see FIG. 48 described later) (above the game panel 300 and lower rear screen 2904) to be visible from the front. It is possible to provide a new gaming machine that has never existed before.

The rail 310 includes an annular outer rail 312 and an inner rail 314 disposed inside the outer rail 312 and along the outer rail 312. When a firing handle 588 (for example, see FIG. 32), which will be described later, is operated, the game ball is fired by a firing device (not shown), passes between the outer rail 312 and the inner rail 314, and enters the gaming area 320. Driven by. When the game ball hit toward the game area 320 in this way enters the starting slot arranged in the game area 320, an internal lottery to be described later is performed. The rear projection device 120 is directed toward the lower rear screen 2904 (for example, see FIG. 29) so that the symbol effect based on the result of this internal lottery is projected onto the lower rear screen 2904 corresponding to the above-mentioned symbol effect area 330. image light is projected.

[3. Front door unit]
The configuration of the front door unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 32 and 33. FIG. 32 is a perspective view of the front door unit 500 according to the first embodiment of the present invention, viewed diagonally from the front. FIG. 33 is a perspective view of the front door unit 500 according to the first embodiment of the present invention, as viewed obliquely from the rear.

The front door unit 500 includes a front screen unit 510, various members (game area dividing glass 520, spacer 522, holding frame 540), and a front decorative frame 550.

[3-1. Front screen unit]
The configuration of the front screen unit 510 will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 36. FIG. 34 is an exploded perspective view showing some of the components of the front door unit 500 in the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 35 is a perspective view showing the front screen 512 in the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 36 is a sectional view of the front screen unit 510 in the first embodiment of the invention.

As shown in FIG. 34, the front screen unit 510 includes a front screen 512 and a front screen pressing plate 514. When image light is projected from the front toward the rear, the front screen 512 functions as a member on which an image is projected by the projected image light, and also allows the rear of the front screen 512 to be visually recognized. This is a light-transmissive projection member that can be projected.

In this embodiment, an image as a presentation can be projected onto the front screen 512 using image light projected from a front projection device 600 (for example, see FIG. 40), which will be described later.

However, as long as it can be seen through the rear (for example, a transmissive liquid crystal), it is not necessarily limited to one in which an image is projected using image light projected from a projector.

Further, behind the front screen 512, the game panel 300 (see, for example, FIG. 31) and the lower rear screen 2904 (see, for example, FIG. 29) are arranged, but the front screen 512 is made of a light-transmitting material as described above. This is the member to be projected. Therefore, the player can simultaneously view not only the effects projected on the front screen 512 but also the game balls flowing down the game area 320 of the game panel 300 and the effects projected on the lower rear screen 2904. .

As shown in FIGS. 35 and 36, the front screen 512 has a mesh sheet 5124 attached to substantially the entire area of the front surface of a front panel 5122. functions as

Note that the area to which the mesh sheet 5124 is attached to the front panel 5122 is not limited to substantially the entire area, but may be attached to an area where an image is to be projected by the image light projected from the front projection device 600 (for example, see FIG. 40). good. The area on the front panel 5122 to which the mesh sheet 5124 is attached becomes a projection area where an image is projected by the image light projected from the front projection device 600.

Further, the surface on which the mesh sheet 5124 is attached to the front panel 5122 is not limited to the front surface, but may be the back surface.

The material of the front panel 5122 is not particularly limited as long as it is a transparent plate-like member, and examples thereof include a glass plate, a synthetic resin plate (eg, a polycarbonate plate, an acrylic plate), and the like.

The mesh sheet 5124 is a sheet having minute meshes (gaps between the meshes), and is a sheet that can reflect light with the mesh and allow light to pass through the mesh. As the reticulated sheet 5124, for example, a reticulated sheet used for screen doors (for example, Amid sheet) can be mentioned. The light transmittance of this mesh sheet can be changed by changing the ratio of the area of the mesh that reflects light to the area of the mesh that allows light to pass through.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is configured such that the light transmittance is highest in the upper region of the front screen 512, and the light transmittance gradually decreases toward the lower region. That is, the sharpness (gradation) of the image projected on the front screen 512 appears as a gradation that is highest in the upper region and becomes lower in gradation toward the lower region. That is, the image projected on the front screen 512 appears clearly in the upper region near the player's line of sight, and becomes less clear in the lower region where the game panel 300 is arranged. Therefore, while viewing the image projected on the front screen 512, you can watch the game ball flowing down the game area 320 of the game panel 300 (for example, see FIG. 31) and the image projected on the lower rear screen 2904 (for example, see below). It is also possible to visually recognize images imitating the liquid crystal display area of , and images of changing effects of symbols based on the results of an internal lottery (to be described later), making it possible to perform effects that have never been seen before.

The front screen holding member 514 is a frame-shaped member into which the front screen 512 can be fitted, and is held by the holding frame 540 of the front door unit 500 with the front screen 512 fitted therein.

Note that the sheet attached to the front panel 5122 is a sheet in which a plurality of minute dot-like light shielding members are arranged in a plane at minute intervals (hereinafter referred to as a "dot-like sheet") instead of the net-like sheet 5124. ) may be adopted. When light is projected toward the dot-shaped sheet, the light is reflected by the dot-shaped light-shielding members, and the light can pass through the gaps between the light-shielding members. The light transmittance of this dot-like sheet can be changed by changing the ratio of areas that reflect light and areas that allow light to pass.

Further, in this embodiment, a net-like sheet 5124 or a dot-like sheet pasted on the front panel 5122 is used as a light-transmissive projection target member, but the image projected on the front screen 512 and the front screen 512 (for example, the image projected on the rear screen unit 290, the performance by the large accessory 232, the game area 320 where the game ball flows down, etc.) can be viewed from the front. , it is not necessary to attach the net-like sheet 5124 or the dot-like sheet to the front panel 5122. For example, if the mesh sheet 5124 or the dotted sheet can be supported so that the projected image light can be projected, the supported mesh sheet 5124 or the dotted sheet can be supported without being attached to the front panel 5122. It can function as a light-transmissive projection target member. Furthermore, the method is not limited to pasting a net-like sheet 5124 or a dot-like sheet on the front panel 5122; for example, the front panel 5122 is directly processed so that a net-like or dot-like pattern is formed on the surface of the front panel 5122. You may also do so. Furthermore, the shape of the surface of the front panel 5122 is not limited to a net shape or a dot shape, and even if a smoke treatment is performed to reduce the transparency of the front panel 5122, it can function as a light-transmissive projection member. be able to.

As described above, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the game ball flowing down the gaming area 320 of the gaming panel 300 and various effects (display effects projected on the front panel 5122, display effects projected on the rear screen unit 290) , and the performance being performed in the performance space 700 (for example, see FIG. 48 described later) in front of the upper rear screen 2902 (above the lower rear screen 2904 and the game panel 300). It is possible to provide an unprecedented new gaming machine in which both can be viewed from the front at the same time.

In addition, in this embodiment, a new accessory that has never been seen before is introduced, such as a large accessory main body section 230 extending between the image projected on the front panel 5122 and the image projected on the upper rear screen 2902. It becomes possible to perform the performance.

[3-2. Various parts of the front door unit]
With reference to FIG. 34, various members (gaming area partition glass 520, spacer 522, holding frame 540) of the above-mentioned front door unit 500 will be explained. FIG. 34 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the above-mentioned various members (gaming area dividing glass 520, spacer 522, holding frame 540) and the front screen unit 510.

The game area dividing glass 520 is a member disposed on the front side of the game panel 300 (see, for example, FIG. 7), and is a member that divides the game area 320 (see, for example, FIG. 31) from an external space. The game area dividing glass 520 is composed of a transparent plate-like member (for example, a glass plate or a resin member).

The spacer 522 is interposed between the gaming area dividing glass 520 and the gaming panel 300 (for example, see FIG. 7), and the spacer 522 is interposed between the gaming area dividing glass 520 and the gaming panel 300 (for example, see FIG. 31). ) is a member that secures a certain amount of space so that game balls can flow down. The spacer 522 is formed in a U-shape with an open top.

The holding frame 540 is a frame-shaped member that holds the front screen unit 510, the game area dividing glass 520, and the spacer 522. A recessed portion for accommodating these members is formed on the rear side of the holding frame 540. Furthermore, an opening window 5402 is formed in the holding frame 540. Through this opening window 5402, the player can view the image projected on the front screen unit 510. Note that an opening window corresponding to the opening window 5402 is also formed in the front decorative frame 550, and the opening window formed in the front decorative frame 550 and the opening window 5402 formed in the holding frame 540 allow the front door to An opening window 5002 (see, for example, FIG. 32) of unit 500 is configured.

Further, on the back side of the holding frame 540, metal fittings are provided at positions corresponding to the mounting fittings 214 (see, for example, FIG. 8) provided at the upper and lower ends of the left side of the main body frame 212 (see, for example, FIG. 8). 542 (see, for example, FIG. 33). This metal fitting 542 is a hinge member that is interposed between the holding frame 540 and the main body frame 212, and allows the holding frame 540 to be attached to the main body frame 212 by engaging with the mounting fitting 214. The front door unit 500 (holding frame 540) can be rotated with respect to the main body frame 212 via the mounting bracket 214 and the bracket 542.

[3-3. Front decorative frame]
As shown in FIG. 32, the front decorative frame 550 includes a front door frame 552, side decorative accessories (right side decorative accessory 580, left side decorative accessory 586), a firing handle 588, and a storage section 590. , a decorative accessory 560, a decorative accessory drive mechanism 570 (for example, see FIG. 40) capable of vertically operating the decorative accessory 560, and a front projection device 600 (for example, see FIG. 40). We are prepared.

[3-3-1. Front door frame]
The front door frame 552 is a substantially rectangular frame body, and includes an upper frame, a lower frame, a left frame, and a right frame. The thickness of each of the left frame and the right frame in the front-rear direction gradually increases upward from the center in the vertical direction, and an overhang 5520 is formed with the maximum thickness at the upper end. A decorative accessory 560 and a front projection device 600 (see, for example, FIG. 40) are arranged on this projecting portion 5520.

[3-3-2. Side decoration]
A right side decorative accessory 580 is provided on the right side of the front decorative frame 550 when viewed from the front, and a left side decorative accessory 586 is provided on the left side of the front decorative frame 550 when viewed from the front. The right side decorative accessory 580 has a right side upper decorative accessory 582 and a right side lower decorative accessory 584.

Although the form of the right side top ornament 582 is not particularly limited, for example, in the example shown in FIG. 32, it is a three-dimensional model of the left half of the body of an eagle flapping its wings. The eagle of the right-hand side decorative accessory 582 and the snake decoration 5866 (for example, see FIG. 37) of the left-hand side decorative accessory 586 are arranged so as to look at each other.

Further, the form of the right side lower ornament 584 is not particularly limited, but for example, in the example shown in FIG. It is said to protrude forward and curve to the left.

As shown in FIG. 37, the left side decorative accessory 586 includes a decorative lens 5862, a transparent cover member 5864 that covers the decorative lens 5862 from the outside, and a three-dimensional structure like a snake spirally wrapped around the transparent cover member 5864. It has a snake decoration 5866 and an LED board 5868. Furthermore, a storage section 590 is arranged below the left side decorative accessory 586. Note that FIG. 37 is an example of a perspective view of the left side decorative accessory 586.

Here, the lens effect of the above-mentioned decorative lens 5862 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 38 and 39. FIG. 38 is an example of a perspective view of the decorative lens 5862 viewed from the upper left, and FIG. 39 is an example of a plan view of the decorative lens 5862 and the LED board 5868. In FIG. 39, the uppermost surface of the decorative lens 5862 is a flat surface, and this flat surface is shown hatched with shadows for convenience of explanation.

The decorative lens 5862 is a vertically elongated columnar transparent body that can transmit light that has entered the decorative lens 5862 (see FIG. 38), and has an uneven diamond-cut surface on the back side. This decorative lens 5862 has a rod-shaped support member 5872 extending in the front-rear direction so that an LED arrangement surface 58680 of an LED board 5868 disposed on the back side faces a diamond-cut surface (opposing surface) 58622. It is attached to the LED board 5868 by. A large number of LEDs 5870 are arranged on the LED arrangement surface 58680 of the LED board 5868 in the length direction (vertical direction) of the decoration 5862 so as to face almost the entire area on the back side of the decoration lens 5862 in a manner that the LEDs 5870 emit light toward the front. ) are located along the Thereby, the light emitted from the LED 5870 enters from the opposing surface 58622 of the decorative lens 5862.

Further, the decorative lens 5862 has a left side surface 58624 that does not face the LED arrangement surface 58680 and has a curved surface that is wavy. For example, taking the cross section shown in FIG. 37 as an example, the left surface 58624 of the decorative lens 5862 has points A, B, C, and D as the vertices of the convex portion that bulges out to the outermost (left side). A point exists. A concave portion is formed between the apex of one convex portion and an adjacent convex portion. In the concave portion between point A and point B, the apex of the concave portion that is concave to the innermost side (right side) is point a. Further, in the recessed portion between point B and point C, the apex of the recessed portion that is recessed to the innermost (right side) point is point b. Similarly, in the concave portion between points C and D, the apex of the concave portion that is concave inwardly (to the right) is point c. The light diffused by the diamond cut and traveling through the decorative lens 5862 is focused on points a, b, and c. Due to such a light condensing effect, even if the LED 5870 is the only light source, it appears to the player that light is being emitted at points a, b, and c, where there are no other light sources in addition to the LED 5870. It becomes possible to make it appear as if the source exists.

Note that the apex of the convex portion and the concave portion formed on the left surface 58624 are formed along the length direction of the decorative lens 5862. In FIG. 38, the solid lines drawn downward from points A, B, and C are convex parts, and the solid lines drawn downward from points a, b, and c are convex parts. The dashed dotted line is the recess. Therefore, on the left surface 58624 of the decorative lens 5862, the apex of the convex portion and the concave portion described above are formed not only in the plan view shown in FIG. has been done.

In particular, as shown in FIG. 38, when the concave portion formed on the left surface 58624 is continuously formed without interruption along the length direction of the decorative lens 5862, the length of the columnar decorative lens 5862 It can be made to appear as if a light emitting source other than the LED 5870 exists continuously along the width direction (vertical direction). In this way, by making it appear as if a light source other than the LED5870 is continuously present in a part where no light source is actually present, a new visual effect never seen before can be created. It becomes possible to perform.

Note that it is not essential that the concave portions are formed continuously along the length direction of the decorative lens 5862 without being interrupted; for example, the concave portions may be partially discontinued at any part in the length direction. Also good. Although light is not focused on the area where the recess is interrupted, light is focused on the area where the recess is formed, so although there is actually no light source in the recess, the LED5870 This makes it possible to create new visual effects that have never been seen before, such as making it appear as if a different light source exists.

The reason why the back side of the decorative lens 5862 is diamond-cut is that the light emitted from the LED 5870 is diffused by the diamond cut, and the light that enters from the opposing surface 58622 of the decorative lens 5862 goes straight and exits. Rather, the purpose is to make the light concentrate at points a to c, which are the vertices of the recess. Therefore, the back side of the decorative lens 5862 does not necessarily have to be diamond-cut, as long as it can diffuse the light emitted from the LED 5870, and may be formed into an uneven shape, for example.

Further, in this embodiment, the number of light condensing points in the decorative lens 5862 is set to three points, a point a, a point b, and a point c, but it goes without saying that the number of light converging points is not limited to this.

[3-3-3. Firing handle]
As shown in FIG. 32, the firing handle 588 is fixed to the lower right of the front door frame 552. The firing handle 588 is electrically connected to a game ball firing device (not shown), and when the firing handle 588 is rotated, the ball is fired from the game ball firing device toward the gaming area 320 (for example, see FIG. 31). The game ball is fired. The firing intensity of the game ball toward the game area 320 is determined according to the amount of operation of the firing handle.

[3-3-4. Storage section]
The storage portion 590 is disposed on the left side of the front door frame 552 and below the left side decorative accessory 586. The storage section 590 is configured to store game balls.

[3-3-5. Decorative accessories]
The configuration of the decorative accessory 560 will be described with reference to FIGS. 40 to 46. FIG. 40 is an example of a vertical cross-sectional view of the upper part of the front door unit 500. FIG. 41 is an example of a perspective view of the decorative accessory cover 562 when viewed from the front, and FIG. 42 is an example of a perspective view of the decorative accessory cover 562 when viewed from the rear. FIG. 43 is an example of a perspective view of the LED board 564 when viewed from the front. FIG. 44 is an example of a perspective view of the LED board 564 when viewed from the rear. FIG. 45 is an example of a front view of the decorative accessory drive mechanism 570. Note that the position of the decorative accessory drive mechanism 570 shown in FIG. 45 is the origin position (uppermost position). FIG. 46 is an example of a rear view of the decorative accessory drive mechanism 570.

The decorative accessory 560 includes a frontmost decorative accessory cover 562 (see FIG. 42), and an LED board 564 (see FIG. 43) fixedly attached to the decorative accessory cover 562 on the back side of the decorative accessory cover 562. , and LEDs 566 (see FIG. 43) arranged substantially uniformly over the entire front surface of the LED board 564. Note that the decorative accessory 560 is located in front of a front projection device 600, which will be described later.

[3-3-5-1. Decorative accessories cover]
The decorative accessory cover 562 is made of a light-transmitting material and is decorated with a predetermined logo or the like (see FIGS. 41 and 42).

As shown in FIG. 42, a light diffusing portion 5622 is formed on the rear surface of the decorative accessory cover 562. The light diffusing portion 5622 is a portion that can diffuse light when it is irradiated with light, and is formed by having a predetermined uneven surface.

[3-3-5-2. LED board]
As shown in FIG. 43, the LED board 564 is a board on which an LED 566 is arranged on the front surface, and is arranged on the back side of the accessory cover 562 (for example, see FIG. 41). Further, although the LED board 564 does not protrude from the decorative accessory cover 562 when viewed from the front, it is large enough to cause the decorative accessory cover 562 to emit light over substantially the entire surface thereof. The LED 566 may be a single color LED or a full color RGB type LED.

As shown in FIG. 44, a plurality of bosses 568 are formed on the rear surface of the LED board 564. These bosses 568 are bosses for fixing the LED board 564 to a decorative accessory drive mechanism 570, which will be described later. By screwing screws into these bosses 568, the LED board 564 can be fixed to the accessory drive mechanism 570 (for example, see FIG. 45).

[3-3-5-3. Decorative accessory drive mechanism]
As shown in FIG. 40, the decorative accessory drive mechanism 570 is disposed on the upper overhang 5520 of the front door frame 552 (more specifically, on the rear side of the LED board 564 (for example, see FIG. 44)). be done. The accessory drive mechanism 570 moves only the LED board 564 of the front projection device 600 and the LED board 564 in the vertical direction while maintaining the position of the front projection device 600. When the LED board 564 moves in the vertical direction, the entire decorative accessory 560 including the frontmost decorative accessory cover 562 (for example, see FIG. 43) moves in the vertical direction.

Of the front projection device 600 and the LED board 564, only the LED board 564 is moved in the vertical direction by the accessory drive mechanism 570, while a clear image is projected on the front screen 512 (front projection If the position of the device 600 changes, there is a risk that the image projected on the front screen 512 will be out of focus. This is to do so.

As shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the decorative accessory drive mechanism 570 includes a substantially rectangular base plate 5702 that is long in the left-right direction, a left drive mechanism 5703, a right drive mechanism 5723, and a decoration attachment hole 5745. , and a fixing hole 5744.

The left drive mechanism 5703 is a mechanism that moves the left side of the LED board 564 (for example, see FIG. 43) in the front view in the vertical direction, and includes a left slider 5704, an extension 5706, a guide hole 5708, a guide 5710, It includes a motor 5712, a drive gear 5714, a first driven gear 5716, a second driven gear 5718, a third driven gear 5720, and an optical sensor 5722.

The left slider 5704 is guided by a guide 5710 so that it can slide vertically.

The extending portion 5706 is a portion extending leftward from the left side surface of the left slider 5704. An elongated guide hole 5708 extending in the left-right direction is formed in the extending portion 5706.

The guide 5710 is fixed to the front surface of the base plate 5702 and is arranged to extend in the vertical direction on the left side of the base plate 5702. The guide 5710 supports the left slider 5704 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction.

The motor 5712 is a stepping motor, and is fixed to the left side of the rear surface of the base plate 5702 when viewed from the front.

The drive gear 5714 is a gear coaxially connected to the output shaft of the motor 5712, and is arranged on the front side of the base plate 5702.

The first driven gear 5716 meshes with the drive gear 5714 and is disposed on the front side of the base plate 5702.

The second driven gear 5718 meshes with the first driven gear 5716 and is arranged on the front side of the base plate 5702. A detection piece 57182 is formed on the second driven gear 5718. The detection piece 57182 is a portion that can be detected by the optical sensor 5722. This detection piece 57182 is provided at a position where it can be detected by the optical sensor 5722 when the left slider 5704 reaches the top position of the vertical movement range.

The third driven gear 5720 meshes with the second driven gear 5718 and is arranged on the front side of the base plate 5702. A boss 57202 is formed protruding from the third driven gear 5720. This boss 57202 is inserted into the guide hole 5708 and is slidable on the inner peripheral surface of the guide hole 5708.

The optical sensor 5722 is a sensor that detects the detection piece 57182. As described above, the detection piece 57182 is provided at a position where it can be detected by the optical sensor 5722 when the left slider 5704 reaches the top position of the vertical movement range. Note that when the left slider 5704 is at the top position of the vertical movement range, it is the origin position of the LED board 564 (that is, the decorative accessory 560).

Spring 5746 is a tension coil spring. The spring 5746 is arranged along the vertical direction on the front side of the base plate 5702. The upper end of the spring 5746 is fixed to the upper end of the base plate 5702, and the lower end of the spring 5746 is fixed to the lower end of the left slider 5704. The spring 5746 exerts an elastic force in the direction of pulling the left slider 5704 upward.

The right drive mechanism 5723 is provided as a pair in the left-right direction with the left drive mechanism 5703, and is a mechanism for moving the right side of the LED board 564 in the front view in the vertical direction. The right drive mechanism 5723 includes a right slider 5724, an extension 5726, a guide hole 5728, a guide 5730, a motor 5732, a drive gear 5734, a first driven gear 5736, a second driven gear 5738, and a second driven gear 5738. 3 driven gears 5740 and an optical sensor 5742.

Each component of the right drive mechanism 5723 functions similarly to each component of the left drive mechanism 5703, although there is a difference in whether the LED board 564 is moved up and down on the left side or on the right side. Therefore, detailed description of each component of the right drive mechanism 5723 will be omitted.

(Operation explanation of left drive mechanism)
The operation of the left drive mechanism 5703 will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 and 47. FIG. 47 is an example of a front view of the decorative accessory drive mechanism 570, and shows a state in which the LED board 564 (that is, the decorative accessory 560) shown in FIG. 43 described above has been lowered to the lowest end.

The left drive mechanism 5703 operates in synchronization with the right drive mechanism 5723 to move the LED board 564 (for example, see FIG. 43) up and down. Note that the operating principle of the right drive mechanism 5723 is the same as that of the left drive mechanism 5703, although the rotation direction of the motor 5740 when moving the LED board 564 up and down is opposite to the rotation direction of the motor 5720 of the left drive mechanism 5703. Therefore, the explanation will be omitted.

When the motor 5712 of the left drive mechanism 5703 rotates, the drive gear 5714, first driven gear 5716, second driven gear 5718, and third driven gear 5720 sequentially rotate with the rotation. When the third driven gear 5720 rotates, the boss 57202 revolves around the center of the third driven gear 5720. When the boss 57202 rotates around the center of the third driven gear 5720, the boss 57202 moves up and down while sliding in the left and right direction within the guide hole 5708. As the boss 57202 moves up and down, the left slider 5704 moves up and down along the guide 5710.

In this way, by driving the left drive mechanism 5703 and the right drive mechanism 5723, the LED board 564 can be moved in the vertical direction, and as a result, the decorative accessory cover 562 can be operated in the vertical direction. Note that the left drive mechanism 5703 and the right drive mechanism 5723 are driven based on the results of an internal lottery to be described later. That is, the accessory performance in which the decorative accessory 560 operates downward (the accessory performance in which the decorative accessory 560 advances toward the front position of the front screen 512 on which the image is projected) is based on the result of an internal lottery. will be carried out.

[3-3-6. Front projection device]
The front projection device 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 40 and 48. FIG. 48 is a schematic side view showing an example of a mode in which images are projected onto the rear screen unit 290 and the front screen 512 using image lights projected from the rear projection device 120 and the front projection device 600, respectively. be. Note that since FIG. 48 is a schematic diagram, there are some differences from the actual one, such as the installation angles of the projectors 122, 126, and 622.

The front projection device 600 is housed in an area surrounded by a front door upper frame 5521, a left frame (not shown), and a right frame (not shown), and is located behind the decorative accessory 560. Further, the front projection device 600 is arranged at approximately the same height position as the decorative accessory 560 and the large accessory main body portion 230.

The front projection device 600 includes a front projector 622 that can project image light, and a front mirror 624 that reflects the image light projected from the front projector 622.

[3-3-6-1. Front projector]
As shown in FIG. 40, the front projector 622 is fixed toward the front within a region surrounded by the front door upper frame 5521, a left frame (not shown), and a right frame (not shown).

The front projector 622 projects image light toward a front mirror 624 placed ahead of the front projector 622 . The image light projected toward the front mirror 624 is reflected by the front mirror 624. The reflected light (image light) reflected by the front mirror 624 is projected onto the upper area of the front screen 512 and is not projected onto the lower area (the front area of the game area 320 (for example, see image light A in FIG. 48). .

The reason why the image is not projected onto the lower area of the front screen 512 is to ensure the visibility of the game balls flowing down the game area 320. However, if the mode is such that the visibility of the game balls flowing down the game area 320 can be ensured, the image is projected to include the lower area of the front screen 512, as shown in image light B in FIG. 48, for example. may be done.

In this embodiment, the front projector 622 is arranged so that the image light reflected by the front mirror 624 is mainly projected onto approximately the upper half of the front screen 512.

Note that there is no particular limitation on which area of the front screen 512 the image light projected from the front projector 622 is projected onto, and for example, it may be projected onto substantially the entire area of the front screen 512. Alternatively, the image may be projected onto a part of the area (for example, only the upper area). When the image light projected from the front projector 622 is projected onto substantially the entire area of the front screen 512, the lower area of the front screen 512, which is farther from the front projector 622, has a lower image than the upper area. There is a risk that the image will not be projected clearly. Therefore, when it is desired to uniformly project almost the entire area of the front screen 512 with the image light projected from the front projector 622, the transmittance of the front screen 512 is set lower in the lower area than in the upper area. It is preferable.

[3-3-6-2. Front mirror]
As shown in FIG. 40, the front mirror 624 is in a state in which the reflective surface faces rearward within an area surrounded by the front door upper frame 5521, a left frame (not shown), and a right frame (not shown). It is fixed at More specifically, the front mirror 624 is arranged to reflect the image light projected from the front projector 622 and to project the reflected image light onto the front screen 512.

Moreover, when the above-mentioned LED board 564 and ornamental object 560 operate downward from the original position, the front mirror 624 exposes the front surface, which is the surface on the opposite side to the reflective surface. Therefore, the front surface of the front mirror 624 has a decorative portion so that the front surface of the front mirror 624 is not spoiled in appearance even if the front surface of the front mirror 624 is exposed.

Note that this decorative portion may be combined with the decorative accessory cover 562 to form a specific shape. As a result, it becomes possible to suitably perform a new performance of the action of the movable accessory while ensuring the aesthetic appearance when the movable accessory is activated. In particular, the decorative portion on the front surface of the front mirror 624 cannot be seen from the front when the LED board 564 and the decorative accessory cover 562 are at the original position, and when the LED board 564 and the decorative accessory cover 562 move downward. Since it becomes visible only after the object presentation is performed, it is possible to attract the player's interest in the accessory presentation in which the LED board 564 and the ornamental object cover 562 operate. The above-mentioned "specific form" corresponds to a specific character, a specific logo, or the like.

In this way, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the decorative accessory 560 that performs an accessory effect that advances toward the front position of the front screen 512 based on the result of an internal lottery to be described later is placed above the front screen 512. It is located. The front screen 512 can be considered to correspond to, for example, a liquid crystal display in a conventional gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine), and the decorative accessory 560 is a movable accessory disposed above, for example, a center accessory in a conventional gaming machine. It can be seen as equivalent to a role item. That is, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, both the image projected on the front screen 512 based on the result of the internal lottery and the accessory presentation by the decorative accessory 560 that advances toward the front position of the front screen 512. The game is played at a location closer to the player than in conventional gaming machines. Further, in the front door unit 500, a firing handle 588 that can fire a game ball as a game medium toward the game area 320 is arranged below the front screen 512. Therefore, the game machine 1 of this embodiment can give the player the feeling of firing a game ball from the firing handle placed below the game board in a conventional pachinko machine. It becomes possible to provide an unprecedented and innovative gaming machine 1.

[4. Electrical configuration of gaming machine]
Next, the control circuit of the gaming machine 1 will be explained using FIG. 49.

As shown in FIG. 49, the gaming machine 1 mainly includes a main control circuit 720 that controls the game, and a sub-control circuit 730 that controls the performance according to the progress of the game.

The main control circuit 720 includes a main CPU 721, a main ROM 722 (read-only memory), a main RAM 723 (read/write memory), and the like.

A main ROM 722, a main RAM 723, etc. are connected to the main CPU 721. The main CPU 721 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the main ROM 722.

The main ROM 722 stores programs for controlling the operation of the gaming machine 1 by the main CPU 721, various tables, and the like.

The main RAM 723 has a function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area of the main CPU 721. Note that in this embodiment, the main RAM 723 is used as a temporary storage area of the main CPU 721, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any storage medium that can be read and written may be used.

The main RAM 723 is provided with a storage area in which information about the special symbol game is stored as a starting memory. Specifically, the main RAM 723 includes a first special symbol starting storage area (0) in which information about the special symbol game corresponding to the first special symbol that is changing is stored as a starting memory, and a first special symbol game information for an upper limit of four times. A first special symbol starting storage area (1) to a first special symbol starting storage area (4) are provided in which information of a special symbol game corresponding to a special symbol is stored as a starting memory. Similarly, the main RAM 723 includes a second special symbol starting storage area (0) in which information about the special symbol game corresponding to the second special symbol that is changing is stored as a starting memory, and a second special symbol game for up to four times. A second special symbol starting storage area (1) to a second special symbol starting storage area (4) are provided in which information of a special symbol game corresponding to a symbol is stored as starting memory.

The main control circuit 720 also includes an initial reset circuit 724 that generates a reset signal when the power is turned on, an I/O port 725, a command output port 726, a backup capacitor 727, and the like. The initial reset circuit 724 is connected to the main CPU 721. The I/O port 725 transmits input signals from various devices to the main CPU 721 and output signals from the main CPU 721 to various devices. The command output port 726 is for transmitting commands from the main CPU 721 to the sub control circuit 730. The backup capacitor 727 maintains various data stored in the main RAM 723 by quickly supplying power to the main RAM 723, for example, in the event of a power outage.

Further, various devices (members) are connected to the main control circuit 720.

For example, the main control circuit 720 includes a normal symbol display section 701, a normal symbol reserve display section 702, a first special symbol display section 703, a second special symbol display section 704, a first special symbol reserve display section 705, A second special symbol reservation display section 706, a starting opening solenoid 707 that drives a blade member (not shown) of a normal electric accessory (not shown), a big winning opening solenoid 708 that drives a shutter (not shown), etc. are connected. ing. The main control circuit 720 can control the operations of these devices (members) by transmitting signals. The main control circuit 720 also includes a calling device (not shown) that has functions such as calling a hall attendant and displaying the number of wins, and is used to send data to a hall computer that manages pachinko machines in the entire hall. An external terminal board (not shown) is connected.

Further, the main control circuit 720 is connected to a first starting port switch 709, a second starting port switch 710, a passage gate switch 711, a count switch 712, a general winning port switch 713, and the like. When a game ball is detected by these members, a predetermined detection signal is supplied to the main control circuit 720 from the members. Further, the main control circuit 720 is connected to a backup clear switch 754 and the like that clears backup data in the event of a power outage in response to an operation by a manager of the gaming hall.

Further, a payout/emission control circuit 750 is connected to the main control circuit 720. The payout/launch control circuit 750 is connected to a payout device 751 that pays out game balls, a launch device 752 that shoots game balls, a card unit 755, and the like. The dispensing device 751 is provided in a dispensing unit (not shown). A ball lending operation panel 756 is connected to the card unit 755, and a signal is supplied to the ball lending operation panel 756 in accordance with the player's operation.

When the payout/launch control circuit 750 receives the prize ball control command supplied from the main control circuit 720 or the rental ball control signal supplied from the card unit 755, it transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 751, Control is performed to cause the payout device 751 to pay out game balls. Further, when the firing handle 588 is grasped by the player and rotated clockwise, the payout/firing control circuit 750 applies power to the firing solenoid according to the rotation angle (rotation amount). Controls the supply and firing of game balls.

Further, a sub control circuit 730 is connected to the command output port 726. The sub-control circuit 730 controls the projection of the front projector 622, the first rear projector 122, and the second rear projector 124, and controls the sound generated from the speaker 740 in accordance with various commands supplied from the main control circuit 720. , controls the light of the lamp 25, etc.

Note that in this embodiment, the main control circuit 720 supplies commands to the sub-control circuit 730, while the sub-control circuit 730 is configured to be unable to supply signals to the main control circuit 720; however, the present invention is not limited to this. The configuration may be such that signals can be transmitted from the control circuit 730 to the main control circuit 720.

The sub control circuit 730 includes a sub CPU 731, a program ROM 202, a work RAM 203, a front projector control circuit 734, a first rear projector control circuit 735, a second rear projector control circuit 736, an audio control circuit 737, a lamp control circuit 738, and accessory control. It is equipped with a circuit 739 and the like. The sub-control circuit 730 executes effects according to the progress of the game in accordance with commands from the main control circuit 720. Further, the sub-control circuit 730 is connected to a production button switch 742 that is turned on and off by operating a production button (no reference numeral).

The sub CPU 731 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the program ROM 202. In particular, the sub CPU 731 controls the sub control circuit 730 according to various commands supplied from the main control circuit 720.

The program ROM 202 stores programs for controlling the game performance of the pachinko game machine 1 by the sub CPU 731, various tables, and the like.

In this embodiment, the main ROM 102 and the program ROM 202 are used as storage means for storing programs, tables, etc., but the present invention is not limited to this. If so, another aspect may be used. For example, the storage means may be a hard disk device, a storage medium such as a CD-ROM, a DVD-ROM, or a ROM cartridge. Further, the programs, tables, etc. do not have to be recorded in advance, but may be downloaded after power is turned on and recorded in the work RAM 203 or the like. Furthermore, the programs, tables, etc. may be recorded on different storage media.

The work RAM 203 has a function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area of the sub CPU 731. Note that in this embodiment, the work RAM 203 is used as a temporary storage area of the sub CPU 731, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any storage medium that can be read and written may be used.

The front projector control circuit 734 is a circuit for controlling the projection of image light in the front projector 622. The front projector control circuit 734 includes a video data processor (hereinafter referred to as VDP), a video data ROM that stores data for generating various video data, a frame buffer that buffers video data, and a frame buffer that buffers video data. It is equipped with a D/A converter and the like that convert it into a signal.

The front projector control circuit 734 can perform various processes for projecting image light onto the front screen 512 according to data supplied from the sub CPU 731. The front projector control circuit 734 temporarily stores image data for causing the front projector 622 to project image light in a frame buffer in response to an image light projection command supplied from the sub CPU 731. The video data for causing the front projector 622 to project the video light includes various video data related to the game, such as identification symbol video data indicating identification symbols, background video data, performance video data, and the like.

The front projector control circuit 734 then supplies the video data stored in the frame buffer to the D/A converter at a predetermined timing. The D/A converter converts the video data into a video signal and supplies the converted video signal to the front projector 622 at a predetermined timing. When a video signal is supplied to the front projector 622, the front projector 622 projects video light related to the video signal. In this way, the front projector control device 734 can control the front projector 622 to project images related to the game.

The first rear projector control circuit 735 is a circuit for controlling projection in the first rear projector 122. Further, the second rear projector control circuit 736 is a circuit for controlling projection in the second rear projector 124. The configurations of the first rear projector control circuit 735 and the second rear projector control circuit 736 are similar to the front projector control circuit 734, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The audio control circuit 737 is a circuit for controlling the audio generated from the speaker 740. The audio control circuit 737 includes a sound source IC that controls audio, an audio data ROM that stores various audio data, an amplifier (hereinafter referred to as AMP) for amplifying audio signals, and the like.

The sound source IC controls the sound generated from the speaker 740. The sound source IC selects one sound data from a plurality of sound data stored in the sound data ROM in response to a sound generation command supplied from the sub CPU 731. The sound source IC also reads the selected audio data from the audio data ROM, converts the audio data into a predetermined audio signal, and supplies the converted audio signal to the AMP. AMP amplifies the audio signal and causes the speaker 740 to generate audio.

The lamp control circuit 738 is a circuit for controlling the lamps 25 including decorative lamps and the like. The lamp control circuit 738 includes a drive circuit for supplying a lamp control signal, a decoration data ROM in which a plurality of types of lamp decoration patterns are stored, and the like.

The accessory control circuit 739 is a circuit for controlling movable accessories such as the large accessory main body 230, the light guide plates 234 and 236, and the decorative accessory 560. The accessory control circuit 739 includes a drive circuit for supplying a drive signal, a lighting circuit for supplying a lighting control signal, and a controller in which operation patterns and lighting patterns are stored for each accessory 230, 560. It has physical data ROM, etc.

Further, the drive circuit selects one operation pattern from a plurality of operation patterns stored in the accessory data ROM in response to an accessory activation command supplied from the sub CPU 731. Then, by reading the selected motion pattern from the accessory data ROM and supplying a drive signal corresponding to the read motion pattern, the large accessory drive mechanisms 240, 260, the light guide plate rotation drive mechanisms 2340, 2360, the upper and lower light guide plates, etc. Mechanical operation of each accessory (large accessory main body 230, light guide plates 234, 236, decoration accessory 560) through drive mechanisms 239, 270, drive mechanisms 5703, 5723 that drive the decoration accessory 560, etc. control. Further, the lighting circuit selects one lighting pattern from a plurality of lighting patterns stored in the accessory data ROM based on a lighting command supplied from the sub CPU 731. Then, by reading the selected lighting pattern from the accessory data ROM and supplying a lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern, each accessory (large accessory body 230, light guide plates 234, 236, The lighting operation of the decorative accessory 560) is controlled.

[5. Functional flow]
Next, the functional flow of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described using FIG. 50. FIG. 50 is a diagram showing a functional flow of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention.

As shown in FIG. 50, the pachinko game is a game in which a game ball is fired by a user's operation, and when the game ball wins various prizes, a game ball payout control process is performed. Further, pachinko games include special symbol games using special symbols and normal symbol games using normal symbols.

When it becomes a "jackpot" in a special symbol game or a "hit" in a normal symbol game, the probability that the game ball will win increases relatively, and the payout control process for the game ball is more likely to be performed. Become.

In addition, various winnings include special symbol start winning, which is one of the conditions for variable display of special symbols in special symbol games, and one condition for variable display of normal symbols in normal symbol games. It also includes a certain normal symbol starting prize.

In addition, "variable display" as used in this specification is a concept in which identification symbols are displayed in a variable manner from the start to the end of one special symbol game, for example, a variable display of identification symbols in one variable display. and stop performance. The variation performance and stop performance of the identification symbol may be performed multiple times in one variable display. Note that the fluctuating performance is merely a visual performance, and its meaning is different from the fluctuating display of the variable display.

Further, in the "variable display", for example, a "derivation display" in which a special symbol (identification symbol) is displayed as a result of a special symbol game can be performed. That is, in this specification, the operation from the start of the "variable display" to the "derived display" is referred to as one "variable display."

Hereinafter, an outline of the processing flow of the special symbol game and the normal symbol game will be explained. The special symbol game and the normal symbol game are executed by the main CPU 721 as control processing.

(1) When a special symbol starts winning in a special symbol game, random values (random value for jackpot determination and random value for symbol determination) are extracted from the jackpot determination counter and the symbol determination counter, respectively. Each random number value is stored (see the flow of the special symbol start winning process during the special symbol game shown in FIG. 50).

Further, as shown in FIG. 50, in the special symbol control process during the special symbol game, it is first determined whether a condition for starting variable display of the special symbol is satisfied. In this determination process, it is checked whether various data such as random numbers are stored due to the special symbol starting winning, and one condition is that various data such as random numbers are stored, and the variable display of the special symbol is It is determined that the conditions for starting the process have been met.

Next, when starting variable display of special symbols, the jackpot determination random number value extracted from the jackpot determination counter is referred to, and a jackpot determination is made as to whether or not it is a "jackpot". After that, a stop symbol determination process is performed. In this process, the random number value for symbol determination extracted from the symbol determination counter and the result of the above-mentioned jackpot determination are referred to, and a special symbol to be stopped and displayed is determined.

Next, a variation pattern determination process is performed. In this process, a random number value is extracted from a counter for determining a variation pattern, and the random number value, the result of the above-mentioned jackpot determination, and the above-mentioned special symbol to be stopped and displayed are referred to, and a variation pattern of the special symbol is determined.

Next, performance pattern determination processing is performed. In this process, a random value is extracted from the production pattern determining counter, and the random value, the result of the jackpot determination described above, the special symbol to be stopped and displayed, and the variation pattern of the special symbol described above are referred to, A performance pattern to be executed in conjunction with the variable display of special symbols is determined.

Next, as a result of the determined jackpot determination, the special symbol to be stopped and displayed, the variation pattern of the special symbol, and the performance pattern accompanying the variable display of the special symbol are referred to, and a variable display control process is performed to control the variable display of the special symbol. , and performance control processing for performing a predetermined performance.

Then, when the variable display control process and the effect display control process are completed, it is determined whether or not there is a "big hit". In this determination process, if it is determined that a "jackpot" has been achieved, a jackpot game control process for performing a jackpot game is executed. In addition, in the jackpot game, the possibility of winning the various prizes mentioned above increases. On the other hand, if it is determined that the "big hit" has not occurred, the jackpot game control process is not executed.

If it is determined that the "big hit" has not been achieved, or if the jackpot game control process has ended, a game state transition control process is performed to shift the game state. In this gaming state transition control process, the normal gaming state, which is different from the jackpot gaming state, is managed.

As a normal gaming state, for example, in the above-mentioned jackpot determination, a gaming state in which the probability of being judged as a "jackpot" increases (hereinafter referred to as "high probability gaming state"), or a gaming state in which it is easy to win a special symbol starting prize. (hereinafter referred to as "time-saving gaming state"). After that, the process of determining whether or not to start variable display of the special symbols is performed again, and after that, various processes of the special symbol control process described above are repeated.

In addition, in the pachinko game machine of this embodiment, when the game ball starts winning while the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, various data acquired at the time of starting winning (random value for jackpot determination, random value for determining symbol, etc.) ) is stored until a condition for starting variable display of special symbols is met. In this way, storing various data until the conditions for starting the variable display of special symbols are satisfied is called "suspension", and the various data that is put on hold is called starting memory.

In other words, if a game ball starts winning while a special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the variable display (variable display) of the special symbol corresponding to the starting prize is suspended, and after the variable display of the currently executed special symbol ends. Variable display of the reserved special symbols is started. Hereinafter, the variable display of the reserved special symbol will also be referred to as a "reserved ball."

In addition, in the pachinko game machine of this embodiment, as will be described later, two types of special symbol starting winnings are provided (first starting opening winning and second starting opening winning), and a maximum of four winnings are provided for each special symbol starting winning. It is possible to obtain a reserved ball. That is, in this embodiment, a maximum of eight reserved balls can be acquired.

Although not shown in FIG. 50, the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment determines whether the held balls are a hit or miss (whether or not a "jackpot" has been won) based on the above-mentioned information on the held balls, and further, based on the judgment result. It has a function to perform a predetermined effect based on the information, that is, a pre-read effect function.

(2) When there is a normal symbol starting prize in the normal symbol game, a random value is extracted from the hit determination counter and the random value is stored (as shown in Fig. 50, the normal symbol starting winning in the normal symbol game (See processing flow).

Further, as shown in FIG. 50, in the normal symbol control process during the normal symbol game, it is first determined whether a condition for starting variable display of the normal symbols is satisfied. In this determination process, it is referenced whether or not a random number value is stored due to the normal symbol starting winning, and if the random number value is stored as one of the conditions, the condition for starting the variable display of the normal symbol is established. Discern.

Next, when starting the variable display of the normal symbols, the random value extracted from the hit determination counter is referred to and a hit determination is made as to whether or not it is a "win". After that, a variation pattern determination process is performed. In this process, the result of the hit determination is referred to and the variation pattern of the normal symbols is determined.

Next, the determined result of the hit determination and the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbols are referred to, and a variable display control process for controlling the variable display of the normal symbols and an effect control process for performing a predetermined effect are executed.

When the variable display control process and the effect display control process are completed, it is determined whether or not there is a "win". In this determination process, if it is determined that it is a "win", a winning game control process for performing a winning game is executed.

In the winning game control process, the possibility of winning the various prizes mentioned above increases, especially the possibility of winning a special symbol starting prize of the game ball in the special symbol game. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not a "win", the winning game control process is not executed. After that, the process of determining whether to start the variable display of the normal symbols is performed again, and after that, the various processes of the normal symbol control process described above are repeated.

As mentioned above, in a pachinko game, the payout of game balls is controlled based on conditions such as whether or not there will be a "jackpot" in the special symbol game, the transition status of the gaming state, and whether or not there will be a "win" in the normal symbol game. Ease of processing changes.

In this embodiment, as a method for extracting various random numbers, a soft random number method is used in which random numbers are generated by executing a program. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, if a pachinko game machine is equipped with a random number generator whose random numbers are updated at a predetermined period, a random number is obtained from a counter (so-called ring counter) in the random number generator. A hard random number method for extracting may be adopted as the method for extracting the various random numbers described above.

Note that when using the hard random number method, by determining the initial value of the random number value at a timing different from the predetermined cycle, it is possible to prevent the same random number value from being extracted at the predetermined cycle.

[6. Production by sub CPU731]
The sub CPU 731 (each projector control circuit 734, 735, 736) controls the image light projected from each projector, and projects an image as a performance onto each screen. The first rear projector 122 projects image light onto the upper rear screen 2902, and the second rear projector 124 projects image light onto the lower rear screen 2904 and the intermediate rear screen 2906, respectively, to display various effects on the rear screen unit 290. Further, the front projector 622 projects image light onto the front screen 512 to perform various effects on the front screen 512.

Specifically, in this embodiment, image light is projected from the first rear projector 122 so that an effect based on the result of the internal lottery is projected onto the upper rear screen 2902. Further, image light is projected from the second rear projector 124 so that an image imitating a cell image or a liquid crystal display area of a game board is projected onto the lower rear screen 2904. In an area where an image imitating the liquid crystal display area is projected, image light is projected from the second rear projector 124 so that an image of a variation effect of symbols based on the result of the internal lottery is projected. Further, an effect based on the result of the internal lottery is also projected on the front screen 512.

Note that the effects based on the results of the internal lottery may be projected on all of the upper rear screen 2902, lower rear screen 2904, intermediate rear screen 2906, and front screen 512, or may be projected on a specific screen during normal times. It may be projected only on the screen, and may be projected on all screens at a specific time (for example, when the result of an internal lottery is a jackpot or there is a possibility of a jackpot). It is possible to appropriately select which of these screens is used to project what kind of image.

In addition, in the area where the image imitating the liquid crystal display area is projected (the area where the image of the variation effect of the symbols is projected), special symbol display sections (first special symbol display section 703, second special symbol display section 703, second special symbol display section 703, etc. An effect image corresponding to the special symbol displayed on the section 704) is projected. At this time, for example, when the special symbols are being displayed in a variable manner in the special symbol section (first special symbol display section 703, second special symbol display section 704), for example, 1 to 8 are displayed, except in specific cases. A variable display of a plurality of production identification patterns (decorative patterns) consisting of numbers, various characters, etc. is projected.

Then, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the special symbol section (first special symbol display section 703, second special symbol display section 704), an area where an image imitating the liquid crystal display area of the lower rear screen 2904 is projected. Also, a plurality of identification symbols corresponding to the special symbol are stopped and displayed.

When the special symbol stopped and displayed in the special symbol section (first special symbol display section 703, second special symbol display section 704) is in a specific manner (the result of the stop display is a "jackpot"), " A video of an effect image for making the player understand that he has won a jackpot is projected onto the rear screen unit 290 and/or the front screen 512.

As an effect to make the player understand that it is a "jackpot", for example, first, a plurality of stopped and displayed identification symbols may be displayed in a specific manner (for example, a manner in which the same identification symbols are lined up along a predetermined direction). ), and then an image announcing a "big win" is displayed.

In addition, in this embodiment, by projection of image light by the second rear projector 124, a first special symbol reservation display section 705 and a second special symbol reservation display section 706, which will be described later, are displayed in the lower area of the lower rear screen 2904. A presentation image related to the displayed content is projected. Note that the area on which the effect image is projected is not limited to the lower rear screen 2904, and may be any of the upper rear screen 2902, the intermediate rear screen 2906, and the front screen 512.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a normal symbol that is stopped and displayed in a normal symbol display section 701 (to be described later) is in a predetermined manner, an effect image that allows the player to grasp the information is displayed on one of the screens 512, 2902, A function for projecting images onto 2904 and 2906 may be further provided.

[7. Display]
[7-1. Special symbol display]
Although not shown, the special symbol display section (first special symbol display section 703, second special symbol display section 704) is a display device that variably displays special symbols (variable display and stop display) in the special symbol game. In this embodiment, a special symbol display section (first special symbol display section 703, second special symbol display section 704) is configured by a 7-segment display that displays special symbols as symbols consisting of numbers, symbols, etc.

Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the special symbol display section (first special symbol display section 703, second special symbol display section 704) may be composed of, for example, a plurality of LEDs. In this case, a display pattern formed by turning on and off a plurality of LEDs is represented as a special symbol.

The special symbol display section (first special symbol display section 703, second special symbol display section 704) is triggered by the fact that a game ball enters the first starting hole or the second starting hole (not shown) (special symbol starting winning). , performs a variable display of special symbols (identification information). Then, the special symbol display section (first special symbol display section 703, second special symbol display section 704) displays the special symbol in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time, and then displays the special symbol in a stopped state.

Hereinafter, the special symbol that is variably displayed when the game ball enters the first starting slot will be referred to as the first special symbol. Further, the special symbol that is variably displayed when the game ball enters the second starting hole is referred to as a second special symbol.

When the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is stopped and displayed in the special symbol display section (first special symbol display section 703, second special symbol display section 704) is in a specific mode ("jackpot" mode) In , the gaming state shifts from the normal gaming state to the jackpot gaming state, which is advantageous to the player.

That is, in the special symbol display section (first special symbol display section 703, second special symbol display section 704), the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner that shifts to the jackpot game state. It was a “big hit.”

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot opening is opened in a predetermined manner, making it easier to win game balls and making it possible to win a large amount of prize balls. Specifically, in this embodiment, the game ball enters the first starting hole, and the first special symbol appears in the special symbol display section (first special symbol display section 703, second special symbol display section 704). If the game is stopped and displayed in this manner, the grand prize opening will be in an open state.

The open state of each grand prize opening is maintained until a predetermined number of game balls are won or until a certain period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed. Then, when any of these conditions is met, the grand prize opening which was in the open state becomes closed.

Hereinafter, a game in which the big prize opening is in a state where it is easy to accept game balls (open state) will be referred to as a round game. The grand prize opening will be closed between round games.

Further, a round game is counted as the number of rounds such as 1 round, 2 rounds, etc. For example, the first round game is called the first round, and the second round game is called the second round.

In addition, in the special symbol display section (first special symbol display section 703, second special symbol display section 704), if the special symbol that is stopped and displayed is in a mode other than the specific mode ("lose" mode), , the game state does not change unless the player wins the falling lottery.

That is, in the special symbol game, the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner by the special symbol display section (first special symbol display section 703, second special symbol display section 704), and then the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the game is played depending on the result. This is a game in which states are transitioned or maintained.

In addition, in the pachinko game machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting hole during the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first special symbol corresponding to the winning is variablely displayed. (holding ball) is held.

Then, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol currently being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the suspended first special symbol is started. In this embodiment, the number of variable displays of the first special symbol to be reserved (so-called "number of reserved symbols (number of reserved balls)") is defined as a maximum of four times (pieces).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, if the game ball enters the second starting slot during the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the variable display of the second special symbol (holding ball) corresponding to the winning is It will be put on hold.

Then, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is currently being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol that has been on hold is started. In this embodiment, the number of variable displays of the second special symbols to be suspended (the number of suspended symbols) is defined as a maximum of four times (pieces). Therefore, in this embodiment, the maximum number of reserved special symbols for variable display is 8 in total.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the reserved balls of the first special symbol and the reserved balls of the second special symbol are mixed, the variable display of one special symbol is performed with priority over the variable display of the other special symbol. . Specifically, the reserved balls of the second special symbol are consumed preferentially than the reserved balls of the first special symbol. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and when the reserved balls of the first special symbol and the reserved balls of the second special symbol are mixed, a variable display of the special symbols may be executed in the order in which they are reserved.

[7-2. Normal symbol display area]
Although not shown, the normal symbol display section 701 is a display that variably displays normal symbols (variable display and static display) in a normal symbol game that is played based on a game ball passing through a gate provided in the gaming area 320. The normal symbol display section 701 is composed of a plurality of LEDs (normal symbol display LEDs). In the normal symbol display section 701, a display pattern constituted by lighting and extinguishing of each normal symbol display LED is displayed as a normal symbol.

The normal symbol display section 701 alternately lights and extinguishes two normal symbol display LEDs in response to the passing of the game ball through the ball passage detector, and performs a variable display of the normal symbols. Then, the normal symbol display section 701 displays the normal symbols in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time, and then displays the normal symbols in a stopped state.

In the normal symbol display section 701, when the stopped and displayed normal symbol is in a predetermined mode (a "winning" mode), the normal electric accessory changes from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined period. On the other hand, when the stopped and displayed normal symbol is in a mode other than the predetermined mode (a "losing" mode), the normal electric accessory maintains the closed state.

That is, the normal symbol game is a game in which the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner by the normal symbol display section 701, then the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, and the normal electric accessory is operated according to the result.

In addition, when the game ball passes the ball passage detector during the variable display of the normal symbols, the variable display of the normal symbols is suspended. Then, when the normal symbol currently being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the suspended normal symbol is started. In this embodiment, the number of variable displays of normal symbols to be held (ie, the "number of pending items") is defined as a maximum of four times (pieces).

[7-3. Normal symbol holding display device]
Although not shown, the normal symbol retention display device is a device that displays the number of reserved symbols in a variable display of ordinary symbols, and is equipped with a plurality of ordinary symbol retention display LEDs. By turning on and off the LED, the number of pending symbols is displayed in a variable display of normal symbols.

Specifically, in the normal symbol holding display device, the normal symbol holding display LED is displayed according to the number of holdings in the variable display of normal symbols, and the normal symbol holding display LED is displayed according to the number of holdings in the variable display of normal symbols. A maximum of 4 lights will be lit.

[7-4. 1st special symbol holding display device]
The first special symbol reservation display section 705 is arranged at the lower right part of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16.

The first special symbol reservation display section 705 is a device that displays information regarding the variable display of the first special symbol being reserved (the reserved ball of the first special symbol). In this embodiment, the first special symbol reservation display section 705 includes a plurality of first special symbol reservation display LEDs.

Specifically, in the first special symbol reservation display section 705, the first special symbol reservation display LED is displayed according to the number of reservations in the variable display of the first special symbol, and the first special symbol reservation display LED is the first special symbol reservation display LED. A maximum of four special symbols are lit up depending on the number of special symbols on hold.

[7-5. 2nd special symbol holding display device]
The second special symbol reservation display section 706 is arranged at the lower right part of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16.

The second special symbol reservation display section 706 is a device that displays information regarding the variable display of the second special symbol being reserved (second special symbol reservation ball), and the second special symbol reservation display section 706 is , a plurality of second special symbol pending display LEDs.

Specifically, in the second special symbol reservation display section 706, the second special symbol reservation display LED is displayed according to the number of reservations in the variable display of the second special symbol, and the second special symbol reservation display LED is 2 A maximum of 4 special symbols are lit up depending on the number of special symbols on hold.

Next, the data structure of the main control circuit 720 will be explained using FIGS. 51 to 53.

[8. Various tables]
[8-1. Hit random number judgment table]
FIG. 51 is a diagram showing a winning random number determination table (first starting port, second starting port) stored in the main ROM 722 of the main control circuit 720. The hit random number determination table (first starting slot) determines whether a "big hit", "small hit", or "loss" is determined based on the random number value for jackpot determination obtained when a game ball enters the first starting slot. It will be referred to to determine one of them by lottery. The hit random number determination table (second starting slot) determines either a "jackpot" or a "loss" by lottery based on the random number for jackpot determination obtained when a game ball enters the second starting slot. Referenced from time to time.

The random number value for jackpot determination is a random number value for determining the lottery result that is performed in response to the starting opening winning. More specifically, the random number value for jackpot determination is a value indicating the lottery result of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol). In this embodiment, the random number value for jackpot determination is selected from 0 to 65535 (65536 types).

In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting slot, one of "big hit", "small hit", and "loss" is determined by lottery. Therefore, in the hit random number determination table (at the time of winning the first starting opening), "big hit" and "small hit" are displayed for each probability variable flag value ("0 (= off)" or "1 (= on)"). The range (width) of the random numerical value for jackpot judgment that determines the winning of each of "Jackpot Judgment Value Data", "Small Hit Judgment Value Data", and "Loss Judgment Value" data”) is defined. The probability change flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 723, and is a flag for managing whether the gaming state is a "high probability gaming state". When the gaming state is a "high probability gaming state", the probability variation flag is "1", and when it is a "low probability gaming state", the probability variation flag is "0".

In this embodiment, when the first starting opening prize is won, if the variable probability flag is "0" and the random number value for determining a hit is one of "0" to "204", a "jackpot" is won; "Jackpot determination value data" is determined. That is, the probability of winning the "jackpot" in this case (jackpot probability (selection rate)) is 205/65536 (≈1/319).

In addition, when the first starting opening 5442 wins, if the variable probability flag is "0" and the random number value for winning determination is one of "205" to "409", a "small win" is won and " "Small hit judgment value data" is determined. That is, the probability of winning a "small win" in this case is 205/65536 (≈1/319).

Furthermore, when the first starting opening 5442 wins, if the probability change flag is "0" and the random number for determining the winning is neither "0" to "409", the "loser" is won and the "loser" is determined as "loser". "value data" is determined.

On the other hand, if the variable probability flag is "1" and the random number value for hit determination is one of "0" to "1637" at the time of winning the first starting opening, the "jackpot" is won and the "jackpot determination "value data" is determined. That is, the probability of winning a "jackpot" in this case (jackpot probability (selection rate)) is 1638/65536 (≈1/40), which is higher than that when the probability variation flag is "0".

In addition, when the first starting opening prize is won, if the probability variable flag is "1" and the random number value for winning determination is one of "1638" to "1842", a "small win" will be won and a "small win" will be won. "Win judgment value data" is determined. That is, the probability of winning a "small win" in this case is 205/65536 (≈1/319), which is the same as when the probability variation flag is "0".

Furthermore, when the first starting opening 5442 wins, if the probability variable flag is "1" and the random number for winning determination is not between "0" and "1842", the "lose" is won and the "lose" is determined as "lost". "value data" is determined.

As described above, in this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting slot, the jackpot probability varies depending on whether the gaming state at the time of winning is the "high probability gaming state". Specifically, when the gaming state is "high probability gaming state" and the game ball enters the first starting slot, the jackpot probability is about 8 times higher than when the gaming state is not "high probability gaming state". Become.

Similarly, when winning the second starting slot, if the variable probability flag is ``0'' and the random number for determining the hit is between ``0'' and ``204,'' a ``jackpot'' is won; "Judgement value data" is determined. That is, the probability of winning the "jackpot" in this case (jackpot probability (selection rate)) is 205/65536 (≈1/319).

In addition, when winning the second starting slot, if the probability variable flag is "0" and the random number for winning determination is not between "0" and "204", the "loser" is won and the "loser judgment value data” is determined.

On the other hand, if the probability variable flag is "1" and the random number value for hit determination is one of "0" to "1637" at the time of winning the second starting opening, the "jackpot" is won and the "jackpot determination" "value data" is determined. That is, the probability of winning a "jackpot" in this case (jackpot probability (selection rate)) is 1638/65536 (≈1/40), which is higher than that when the probability variation flag is "0".

In addition, when winning the second starting slot, if the probability change flag is "1" and the random number for winning determination is not between "0" and "1637", the "loser" is won and the "loser judgment value data” is determined.

As described above, in this embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting slot, it is determined whether or not the gaming state at the time of winning is a "high probability gaming state" without winning a "small hit". The jackpot probability varies depending on the situation, and the jackpot probability when the gaming state is a "high probability gaming state" is about eight times higher than when the gaming state is a "low probability gaming state."

[8-2. Design judgment table]
FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a symbol determination table (first starting port, second starting port) stored in the main ROM 722 of the main control circuit 720. The symbol determination table (first starting hole, second starting hole) is based on the random symbol number obtained when a game ball enters the first starting hole or the second starting hole and the aforementioned judgment value data. It is referred to to select the "select symbol command at hit" and "symbol designation command" that determine the stopping symbol. The "Select symbol command when winning" is a command to specify the winning symbol determined according to the type of winning at the time of winning, and the "Design designation command" specifies the symbol that will be displayed when the special symbols stop changing. This is a command to do this. The symbol random number value is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the symbol determination table (first starting port) of this embodiment, when jackpot determination value data is obtained and the symbol random number value is one of "0" to "9", 10/100 ``z0'' is selected as the winning symbol command and ``zA1'' is selected as the symbol designation command with a probability of . In addition, when jackpot judgment value data is obtained and the symbol random number is one of "10" to "19", "z1" is selected as the winning symbol command with a probability of 10/100. , "zA1" is selected as the symbol designation command. In addition, when jackpot judgment value data is obtained and the symbol random number is one of "20" to "29", "z2" will be selected as the winning symbol command with a probability of 10/100. , "zA1" is selected as the symbol designation command. In addition, when jackpot judgment value data is obtained and the symbol random number is one of "30" to "39", "z3" is selected as the winning symbol command with a probability of 10/100. , "zA1" is selected as the symbol designation command. Also, if jackpot judgment value data is obtained and the symbol random number is one of "40" to "49", "z4" will be selected as the winning symbol command with a probability of 10/100. , "zA1" is selected as the symbol designation command. In addition, when jackpot judgment value data is obtained and the symbol random number is one of "50" to "95", "z5" will be selected as the winning symbol command with a probability of 46/100. , "zA1" is selected as the symbol designation command. In addition, when jackpot judgment value data is obtained and the symbol random number is "96" or "97", "z6" is selected as the symbol command to select at the time of hit with a probability of 2/100, and the symbol designation is "zA4" is selected as the command. In addition, when jackpot judgment value data is obtained and the symbol random number is "98" or "99", "z7" is selected as the winning symbol command with a probability of 2/100, and the symbol designation is "zA5" is selected as the command. In addition, when small hit judgment value data is obtained and the symbol random value is one of "0" to "99", "z8" is selected as the symbol selection command at the time of hit, and "z8" is selected as the symbol designation command. "zA6" is selected. On the other hand, if loss judgment value data is obtained and the symbol random value is one of "0" to "99", the winning selection symbol command is not selected and "zA7" is selected as the symbol designation command. selected.

Furthermore, according to the symbol determination table (second starting port) of this embodiment, when jackpot determination value data is obtained and the symbol random number value is one of "0" to "24", 25 With a probability of /100, "z9" is selected as the winning symbol command and "zA8" is selected as the symbol designating command. In addition, if jackpot judgment value data is obtained and the symbol random number is one of "25" to "49", "z10" will be selected as the winning symbol command with a probability of 25/100. , "zA8" is selected as the symbol designation command. Also, if jackpot judgment value data is obtained and the symbol random number is one of "55" to "99", "z11" will be selected as the winning symbol command with a probability of 50/100. , "zA9" is selected as the symbol designation command. On the other hand, if loss judgment value data is obtained and the symbol random number is one of "0" to "99", the hit selection symbol command is not selected and "zA10" is selected as the symbol designation command. selected.

[8-3. Jackpot type determination table]
FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a jackpot type determination table stored in the main ROM 722 of the main control circuit 720. The jackpot type determination table is referred to in order to determine the jackpot type, such as the number of rounds, whether to turn on the variable probability flag, and whether to turn on the time saving flag, according to the jackpot-related selection symbol command. . In addition, in this embodiment, if a jackpot is won regardless of the type of jackpot, the time saving flag is set to "1". The number of time reductions at this time is determined to be one of 24, 30, 36, 42, 48, and 100, and the determined number of time reductions is set. The probability change flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 723, and is a flag for managing whether the gaming state is a "high probability gaming state". When the gaming state is a "high probability gaming state", the probability variation flag is "1", and when it is a "low probability gaming state", the probability variation flag is "0". Similarly, the time saving flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 723, and is a flag for managing whether the gaming state is the "time saving gaming state". When the gaming state is a "time-saving gaming state", the time-saving flag is "1", and when it is a "non-time-saving gaming state", the time-saving flag is "0". The time saving number of times is the number of fluctuations in the special symbol game in which the time saving game state can be continued. That is, when special symbol fluctuations (special symbol lottery) are performed for the number of times (100) of time-saving games without winning a jackpot in the time-saving gaming state, the time-saving gaming state ends and the state shifts to a non-time-saving gaming state. In this embodiment, the high probability gaming state continues until the next jackpot is won. However, if a predetermined number of special symbol fluctuations (special symbol lottery) are performed without winning the jackpot, the high probability gaming state may end and the state may shift to a low probability gaming state.

According to the jackpot type determination table of this embodiment, when the winning selection symbol command is "z0", the number of rounds is "8", and a jackpot with probability variable flag off and time saving flag on is determined. When the winning selection symbol command is "z1", the number of rounds is "8", and a jackpot with variable probability flag off and time saving flag on is determined. When the winning selection symbol command is "z3", the number of rounds is "8", and a jackpot with variable probability flag off and time saving flag on is determined. When the winning selection symbol command is "z4", the number of rounds is "8", and a jackpot with variable probability flag off and time saving flag on is determined. When the winning selection symbol command is "z5", the number of rounds is "8", and a jackpot with a variable probability flag on and a time saving flag on is determined. When the winning selection symbol command is "z6", the number of rounds is "5", and a jackpot with the variable probability flag on and the time saving flag on is determined. When the winning selection symbol command is "z7", the number of rounds is "16", and a jackpot with the variable probability flag on and the time saving flag on is determined. When the winning selection symbol command is "z9", the number of rounds is "5", and a jackpot with probability variable flag off and time saving flag on is determined. When the winning selection symbol command is "z10", the number of rounds is "5", and a jackpot with a variable probability flag on and a short time flag on is determined. When the winning selection symbol command is "z11", the number of rounds is "16", and a jackpot with the variable probability flag on and the time saving flag on is determined.

In addition, in this embodiment, the jackpot of the time saving flag on is determined regardless of the hit selection symbol command (i.e. jackpot judgment value data), but this is not necessarily the case, and the jackpot judgment value data The jackpot of the time saving flag off may be determined according to the above.

Further, in this embodiment, the sub CPU 731 determines the number of time reductions to be one of 24 times, 30 times, 36 times, 42 times, 48 times, and 100 times, but it is not necessarily limited to this. The time saving gaming state may be controlled so as to continue until the next jackpot is won, or the time saving gaming state may be controlled so as to continue as long as the high probability gaming state continues.

In addition, in this embodiment, the sub CPU 731 controls the high probability gaming state to continue until the next jackpot is won, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and the sub CPU 731 controls the state until the number of times determined in advance (for example, 100 times). It may be controlled so that the high-probability gaming state continues (and then shifts to the low-probability gaming state), or it may be controlled so that the high-probability gaming state continues (and then shifts to the low-probability gaming state), or, in relation to the winning probability of the jackpot, it may be controlled until the next jackpot is won (for example, 10,000 It may be controlled so that the high probability gaming state continues (until the next jackpot is won), or it may be controlled so that the high probability gaming state continues until the next jackpot is won.

Below, various processes executed by the main CPU 721 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 are shown in FIGS. 54 to 72.

[9. Control by main CPU]
[9-1. Power-on processing]
FIG. 54 shows the power-on processing performed by the main CPU 721. When the gaming machine 1 is powered on, as shown in the figure, the main CPU 721 sets an initial value to the stack pointer (step S11).

Next, the main CPU 721 determines whether the power interruption detection signal is ON (step S12). For example, the power interruption detection signal turns ON when the voltage drops to a predetermined level. When the power outage detection signal is ON, the main CPU 721 determines that the power outage detection state is present, and repeats the process of S12 until the power outage detection signal turns OFF. If the power outage detection signal is OFF, the main CPU 721 determines that the power outage has been detected, and proceeds to step S13.

In step S13, the main CPU 721 permits access to the RWM (main RAM 723).

Next, the main CPU 721 performs a sub-control reception reception wait process of waiting until the sub-control circuit 730 becomes able to receive a signal (step S14).

Next, the main CPU 721 performs initialization processing for various devices built into the CPU (step S15).

Next, the main CPU 721 determines whether the backup clear signal is ON (step S16). The backup clear signal is a signal for instructing clearing of the backup contents of the main RAM 723 provided in the main CPU 721 that constitutes the main control circuit 720 and the RAM (not shown) that constitutes the payout/fire control circuit 750. . If the backup clear signal is ON, the main CPU 721 moves to step S23. If the backup clear signal is OFF, the main CPU 721 moves to step S17.

In step S17, the main CPU 721 determines whether the power outage detection flag is set on. The power outage detection flag is a flag indicating that power outage processing has been executed in response to the occurrence of a power outage. If the power outage detection flag is set on, the main CPU 721 moves to step S18. If the power outage detection flag is set to OFF, the main CPU 721 moves to the process of step S23.

In step S18, the main CPU 721 performs a work area damage check on the main RAM 723 using, for example, a checksum.

Next, the main CPU 721 determines whether the work area is normal (step S19). If the work area is normal, the main CPU 721 moves to step S20. If the work area is not normal, the main CPU 721 moves to step S23.

In step S20, the main CPU 721 initializes a work area that requires an initial value upon recovery from a power outage.

Next, the main CPU 721 performs notification settings regarding the high probability gaming state (variable probability gaming state) at the time of power outage recovery (step S21).

Next, the main CPU 721 performs a process of transmitting a power recovery command (power recovery command) to the sub control circuit 730 (step S22). After completing this process, the main CPU 721 ends the power-on process.

In step S23, the main CPU 721 performs processing to clear the work area of the main RAM 723.

Next, the main CPU 721 initializes a work area that requires an initial value when initializing the RWM (main RAM 723) (step S24).

Next, the main CPU 721 performs a process of transmitting a command at the time of RWM initialization (initialization command) to the sub control circuit 730 (step S25).

[9-2. System timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 55 shows system timer interrupt processing by the main CPU 721. System timer interrupt processing is executed, for example, every 2 ms. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 721 saves the values of each register to the stack area of the main RAM 723 (step S31).

Next, the main CPU 721 performs a random number update process to update various random numbers (step S32).

Next, the main CPU 721 executes switch input detection processing for detecting input signals from various switches (step S33). The switch input detection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 56.

Next, the main CPU 721 performs timer update processing to update the values of various timers (step S34).

Next, the main CPU 721 performs command output processing to output (send) various commands to the sub control circuit 730 (step S35).

Next, the main CPU 721 performs a game information output process of outputting (transmitting) various game information to the sub control circuit 730 (step S36). The game information is information related to the game that is processed in the main control circuit 70, the sub-control circuit 730, the payout/fire control circuit 750, etc., and is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 730, the payout/fire control circuit 750, and the hall computer. .

Next, the main CPU 721 performs a process of restoring the saved values of each register (step S37). After completing this process, the main CPU 721 ends the system timer interrupt process.

[9-3. Switch input detection processing]
FIG. 56 shows switch input detection processing by the main CPU 721. The switch input detection process is called as a subroutine during execution of the system timer interrupt process described above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 721 executes the starting opening winning detection process (step S41). The starting opening winning detection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 57.

Next, the main CPU 721 performs a general winning opening passage detection process (step S42). In the general winning opening passage detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of payouts etc. at the time of winning to the general winning opening is set.

Next, the main CPU 721 performs a large winning opening passage detection process (step S43). In the grand prize opening passage detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of pieces to be paid out at the time of winning a prize in the grand prize opening is set.

Next, the main CPU 721 performs a ball passage detector passage detection process (step S44). In the ball passage detector passage detection process, the lottery result (random value) of the normal symbol game is obtained in response to the passage detection of the game ball by the ball passage detector. After completing this process, the main CPU 721 ends the system timer interrupt process.

[9-4. Starting opening winning detection processing]
FIG. 57 shows the starting opening winning detection process by the main CPU 721. The starting opening winning detection process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the switch input detection process described above. As shown in the figure, first, the main CPU 721 determines whether or not a game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 709 (step S51). When a game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 709, the main CPU 721 moves to the process of step S52. If the game ball is not detected by the first starting port switch 709, the main CPU 721 moves to the process of step S59.

In step S52, the main CPU 721 performs a process of setting payout information according to the first starting opening winnings.

Next, the main CPU 721 determines whether the number of pending winnings from the first starting opening (the number of pending first special symbols) is less than four (step S53). If the number of pending items is less than four, the main CPU 721 moves to step S54. If the number of pending items is 4, the main CPU 721 moves to step S59.

In step S54, the main CPU 721 performs a process of adding 1 to the number of pending winnings from the first starting opening.

Next, the main CPU 721 acquires the random numbers for determining a hit and the random symbols, and performs a process of storing these random numbers in the main RAM 723 (step S55).

Next, the main CPU 721 performs a first special stop symbol determination process (step S56). In the first special stop symbol determination process, the hit random number determination table (first starting opening), symbol determination table (first starting opening), and jackpot type determination table are referred to based on the random number value for hit determination and the random symbol number. , determines a symbol designation command, a winning selection symbol command, etc. related to the first special symbol that is scheduled to be stopped and displayed.

Next, the main CPU 721 executes a fluctuation pattern determination process (step S57). In the variation pattern determination process, the variation pattern related to the first special symbol is determined by referring to the gaming state transition table and the variation pattern selection table based on the symbol designation command, judgment value data, gaming state, and table pattern. The fluctuation pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 58.

Next, the main CPU 721 performs a process of setting a command to increase the number of pending winnings from the first starting opening (step S58). The command to increase the number of pending winnings in the first starting opening is a command that indicates that the number of pending winnings in the first special symbol is increased by 1, and is sent to the sub-control circuit 730 together with the command that indicates the fluctuation pattern determined in the process of step S57. is sent.

Next, the main CPU 721 determines whether a game ball is detected by the second starting port switch 710 (step S59). When a game ball is detected by the second starting port switch 710, the main CPU 721 moves to the process of step S60. When the second starting port switch 710 does not detect a game ball, the main CPU 721 ends the starting port winning detection process.

In step S60, the main CPU 721 performs a process of setting payout information according to the second starting opening winnings.

Next, the main CPU 721 determines whether the number of pending winnings from the second starting opening (the number of pending second special symbols) is less than four (step S61). If the number of pending items is less than four, the main CPU 721 moves to step S62. When the number of pending prizes is four, the main CPU 721 ends the starting opening win detection process.

In step S62, the main CPU 721 performs a process of adding 1 to the number of pending winnings from the second starting opening.

Next, the main CPU 721 acquires a random number value for hit determination and a random symbol number value, and performs a process of storing these random numbers in the main RAM 723 (step S63).

Next, the main CPU 721 performs a second special stop symbol determination process (step S64). Similarly to the first special stop symbol determination process, the second special stop symbol determination process also uses a hit random number determination table (second starting opening) and a symbol determination table (second (starting opening), refers to the jackpot type determination table, and determines a symbol designation command, a winning selection symbol command, etc. related to the second special symbol that is scheduled to be stopped and displayed.

Next, the main CPU 721 executes a fluctuation pattern determination process (step S65). In this variation pattern determination process, the variation pattern related to the second special symbol is determined by referring to the gaming state transition table and the variation pattern selection table based on the symbol designation command, judgment value data, gaming state, and table pattern. The fluctuation pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 58.

Next, the main CPU 721 performs a process of setting a command to increase the number of pending winnings from the second starting opening (step S66). The command to increase the number of pending winnings for the second starting opening is a command that indicates that the number of pending winnings for the second special symbol is increased by 1, and is sent to the sub-control circuit 730 together with the command that indicates the fluctuation pattern determined in the process of step S65. is sent. When this process is completed, the main CPU 721 ends the starting opening winning prize detection process.

[9-5. Fluctuation pattern determination process]
FIG. 58 shows the fluctuation pattern determination process by the main CPU 721. The fluctuation pattern determination process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the starting opening winning detection process described above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 721 performs a process of selecting a variation pattern type by referring to a game state transition table and a variation pattern selection table based on a table pattern, a random number value for hit determination, and a symbol random number value, which will be described later. (Step S71).

Next, the main CPU 721 performs a process of selecting first half and second half variation patterns from the selected variation pattern types based on predetermined lottery probabilities (step S72). After completing this process, the main CPU 721 ends the variation pattern determination process.

In addition, since the fluctuation pattern is stored in association with the variable display time of the identification symbol, the fluctuation pattern determined in the above fluctuation pattern determination process is essentially information that can represent the fluctuation time. becomes.

[9-6. Main control main processing]
FIG. 59 shows main control main processing by the main CPU 721. When the gaming machine 1 is powered on, as shown in the figure, the main CPU 721 performs initial setting processing (step S81). In this process, the main CPU 721 performs processes such as the power-on process described above.

Next, the main CPU 721 performs an initial value random number update process (step S82). In this process, the main CPU 721 performs a process of updating the initial value random number counter.

Next, the main CPU 721 performs special symbol control processing (step S83). The special symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 60.

Next, the main CPU 721 performs normal symbol control processing (step S84). The normal symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 66.

Next, the main CPU 721 performs symbol display section control processing (step S85). In this process, the main CPU 721 controls the special symbol display section (first special symbol display section 703, A process is performed in which control signals for driving the second special symbol display section 704) and the normal symbol display section 701 are stored in the main RAM 723. As a result, the main CPU 721 sends a control signal to the special symbol display section (first special symbol display section 703, second special symbol display section 704) and normal symbol display section 701, and sends a control signal to the special symbol display section (first special symbol display section 703, second special symbol display section 704) The symbol display section 703, the second special symbol display section 704) and the normal symbol display section 701 perform variable display and stop display of special symbols and normal symbols based on the received control signals.

Next, the main CPU 721 performs game information data generation processing (step S86). In this process, the main CPU 721 generates a gaming state command regarding gaming information data to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 730, the payout/fire control circuit 750, and the hall computer, and stores it in the main RAM 723.

Next, the main CPU 721 performs storage/gaming state data generation processing (step S87). In this process, the main CPU 721 generates storage/gaming status data to be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 730 based on the value of the probability change flag and the value of the time saving flag, and stores the storage/gaming status data in the main RAM 723. After completing this process, the main CPU 721 moves to the process of step S82.

[9-7. Special symbol control processing]
FIG. 60 shows special symbol control processing by the main CPU 721. The special symbol control process is called as a subroutine during execution of the main control main process mentioned above. Note that the numerical values (“00” to “08”) written in parentheses to the left of each process shown in the figure indicate the value of the control state flag. This control state flag is stored in a predetermined storage area within the main RAM 723. The main CPU 721 advances the special symbol game by executing processing according to the numerical value of the control state flag.

As shown in FIG. 60, the main CPU 721 performs a process of loading a control state flag (step S91). In this process, the main CPU 721 reads the value of the control state flag stored in the main RAM 723. The main CPU 721 determines whether to execute each process of steps S92 to S100, which will be described later, based on the value of the read control state flag. This control state flag indicates the state of the special symbol game and enables execution of any one of steps S92 to S100. Further, the main CPU 721 executes each process at a predetermined timing determined according to the waiting time set for each process of steps S92 to S100. Note that before this predetermined timing is reached, each process is not executed, and processes related to other subroutines are executed. Of course, the aforementioned system timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 55) is also executed at predetermined intervals.

Next, the main CPU 721 performs a special symbol storage check process (step S92). In this process, the main CPU 721 checks the pending number of variable displays of special symbols when the control status flag is a value indicating special symbol memory check processing ("00"), and if the pending number is not "0" (If there is a reserved ball), the winning determination result, the special symbol determination result, the special symbol variation pattern determination result, etc. obtained in the starting opening winning detection process are acquired. In addition, in this process, the main CPU 721 sets the control state flag to a value ("01") indicating the special symbol variable display time management process (step S93), which will be described later, and applies the variable pattern acquired in the current process. Set the variable display time of the corresponding special symbol in the waiting time timer. That is, after the variable display time of the special symbol corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the starting opening winning detection process has elapsed, the special symbol variable display time management process to be described later is set to be executed. On the other hand, when the number of balls on hold is "0" (when there are no balls on hold), the main CPU 721 performs a demo display process to display a demo screen. This special symbol memory check process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 61.

Next, the main CPU 721 performs special symbol variable display time management processing (step S93). In this process, the main CPU 721 sets the control state flag to a value ("01") indicating special symbol variable display time management processing, and when the variable display time of the special symbol has elapsed, the control state flag is set to the special symbol as described below. A value ("02") indicating symbol display time management processing (step S94) is set, and the waiting time after confirmation is set in the waiting time timer. That is, after the post-confirmation waiting time set in the process of step S93 has elapsed, the special symbol display time management process to be described later is set to be executed.

Next, the main CPU 721 performs special symbol display time management processing (step S94). In this process, the main CPU 721 determines if the control status flag is a value ("02") indicating special symbol display time management process and the post-confirmation waiting time set in the process of step S93 has elapsed. It is determined whether the result is a “big hit” or a “small hit”. Then, when the result of the hit determination is a "big hit" or a "small hit", the main CPU 721 sets a value ("03") indicating jackpot start interval management processing (step S95) to be described later in the control state flag. , set the time corresponding to the jackpot start interval in the waiting time timer. That is, after the time corresponding to the jackpot start interval set in the process of step S94 has elapsed, the jackpot start interval management process to be described later is set to be executed. On the other hand, if the result of the hit determination is not a "big hit" or a "small hit", the main CPU 721 sets the control state flag to a value ("08") indicating a special symbol game ending process (step S100), which will be described later. That is, in this case, the special symbol game ending process described later is set to be executed. This special symbol display time management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 62.

Next, the main CPU 721 performs jackpot start interval management processing (step S95). In this process, the main CPU 721 determines whether the control status flag is a value indicating jackpot start interval management processing ("03") and if the time corresponding to the jackpot start interval set in the process of step S94 has elapsed, In order to open the winning hole, variables located in the main RAM 723 are updated based on the data read from the main ROM 722. In addition, in this process, the main CPU 721 sets the control state flag to a value (“04”) indicating the later-described big winning hole opening process (step S96), and also sets the big winning hole opening upper limit time (for example, 30 Seconds) is set to the grand prize opening time timer. That is, by this process, the later-described big winning hole opening process is set to be executed.

Next, the main CPU 721 performs a big winning hole opening process (step S96). In this process, first, the main CPU 721 sets the condition that when the control status flag is a value ("04") indicating the process of opening the big winning opening, the winning opening counter is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, and It is determined whether one of the conditions that the upper limit time has elapsed (the grand winning opening opening time timer is "0") is satisfied (a predetermined closing condition is satisfied). If one of the conditions is met, the main CPU 721 updates the variables located in the main RAM 723 in order to close the big prize opening. Then, the main CPU 721 sets a value (“05”) indicating a residual ball monitoring process in the big winning opening (step S97) to the control state flag, and sets the waiting time timer to the monitoring time of remaining balls in the big winning opening. do. That is, by this process, after the big winning hole remaining ball monitoring time set in step S97 has elapsed, the later-described big winning hole remaining ball monitoring process is set to be executed. In addition, immediately before the end of this big winning hole opening process, an inter-round display command is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 730.

Next, the main CPU 721 performs the remaining ball monitoring process in the big winning hole (step S97). In this process, the main CPU 721 controls the number of times the grand prize opening is opened when the control status flag is a value ("05") indicating the process of monitoring the remaining balls in the grand prize opening and the remaining ball monitoring time in the grand prize opening has elapsed. It is determined whether the condition that the value is greater than or equal to the maximum value of the number of openings of the big prize opening (this is the final round) is satisfied. If it is determined that the above conditions are not met, the main CPU 721 sets the control state flag to a value (“06”) indicating the big winning opening re-opening waiting time management process. The main CPU 721 also sets a time corresponding to the inter-round interval in the waiting time timer. That is, by this process, after the time corresponding to the interval between rounds has elapsed, the waiting time management process before the re-opening of the big winning hole, which will be described later, is set to be executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S97 that the above conditions are met, the main CPU 721 sets a value ("07") indicating jackpot end interval processing in the control state flag, and sets the time corresponding to the jackpot end interval (jackpot end interval time) in the waiting time timer. That is, after the time corresponding to the jackpot end interval set in this process has elapsed, the jackpot end interval process described below is set to be executed.

Next, when the main CPU 721 determines that the value of the grand prize opening number counter is not greater than or equal to the maximum value of the number of openings of the grand prize opening, it performs a waiting time management process before the grand prize opening is re-opened (step S98). In this process, the main CPU 721 releases the grand prize opening when the control state flag is a value ("06") indicating the waiting time management process before the grand prize opening is re-opened, and the time corresponding to the interval between rounds has elapsed. The memory is updated so that the value of the number of times counter is incremented by "1". Further, the main CPU 721 sets a value (“04”) indicating the big winning hole opening process to the control state flag. Then, the main CPU 721 sets the opening upper limit time (for example, 30 seconds) to the big winning opening opening time timer. That is, in this process, the above-described big winning hole opening process (step S96) is set to be executed again. In addition, just before the end of the waiting time management process before the grand prize opening is re-opened, a grand prize opening display command is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 730.

Further, when the main CPU 721 determines that the value of the number of times the big winning hole is opened is equal to or greater than the maximum value of the number of times the big winning hole is opened, the main CPU 721 performs the jackpot end interval process (step S99). In this process, the main CPU 721 sets the control state flag to a value ("07") indicating jackpot end interval processing, and when the time corresponding to the jackpot end interval has elapsed, the main CPU 721 sets a value ("07") indicating special symbol game end processing. 08'') is set in the control status flag. That is, by this process, a setting is made such that the special symbol game ending process, which will be described later, is executed after the process of step S99. In addition, when the above-mentioned hit selection symbol command is any one of "z5", "z6", "z7", "z10", and "z11", the main CPU 721 shifts the gaming state to the variable probability gaming state. When the selected symbol command at the time of winning is any of "z0", "z1", "z2", "z3", "z4" and "z9", the gaming state is changed. Control is performed to bring the game into a non-probability variable gaming state. In addition, when the special symbol lottery result is a small hit (when the random number value for jackpot determination is "small hit determination value data"), the main CPU 721 performs control to maintain the gaming state.

Next, the main CPU 721 performs a special symbol game ending process when the jackpot game state or the small win game state ends, or when a "lose" is won (step S100). In this process, the main CPU 721 updates the memory so that the data indicating the number of pending symbols (starting memory information) is decreased by "1" when the control state flag has a value ("08") indicating the special symbol game end processing. do. The main CPU 721 also updates the special symbol storage area in order to variably display the next special symbol. Further, the main CPU 721 sets a value (“00”) indicating special symbol storage check processing to the control state flag. That is, by this process, the above-mentioned special symbol memory check process (step S92) is set to be executed after the process of step S100. When this special symbol game ending process ends, the main CPU 721 ends the special symbol control process.

As described above, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the special symbol game is advanced by sequentially setting various values in the control state flag. Specifically, when the gaming state is neither a jackpot gaming state nor a small winning gaming state, and the result of the hit determination is "loss", the main CPU 721 sets the control state flag to "00", "01", " 02" and "08" in that order. As a result, the main CPU 721 performs the above-described special symbol memory check process (step S92), special symbol variable display time management process (step S93), special symbol display time management process (step S94), and special symbol game end process (step S100). ) are executed in this order at a predetermined timing.

In addition, when the gaming state is neither a jackpot gaming state nor a small winning gaming state, and the result of the winning determination is "jackpot" or "small winning", the main CPU 721 sets the control state flag to "00" or "01". , "02", and "03" in this order. As a result, the main CPU 721 performs the above-described special symbol memory check process (step S92), special symbol variable display time management process (step S93), special symbol display time management process (step S94), and jackpot start interval management process (step S95). ) are executed in this order at a predetermined timing to control the transition to the jackpot gaming state or the small winning gaming state.

Further, the main CPU 721 sets the control state flags in the order of "04", "05", and "06" when the transition control to the jackpot gaming state or the small winning gaming state is executed. As a result, the main CPU 721 executes the above-mentioned big winning hole opening process (step S96), remaining ball monitoring process in the big winning hole (step S57), and waiting time management process before the big winning hole is re-opened (step S98) in this order. The game is executed at a predetermined timing to execute a jackpot game or a small win game.

Note that when the termination condition of the jackpot gaming state is satisfied during the jackpot gaming state, the main CPU 721 sets the control state flags in the order of "04", "05", "07", and "08". As a result, the main CPU 721 performs the above-described big winning hole opening process (step S96), remaining ball monitoring process in the big winning hole (step S97), jackpot end interval process (step S99), and special symbol game ending process (step S100). are executed in this order at a predetermined timing, and the jackpot game state is ended.

As mentioned above, in the special symbol control process, the process flow is branched depending on the status. In addition, the normal symbol control process (see FIG. 66 described later) in step S84 during the main control main process shown in FIG. 59 also branches the processing flow depending on the status, similar to the special symbol control process.

The processing program of this embodiment is programmed so that pure return processing from a small module to a parent module can be performed using a call instruction when processing is branched according to the status. As a result, in this embodiment, the capacity of the program can be reduced compared to the case where a jump table is arranged to execute the above processing.

[9-8. Special symbol memory check process]
FIG. 61 shows special symbol storage check processing by the main CPU 721. The special symbol storage check process is called as a subroutine during execution of the special symbol control process described above. As shown in the figure, first, the main CPU 721 reads the control state flag from a predetermined storage area in the main RAM 723 by a load process (step S111).

Next, the main CPU 721 determines whether the read control status flag is a value ("00") indicating special symbol storage check processing (step S112). If it is determined that the control state flag is not "00", the main CPU 721 ends the special symbol memory check process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the control state flag is "00", the main CPU 721 moves to step S113.

In step S113, the main CPU 721 determines whether the pending number (second starting memory number) of second starting opening winnings (variable display of second special symbols) is "0". If it is determined that the number of pending winnings from the second starting opening is not "0", the main CPU 721 moves to the process of step S114. If it is determined that the number of pending winnings from the second starting opening is "0", the main CPU 721 moves to the process of step S119.

In step S114, the main CPU 721 subtracts "1" from the value of the second starting memory number corresponding to the pending number of second starting opening winnings. In this embodiment, the main CPU 721 determines whether data is stored in the second special symbol starting storage area (0) to the second special symbol starting storage area (4) provided in the main RAM 723, It is determined whether or not there is a memory for starting a special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol that is being variably displayed or on hold. In the second special symbol start storage area (0), data (information) of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol during the variable display is stored as start memory information. The second special symbol starting memory area (1) to the second special symbol starting memory area (4) are stored in the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol for the four times held (holding balls). data (information) is stored as starting storage information. Note that the starting memory information in each second special symbol starting memory area includes, for example, data indicating a random number value for determining a hit, a random number number for symbols, a determined fluctuation pattern, etc. obtained at the time of winning in the second starting hole 440. It will be done.

Next, the main CPU 721 performs special symbol memory transfer processing based on the second starting opening winning prize (step S115). In this process, the main CPU 721 shifts the data of the second special symbol starting storage areas (1) to (4) to the second special symbol starting storage areas (0) to (3), respectively. At this time, the main CPU 721 also transmits a pending subtraction command to the sub control circuit 730. After that, the main CPU 721 moves to the process of step S116.

In step S116, the main CPU 721 performs a process of setting the control state flag to a value ("01") indicating special symbol variable display time management processing. At this time, the main CPU 721 also transmits a special symbol production start command to the sub control circuit 730.

Next, the main CPU 721 performs a jackpot/small hit determination process (step S117). In this process, the main CPU 721 uses the random number value for jackpot determination extracted at the time of winning the starting opening and previously set in the first special symbol starting storage area (0) or the second special symbol starting storage area (0). Based on this, the determination value data is obtained by referring to the hit determination table (see FIG. 51) corresponding to the type of winning start opening. Then, the main CPU 721 determines whether the winning is a "big hit", a "small hit", or a "loss" based on the acquired determination value data (win determination).

Next, the main CPU 721 sets the variable display time corresponding to the determined special symbol variation pattern in the waiting time timer (step S118). When this process is completed, the main CPU 721 ends the special symbol memory check process.

In step S119, the main CPU 721 determines whether the number of pending first starting opening winnings (variable display of the first special symbol) (second starting memory number) is "0". If it is determined that the number of pending winnings from the first starting opening is not "0", the main CPU 721 moves to step S120. If it is determined that the number of pending winnings from the first starting opening is "0", the main CPU 721 moves to the process of step S122.

In step S120, the main CPU 721 subtracts "1" from the value of the first starting memory number corresponding to the pending number of winnings from the first starting opening. In this embodiment, the main CPU 721 determines whether data is stored in the first special symbol starting storage area (0) to the first special symbol starting storage area (4) provided in the main RAM 723, and It is determined whether or not there is a memory for starting a special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol that is being variably displayed or on hold. In the first special symbol starting storage area (0), data (information) of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol being displayed is stored as starting memory information. The first special symbol starting memory area (1) to the first special symbol starting memory area (4) are stored in the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol for the four times held (holding ball). data (information) is stored as starting storage information. The starting memory information of each first special symbol starting storage area includes, for example, data indicating the random number value for winning determination, the random number number of symbols, the determined fluctuation pattern, etc. obtained at the time of winning the first starting hole. .

Next, special symbol memory transfer processing is performed based on the first starting opening winning (step S121). In this process, the main CPU 721 shifts the data of the first special symbol starting storage areas (1) to (4) to the first special symbol starting storage areas (0) to (3), respectively. At this time, the main CPU 721 also transmits a pending subtraction command to the sub control circuit 730. After that, the main CPU 721 moves to the process of step S116.

In step S122, the main CPU 721 performs a demo display process to display a demo screen. In this process, the main CPU 721 transmits a demonstration display command to the sub control circuit 730. When this process is completed, the main CPU 721 ends the special symbol memory check process.

[9-9. Special symbol display time management processing]
FIG. 62 shows special symbol display time management processing by the main CPU 721. The special symbol display time management process is called as a subroutine during execution of the special symbol control process described above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 721 determines whether the control state flag is a value ("02") indicating special symbol display time management processing (step S131). When it is determined that the control state flag is not a value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management process, the main CPU 721 ends the special symbol display time management process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the control state flag is a value ("02") indicating the special symbol display time management process, the main CPU 721 moves to the process of step S132.

In step S132, the main CPU 721 determines whether the value of the waiting time timer (waiting time) is "0". In this process, the main CPU 721 determines whether the waiting time after the variable display is confirmed (variable display start waiting time) set in the waiting time timer has expired. If it is determined that the value of the waiting time timer is not "0", the main CPU 721 ends the special symbol display time management process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the waiting time timer is "0", the main CPU 721 moves to the process of step S133.

In step S133, the main CPU 721 determines whether or not the special symbol game is a "jackpot". If it is determined that the special symbol game is a "jackpot", the main CPU 721 moves to step S142. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol game is not a "jackpot", the main CPU 721 moves to step S134.

In step S134, the main CPU 721 further determines whether or not the special symbol game is a "small win". If it is determined that the special symbol game is a "small win", the main CPU 721 moves to step S137. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol game is not a "small win", that is, if the special symbol game is a "miss", the main CPU 721 moves to the process of step S135.

In step S135, the main CPU 721 performs time saving count subtraction processing. This time reduction number subtraction process will be described later with reference to FIG. 63.

Next, the main CPU 721 performs a process of setting the control state flag to a value ("08") indicating special symbol game end processing (step S136). When this process is completed, the main CPU 721 ends the special symbol display time management process.

In step S137, the main CPU 721 performs processing to set a small hit flag indicating a small hit. After completing this process, the main CPU 721 moves to the process of step S138.

In step S138, the main CPU 721 performs a process of setting the control state flag to a value ("03") indicating jackpot start interval management processing.

Next, the main CPU 721 performs processing to set the jackpot start interval time (for example, 5000 ms) corresponding to the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) in the waiting time timer (step S139).

Next, the main CPU 721 performs a process of setting a jackpot start command or a small hit start command corresponding to the special symbol in the main RAM 723 (step S140). As a result, a jackpot start command or a small hit start command is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 730.

Next, the main CPU 721 refers to the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 53) and sets the upper limit value of the number of rounds (upper limit value of the number of times the jackpot opening is opened) corresponding to the special symbol (type of symbol designation command) in the main RAM 723. Then, a round number display LED pattern flag is set (step S141). Note that the round number display LED pattern flag is a flag indicating whether or not to display the remaining round number in a predetermined pattern. When this process is completed, the main CPU 721 ends the special symbol display time management process.

In step S142, the main CPU 721 performs processing to set a jackpot flag indicating a jackpot. After completing this process, the main CPU 721 moves to the process of step S143.

In step S143, the main CPU 721 performs processing to clear the time saving number counter, the time saving flag, and the probability change flag. After completing this process, the main CPU 721 moves to the process of step S138.

[9-10. Time saving number subtraction process]
FIG. 63 shows the time reduction count subtraction process by the main CPU 721. The time saving number subtraction process is called as a subroutine during execution of the special symbol display time management process described above or the jackpot end interval process described later. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 721 determines whether the value of the time saving number counter is 0 or not (step S151). The time saving number counter is a subtraction function that counts until the set time saving number (in this embodiment, it is determined to be one of 24 times, 30 times, 36 times, 42 times, 48 times, and 100 times) becomes 0. It is a counter. If the value of the time saving counter is 0, the main CPU 721 moves to step S154. If the value of the time saving number counter is not 0, the main CPU 721 ends the time saving number subtraction process.

In step S152, the main CPU 721 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the time saving counter.

Next, the main CPU 721 again determines whether the value of the time saving number counter is 0 (step S153). If the value of the time saving counter is 0, the main CPU 721 moves to step S154. If the value of the time saving number counter is not 0, the main CPU 721 ends the time saving number subtraction process.

In step S154, the main CPU 721 performs processing to set the time saving flag to "0". When this process is completed, the main CPU 721 ends the time saving number subtraction process.

[9-11. Jackpot end interval processing]
FIG. 64 shows the jackpot end interval process by the main CPU 721. The jackpot end interval process is called as a subroutine during execution of the special symbol control process mentioned above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 721 determines whether the control state flag is a value ("07") indicating the jackpot end interval process (step S161). If it is determined that the control state flag is not a value (“07”) indicating the jackpot end interval process (step S161: NO), the main CPU 721 ends the jackpot end interval process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the control state flag is a value ("07") indicating the jackpot end interval process, the main CPU 721 moves to the process of step S162.

In step S162, the main CPU 721 determines whether the value of the waiting time timer is "0". In this process, the main CPU 721 determines whether or not the jackpot end interval time set in the waiting time timer has expired. If it is determined that the value of the waiting time timer is not "0", the main CPU 721 ends the jackpot end interval process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the waiting time timer is "0", the main CPU 721 moves to step S163.

In step S163, the main CPU 721 clears the LED pattern flag indicating the number of openings of the big winning opening. The big winning opening number display LED pattern flag is used as a management flag indicating whether or not the number of rounds at the time of a jackpot is displayed by an LED light emitting pattern.

Next, the main CPU 721 clears the round number distribution flag (step S164). This round number distribution flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 723, and is used to indicate whether or not to periodically open and close the grand prize opening a predetermined number of times even during one round. It's a flag. If the grand prize opening is opened and closed periodically even during one round, the round number allocation flag becomes "1". At this time, the main CPU 721 also transmits a special symbol hit end display command to the sub control circuit 730.

Next, the main CPU 721 performs a process of setting the control state flag to a value ("08") indicating the special symbol game end process (step S165).

Next, the main CPU 721 determines whether or not the special symbol game is a "jackpot" (step S166). If it is determined that the special symbol game is a "jackpot", the main CPU 721 moves to step S167. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol game is not a "jackpot", the main CPU 721 moves to step S174.

In step S167, the main CPU 721 performs processing to set a jackpot flag in a predetermined area of the main RAM 34.

Next, the main CPU 721 determines whether or not it is a probability variable jackpot (step S168). If it is a probability variable jackpot, the main CPU 721 moves to the process of step S169. If it is not a probability variable jackpot, the main CPU 721 moves to the process of step S171.

In step S169, the main CPU 721 performs processing to set the probability change flag to "1".

Next, the main CPU 721 performs a process of setting the time saving flag to "1" (step S171).

Next, the main CPU 721 performs a process of setting a specified number of time reductions (in this embodiment, 100 times as an example) in the time reduction number counter (step S172).

Next, the main CPU 721 executes a variation pattern table setting process (step S173). The variation pattern table setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 65. When this process is completed, the main CPU 721 ends the jackpot end interval process.

In step S174, the main CPU 721 performs processing to clear the value of the small hit flag.

Next, the main CPU 721 executes the above-mentioned time saving number subtraction process (step S175). When this process is completed, the main CPU 721 ends the jackpot end interval process.

[9-12. Fluctuation pattern table setting process]
FIG. 65 shows the variation pattern table setting process by the main CPU 721. The fluctuation pattern table setting process is called as a subroutine during the power-on process or the jackpot end interval process described above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 721 determines whether or not the power is turned on (step S181). If the power is turned on, the main CPU 721 moves to step S182. If the power is not turned on, the main CPU 721 moves to step S183.

In step S182, the main CPU 721 performs a process of setting table pattern 1 as a table pattern when referring to the game state transition table.

Next, the main CPU 721 determines whether the value of the probability variation flag is "1" (step S183). If the value of the probability change flag is "1", the main CPU 721 moves to the process of step S184. If the value of the probability variation flag is "0", the main CPU 721 moves to the process of step S185.

In step S184, the main CPU 721 performs a process of setting table pattern 2 as a table pattern when referring to the game state transition table. After completing this process, the main CPU 721 ends the variation pattern table setting process.

In step S185, the main CPU 721 performs a process of setting table pattern 3 as a table pattern when referring to the game state transition table. After completing this process, the main CPU 721 ends the variation pattern table setting process.

[9-13. Normal symbol control processing]
FIG. 66 shows normal symbol control processing by the main CPU 721. The normal symbol control process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the main control main process described above. In addition, the numerical values ("00" to "04") written in parentheses to the left of each process in the flowchart shown in FIG. 66 indicate the normal symbol control state flag, and this normal symbol control state flag is is stored in a predetermined storage area within. The main CPU 721 advances the normal symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the numerical value of the normal symbol control state flag.

As shown in FIG. 66, the main CPU 721 performs a process of loading the normal symbol control state flag (step S191). In this process, the main CPU 721 reads the normal symbol control state flag stored in the main RAM 723. The main CPU 721 determines whether to execute various processes of steps S192 to S196, which will be described later, based on the read value of the normal symbol control state flag. This normal symbol control state flag indicates the gaming state of the normal symbol game, and enables execution of any one of steps S162 to S166. Further, the main CPU 721 executes each process at a predetermined timing determined according to the waiting time set for each process of steps S162 to S166. Note that before this predetermined timing is reached, other subroutine processes are executed without executing each process. Of course, the aforementioned system timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 55) is also executed at predetermined intervals.

Next, the main CPU 721 performs a normal symbol storage check process (step S192). In this process, the main CPU 721 checks the pending number of variable displays of normal symbols when the normal symbol control state flag is a value indicating normal symbol memory check processing ("00"), and the pending number is "0". If not, processing such as hit determination is performed. In addition, in this process, the main CPU 721 sets the normal symbol control state flag to a value ("01") indicating the normal symbol variable display time monitoring process (step S193), which will be described later, and sets the variable time determined in the current process to Set the wait time timer. That is, by the process of step S192, after the determined normal symbol variation time has elapsed, the normal symbol variation time monitoring process, which will be described later, is set to be executed.

Next, the main CPU 721 performs normal symbol variable display time monitoring processing (step S193). In this process, the main CPU 721 sets the normal symbol control state flag to a value (“01”) indicating the normal symbol fluctuation time monitoring process, and when the normal symbol fluctuation time has elapsed, the normal symbol control state flag A value ("02") indicating the normal symbol display time monitoring process (step S194) is set, and a waiting time after confirmation (for example, 0.5 seconds) is set in the waiting time timer. That is, by the process of step S193, after the set post-confirmation waiting time has elapsed, the normal symbol display time monitoring process to be described later is set to be executed.

Next, the main CPU 721 performs normal symbol display time monitoring processing (step S194). In this process, the main CPU 721 determines that if the normal symbol control status flag is a value ("02") indicating the normal symbol display time monitoring process and the post-confirmation waiting time set in the process of step S193 has elapsed, the winning occurs. It is determined whether the result of the determination is a "win" or not. Then, if the result of the hit determination is "hit", the main CPU 721 performs a normal electric accessory release setting process, and sets the normal symbol control state flag to a value ( "03"). That is, through this process, the normal electric accessory opening process described below is set to be executed. On the other hand, if the result of the hit determination is not a "win", the main CPU 721 sets the normal symbol control state flag to a value ("04") indicating a normal symbol game end process (step S196), which will be described later. That is, in this case, the normal symbol game ending process described below is set to be executed.

Next, if the result of the hit determination is determined to be a "win" in step S194, the main CPU 721 performs a normal electric accessory release process (step S195). In this process, the main CPU 721 determines that a predetermined number of winnings have been made while the normal electric accessory 460 is being released when the normal symbol control state flag is a value (“03”) indicating the normal electric accessory opening process. It is determined whether one of the conditions and the condition that the upper limit opening time of the normal electric accessory 460 has elapsed (the ordinary electric accessory opening time timer is "0") is satisfied. When one of the above conditions is satisfied, the main CPU 721 updates the variables located in the main RAM 723 in order to bring the blade member of the normal electric accessory into the closed state. Then, the main CPU 721 sets the normal symbol control state flag to a value (“04”) indicating a normal symbol game end process (step S196), which will be described later. That is, through this process, the normal symbol game ending process described below is set to be executed.

Next, the main CPU 721 performs normal symbol game end processing (step S196). In this process, the main CPU 721 causes the data indicating the pending number of variable display of normal symbols to be decreased by "1" when the normal symbol control state flag has a value ("04") indicating normal symbol game end processing. Update memory. In addition, the main CPU 721 updates the normal symbol storage area in order to perform the next variable display of the normal symbol. Further, the main CPU 721 sets the normal symbol control state flag to a value (“00”) indicating the normal symbol memory check process. That is, after the process of step S196, the above-described normal symbol memory check process (step S192) is set to be executed. When this process ends, the main CPU 721 ends the normal symbol control process.

[10. Control by sub CPU]
[10-1. Sub control circuit main processing]
On the other hand, the sub CPU 731 executes sub control circuit main processing. This sub-control circuit main processing will be explained using FIG. 67. Note that this sub-control circuit main process is a process that is started when the power is turned on.

As shown in FIG. 67, the sub CPU 731 performs initialization processing such as RAM access permission, work area initialization, hardware initialization, device initialization, application initialization, backup restoration initialization, etc. (step S201).

Next, the sub CPU 731 performs processing to clear the counter value of the watchdog timer (step S202). A reset time (for example, 2000 ms) is set for the watchdog timer when it is started, and a power-off process is executed when a service pulse is not written (at time-out).

Next, the sub CPU 731 executes operation means input processing (step S203).

Next, the sub CPU 731 executes command analysis processing (step S204). The command analysis process will be described later with reference to FIG. 68.

Next, the sub CPU 731 executes production mode determination processing (step S205). The production mode determination processing includes scenario presetting processing, production determination processing (secret A stage 2002), pre-read production selection processing (high precision stage 2004), background change control processing (high precision stage 2004), and possible number of consecutive background changes, which will be described later. Judgment processing (high precision stage 2004), variation scenario determination processing (high precision stage 2004), chance up control processing (high precision stage 2004), pending change determination processing (high precision stage 2004), character lamp effect control processing, full screen It is composed of subroutines such as production control processing and character lamp production control processing.

Next, the sub CPU 731 executes command transmission processing (step S206). The command transmission process will be described later with reference to FIG. 69.

Next, each projector control circuit (front projector control circuit 734, first rear projector control circuit 735, and second rear projector control circuit 736) executes drawing control processing (step S207). In this process, the front projector control circuit 734, the first rear projector control circuit 735, and the second rear projector control circuit 736 control the front projector 622, the first Drawing control is performed to cause the rear projector 122 and the second rear projector 124 to project image light.

Next, the audio control circuit 737 executes audio control processing (step S208). In this process, the audio control circuit 737 performs audio control to cause the speaker 740 to output audio based on the message (effect designation information) transmitted from the sub CPU 731.

Next, the lamp control circuit 738 executes lamp control processing (step S209). In this process, the lamp control circuit 738 performs light emission control to turn on or blink the lamp 25 based on the message (effect designation information) transmitted from the sub CPU 731.

Next, the accessory control circuit 739 executes accessory control processing (step S210). In this process, the accessory control circuit 739 performs drive control to operate the performance drive motor that operates the movable accessory unit based on the message (performance designation information) transmitted from the sub CPU 731. In such sub-control circuit main processing, after the initialization processing of step S201 is completed, each processing of steps S202 to S210 is repeatedly executed.

[10-2. Command analysis processing]
FIG. 68 shows command analysis processing by the sub CPU 731. The command analysis process is called as a subroutine during execution of the sub-control circuit main process described above. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 731 performs a process of analyzing the command stored in the reception buffer of the work RAM 733 after receiving it from the main control circuit 720 (main CPU 721) (step S241).

Next, the sub CPU 731 performs a consistency check on the received command (step S242). The consistency check is performed to verify that the target data exists when the command is received, and that there are no errors or omissions in the data.

Next, the sub CPU 731 performs sub lottery processing (step S243). In this process, when the received command is a variation pattern designation command, the sub CPU 731 selects a performance pattern by lottery based on the variation pattern designation command. After completing this process, the sub CPU 731 ends the command analysis process. In addition, in the sub-lottery process, all matters related to the performance including the performance pattern may be selected by lottery, or only the type of performance (presence or absence of dialogue preview, presence or absence of SU notice, etc.) may be selected as the performance pattern. The production contents (type of effect, type of cut-in, etc.) selected by lottery and executed in the production may be selected as production information in another process that is separately formed into a subroutine. In this embodiment, a performance pattern indicating the type of performance is selected in the sub-lottery process, and then the performance content to be executed based on the performance pattern is selected as performance information in the performance mode determination process described later. ing.

[10-3. Command sending process]
FIG. 69 shows command transmission processing by the sub CPU 731. The command transmission process is called as a subroutine during execution of the sub-control circuit main process described above. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 731 executes a message setting process when transmitting a control command (message) to each of the control circuits 204 to 207 (step S251). In this process, the sub CPU 731 generates a message (performance designation information) based on the performance information obtained in the performance mode determination process, and temporarily stores the message in the direct buffer of the work RAM 203. This message setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the sub CPU 731 executes a directory table registration process (step S252). In this process, the sub CPU 731 performs a process of setting a corresponding direct table in a predetermined area of the work RAM 733 based on the message and effect information stored in the direct buffer. This directory table registration process will be described later with reference to FIG. 71.

Next, the sub CPU 731 executes message transmission processing (step S253). In this process, the sub CPU 731 reads the message stored in the direct buffer at a predetermined timing based on the direct table, and performs a process of transmitting the message to a predetermined control circuit 204 to 207. After completing this process, the sub CPU 731 ends the command sending process. This message sending process will be described later with reference to FIG. 72.

[10-4. Message setting processing]
FIG. 70 shows message setting processing by the sub CPU 731. The message setting process is called as a subroutine during execution of the command sending process described above. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 731 sets the devices (control circuits 204 to 207) to be transmitted based on the effect information (step S261).

Next, the sub CPU 731 performs a process of setting whether or not the system is operating (step S262).

Next, the sub CPU 731 sets stage information and each performance information (step S263).

Next, the sub CPU 731 sets a notice pattern (step S264). As a result, messages indicating destination devices (control circuits 204 to 207), presence or absence of system operation, stage information, each performance information, and preview pattern are stored in the direct buffer. After completing this process, the sub CPU 731 ends the message setting process.

[10-5. Director table registration process]
FIG. 71 shows the directory table registration process by the sub CPU 731. The directory table registration process is called as a subroutine during execution of the command transmission process described above. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 731 performs a process of registering a single table (step S271).

Next, the sub CPU 731 performs a process of registering a master table based on the performance information determined in the performance mode determination process (step S272).

Next, the sub CPU 731 performs a process of registering a slave table to be used in the master table (step S273).

Next, the sub CPU 731 performs a process of registering the direct table corresponding to the message set in the direct buffer as a slave table (step S274). After completing this process, the sub CPU 731 ends the directory table registration process.

[10-6. Message sending process]
FIG. 72 shows message transmission processing by the sub CPU 731. The message transmission process is called as a subroutine during execution of the command transmission process described above. As shown in the figure, if a message is registered in the direct buffer corresponding to the direct table, the sub CPU 731 sends the message to each device (control circuits 204 to 207) according to the "destination device" set in the message. (step S281).

Next, after the message transmission is completed, the sub CPU 731 performs a process of discarding unnecessary directory tables (step S282). After completing this process, the sub CPU 731 ends the message sending process.

[11. Example of production]
With reference to FIGS. 73 to 78, displays projected onto each screen (rear screen unit 290, front screen unit 510) by image light projected from each projection device (rear projection device 120, front projection device 600) An example of a performance executed by the sub CPU 731 (for example, see FIG. 49) will be described, such as a performance and a performance performance in which a large accessory 232 is advanced into the performance space 700 based on the result of an internal lottery. FIG. 73 is a schematic perspective view showing an example of a mode in which images are projected on both the rear screen unit 290 and the front screen unit 510. FIG. 74 is a diagram showing an example of a performance in which different images are projected on the upper rear screen 2902, the intermediate rear screen 2906, and the lower rear screen 2904. FIG. 75 is a diagram illustrating an example of a production in which different images are projected on the upper rear screen 2902 and the lower rear screen 2904, but the boundaries between the screens are difficult to discern. FIG. 76 shows an example of a production in which an upper rear screen 2902, an intermediate rear screen 2906, and a lower rear screen 2904 constitute one projection surface, and a continuous image is projected onto this one projection surface. It is a diagram. Note that no image is projected on the front screen 512 in FIGS. 74 to 76. Further, FIG. 77 is a front view of the gaming machine 1 showing an example of the effect projected when the result of the internal lottery to be described later is a jackpot. FIG. 78 shows a production example of the gaming machine 1 in which, when the large-sized accessory body 230 advances into the production space 700, an image that emphasizes the large-sized accessory 232 is projected onto the front screen 512 and the upper rear screen 2902. It is a front view. 73 to 78, the rear projection device 120, the first rear projector 122, the second rear projector 124, the second rear projector 124 (for example, see FIG. 4), and the front projection device 600 (for example, see FIG. 40), rear screen unit 290, upper rear screen 2902, lower rear screen 2904, intermediate rear screen 2906 (for example, all see FIG. 29), front screen unit 510, front screen 512 (for example, all see FIG. 35) ) are not shown in the drawings, but a description of the reference drawings will be omitted.

In the production example described below, as shown in FIG. 48 described above, image light projected from the first rear projector 122 is projected onto the upper rear screen 2902. Further, the image light projected from the second rear projector 124 and reflected by the rear mirror 126 is projected onto the lower rear screen 2904 and the intermediate rear screen 2906. Image light projected from the front projector 622 and reflected by the front mirror 624 is projected on approximately the upper half of the front screen 512. The first rear projector 122, the second rear projector 124, and the front projector 622 are configured such that image light is projected only from the lower half region of the lens. However, which area of the lens the image light is projected from depends on the position and angle of the projector. For example, it is possible to project the image light only from the upper half of the lens. Alternatively, the image light may be projected from the entire area of the lens.

Note that instead of this, the image light projected from the first rear projector 122 is projected onto the upper rear screen 2902 and the intermediate rear screen 2906, and is also projected from the second rear projector 124 and reflected by the rear mirror 126. The image light may be projected onto the lower rear screen 2904. Furthermore, the image light projected from the first rear projector 122 is projected onto the upper rear screen 2902 and the intermediate rear screen 2906, and the image light projected from the second rear projector 124 and reflected by the rear mirror 126 is lowered. The image may be projected onto the side rear screen 2904 and the intermediate rear screen 2906.

Further, the image light projected from the front projector 622 and reflected by the front mirror 624 may be projected on approximately the upper half area of the front screen 512, or may be projected on approximately the entire area of the front screen 512. You may also do so.

[11-1. Production example 1]
In production example 1 shown in FIG. 73, different images are projected on the rear screen unit 290 and the front screen 512. Specifically, an image of clouds and an image of lightning are projected on the rear screen unit 290, and an image of the moon is projected on the front screen 512. Therefore, the image of the moon that can be seen in the foreground and the images of clouds and lightning that can be seen in the background can be seen shifted in the front and back directions within the same area when viewed from the front, so these images can be viewed in 3D. It can be viewed as a moving image. Moreover, the large accessory main body part 230 as a real image rather than a video advances (falls) from the origin position toward the production space 700 (for example, see FIG. 73) between the front screen 512 and the rear screen unit 290. ), innovative role performances are also performed. As a result, both the game in the game area 320 and the image projected on the rear screen unit 290 can be viewed, and the image projected ahead of the game area 320 can also be viewed. It becomes possible to perform a new performance that has never been seen before, such as advancing (dropping) the large accessory main body part 230 as a real image, not a video, into the performance space 700 between the rear screen unit 290 and the rear screen unit 290.

In addition, in FIG. 73, different images are projected on the rear screen unit 290 and the front screen 512, but instead of this, the same image is projected on the rear screen unit 290 and the front screen 512. Good too. In this case, it is preferable that the projected image be an effect based on the results of an internal lottery. Furthermore, it is preferable that the image to be projected be in a mode in which only a still image is projected, a mode in which both a still image and a moving image effect are projected, or a mode in which only a moving image effect is projected. Further, the same image may be projected on the rear screen unit 290 and the front screen 512. As a result, even if a situation arises in which one of the images projected on the rear screen unit 290 and the image projected on the front screen 512 cannot be viewed, the other image can be viewed, allowing the game to be played. Not only does this not hinder the progress of the game, but it also prevents a decline in interest. For example, if a player places his or her hand in a position that blocks the image light projected from the front projection device 600, a shadow will appear on the front screen 512, interfering with the visibility of the image projected on the front screen 512. However, even in such a case, the visibility of the image projected onto the rear screen unit 290 is maintained. Here, "similar images" preferably have the same shape, size, color, movement, etc., but as long as they are within the range that can be recognized as similar from the player's perspective. Either one may be different.

Furthermore, in production example 1 in FIG. 73, the image light projected from the rear projection device 120 is projected onto the rear screen unit 290, and the image light projected from the front projection device 600 is projected onto the front screen 512. From the viewpoint of avoiding a situation where the projected image becomes invisible due to the image light projected from either one, the image light projected from the rear projection device 120 and the image light projected from the front projection device 600 are may be projected on the same screen. For example, the image light projected from the rear projection device 120 is projected onto the back side of a screen (it is necessary to adopt a screen that allows the image projected on the back side to be viewed from the front), and the same image as the image projected on the back side is generated. may be projected onto the surface of the screen using image light projected from the front projection device 600. In this case, even if one of the images projected on the back side of the screen and the image projected on the front side of the screen cannot be seen, the other image can be seen, so the game can be continued. It is also possible to suppress a decline in interest without hindering the progress of the game.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 73, if an accessory (the large accessory main body part 230 of this embodiment) is present in the performance space 700 between the front screen 512 and the rear screen unit 290, such accessory If it is not transparent, there is a possibility that the image behind the object cannot be visually recognized. However, if the image projected by the image light projected from the front projection device 600 and the image projected by the image light projected from the rear projection device 120 are similar, the above-mentioned performance space 700 Even if the accessory is advanced, the image projected by the image light projected from the front projection device 600 can be visually recognized, so that the decline in interest can be suppressed without interfering with the progress of the game.

Note that in this embodiment, the distance from the first rear projector 122 to the upper rear screen 2902 and the distance from the second rear projector 124 to the lower rear screen 2904 or the intermediate rear screen 2906 are different. Therefore, if image light is projected without considering the distance from each projector 122, 124 to each screen 2902, 2904, 2906, which is a projection surface, distortion will occur in the entire image projected on the entire screen, giving a sense of discomfort ( There is a risk that the image may not appear continuous. Therefore, by changing the scale of the image light projected from each projector according to the distance to the projection screen, the entire image projected on the entire screen can be projected as a continuous image. I have to.

[11-2. Production example 2]
In production example 2 shown in FIG. 74, images of the main characters of the game machine 1 are projected on the upper rear screen 2902, and images of the main characters of the game machine 1 are projected on the lower rear screen 2904, together with images imitating cell pictures of the game board. An image imitating the liquid crystal display of a conventional pachinko machine is projected approximately in the center of the area 320, and an image imitating the reel stop operation button of a pachislot machine is projected onto the intermediate rear screen 2906. In the image imitating the liquid crystal display projected on the lower rear screen 2904, it is possible to project a symbol variation image like that of a conventional pachinko machine. In this way, by projecting images that utilize the boundaries between the screens, such as projecting separate images onto the upper rear screen 2902, lower rear screen 2904, and intermediate rear screen 2906, the boundaries can be used for games. It is possible to project a variety of images while making it difficult for the viewer to notice, thereby increasing interest. In particular, in production example 2 shown in FIG. 74, an image is projected that looks like a fusion of gaming machines from different categories, such as a pachinko machine and a pachislot, so it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is unprecedentedly interesting. Can be done. Control for projecting separate images onto the upper rear screen 2902, the lower rear screen 2904, and the intermediate rear screen 2906 is performed by the sub CPU 731, and the sub CPU that executes the control controls the "independent projection" of the sixth gaming machine, which will be described later. This corresponds to "control means". In addition to the above-mentioned effects, a role effect effect is performed in which a large role object main body part 230 as a real image, not a video, advances (falls) into the effect space 700 between the front screen 512 and the rear screen unit 290. Needless to say, this is a good thing.

[11-3. Production example 3]
In production example 3 shown in FIG. 75, an image of the main character of the gaming machine 1 is projected on the upper rear screen 2902, and a liquid crystal display of a conventional pachinko machine is displayed on the lower rear screen 2904 approximately at the center. An image imitating the gaming area is projected. An image projected onto the upper rear screen 2902 and an image projected onto the lower rear screen 2904 are projected onto the intermediate rear screen 2906 so as to overlap with each other. A symbol variation image like that of a conventional pachinko machine can be projected onto a video portion of the lower rear screen 2904 that resembles a liquid crystal display. Moreover, in FIG. 75, although the image projected on the upper rear screen 2902 and the image projected on the lower rear screen 2904 are separate images, the image that combines these images is displayed on the intermediate rear screen 2906. Since the rear screen unit 290 is projected as a whole, it is possible to project a new, unprecedented image in which one continuous image is projected on the entire rear screen unit 290. In this case as well, it is possible to perform an accessory effect in which a large accessory body 230 as a real image, not a video, advances (falls) into the effect space 700 between the front screen 512 and the rear screen unit 290. Needless to say.

[11-4. Production example 4]
In production example 4 shown in FIG. 76, although the rear screen unit 290 is a screen in which separate screens such as an upper rear screen 2902, a lower rear screen 2904, and an intermediate rear screen 2906 are joined, it is difficult to grasp the boundaries of each. It functions as a projection surface. Moreover, since images are projected from behind the rear screen unit 290 using a plurality of rear projection devices 120 (first rear projector 122, second rear projector 124), this rear screen unit 290 has a wide area. , it is possible to project continuous images. In this way, in production example 4, it is possible to project an impactful image using substantially the entire area of the rear screen unit 290. Control for projecting a continuous image in a wide area formed by the upper rear screen 2902, the lower rear screen 2904, and the intermediate rear screen 2906 is performed by the sub CPU 731, and the sub CPU that executes this control is the sixth This corresponds to the "cooperative projection control means" of gaming machines. In this case as well, it is possible to perform an accessory effect in which a large accessory body 230 as a real image, not a video, advances (falls) into the effect space 700 between the front screen 512 and the rear screen unit 290. Needless to say.

Note that among the production examples 2 to 4 shown in FIGS. 74 to 76, only one of these production examples may be adopted in the gaming machine, or a plurality of production examples among these may be switched and displayed. It may also be adopted in various ways. In addition, when adopting a mode in which a plurality of production examples among the production examples shown in FIGS. 74 to 76 can be switched and displayed in a gaming machine, for example, the production examples adopted may differ depending on the gaming state, etc. By switching, it is possible to perform effective display effects. For example, in the normal gaming state, in order to attract the player's attention to the symbol variation effect, the image of the effect example 2 shown in FIG. 74 or the effect example 3 shown in FIG. When this possibility is high, the large accessory main body part 230 as a real image rather than a video may advance (fall) from the origin position toward the production space 700. For example, in a fixed variable game state, by adopting the example 3 of the effect shown in FIG. 76 in order to show a more powerful image using almost the entire area of the rear screen unit 290 than the symbol variable effect, it is possible to It is possible to project images.

[11-5. Performance example 5]

In production example 5 shown in FIG. 77, when the result of an internal lottery to be described later becomes a jackpot while an image is being projected on the rear screen unit 290, the projection of the image on the rear screen unit 290 is maintained. A large image showing the results of the internal lottery is projected on the front screen 512. The image projected on the front screen 512 (the Zorome image with the "7" symbol indicating a jackpot) is the image of the symbol variation effect that was performed within the image imitating the liquid crystal display of a conventional pachinko machine. It may also be an image that looks like it has jumped out from within an image imitating a liquid crystal display. By projecting such images, it is possible to provide a new gaming machine that has never existed before.

In addition, in production example 5, a large image showing the results of the internal lottery is projected on the front screen 512, but it goes without saying that the image projected on the front screen 512 is not limited to this. For example, an image may be projected on the front screen 512 as an effect based on the result of an internal lottery.

[11-6. Production example 6]
In production example 6 shown in FIG. 78, when the large accessory 232 advances into the production space 700, a first image 5120 that frames the outer shape of the large accessory 232 is projected onto the front screen 512. In this way, by projecting an image that frames the outer shape of the large accessory 232 onto the front screen 512, the large accessory 232 can be emphasized, and the large accessory 232 advances into the performance space 700. Together with the performance, it becomes possible to execute an impactful performance.

Furthermore, in FIG. 78, when the large accessory 232 advances into the performance space 700, in addition to the first image 5120 being projected on the front screen 512, a second image 2920 that frames the outer shape of the large accessory 232 is projected. It is projected onto the upper rear screen 2902. In FIG. 78, the image that appears vaguely along the outer edge of the large accessory 232 imitating the "7" pattern is the first image 5120; The outline of the double line between the two lines is the second image 2920. In this way, when the large accessory 232 advances into the production space 700, the large accessory 232 is It becomes possible to emphasize the image even more. In particular, when the large accessory 232 is viewed from an angle rather than from the front, the first image 5120 and the second image 2920 can be viewed as sandwiching the large accessory 232, which is a real object, and the large accessory 232 can be seen even more clearly. Objects 232 can be emphasized.

Note that each of the upper rear screen 2902, lower rear screen 2904, intermediate rear screen 2906, and front screen 512 displays not only images as effects based on the internal lottery results, but also images when no games are being played. A demonstration performance that is projected, a jackpot performance that is projected during a jackpot game, etc. may be projected.
[12. Effect]

In this way, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the upper rear screen 2902 projects an image using the image light projected from the first rear projector 122, and the image is projected using the image light projected from the second rear projector 124. Since the lower rear screen 2904 is connected to the lower rear screen 2904 via the intermediate rear screen 2906, each projection means (first rear projector 122, second rear projector 124) and each projected member (upper rear screen 2902 , lower rear screen 2904, and intermediate rear screen 2906), it is possible to project a continuous image onto the rear screen unit 290 as one wide projection area. For example, with LCDs that have been commonly used in the past, increasing the display area increases costs, and even if multiple LCDs are lined up, images will not be displayed at the boundaries with other LCDs. Therefore, video continuity cannot be maintained. In this regard, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, since images are also projected on the connecting portions between the screens, it is possible to maintain the continuity of the images.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the upper rear screen 2902 and the lower rear screen 2904 are arranged at vertically shifted positions so that images are projected in different areas when viewed from the front. Then, the upper rear screen 2902 is arranged behind the lower rear screen 2904 so that the production space 700 is formed in front of the upper rear screen 2902 (above the lower rear screen 2904 and the game panel 300). It is located in This allows various performances to be performed using the performance space 700 formed in front of the upper rear screen 2902, making it possible to provide a game machine with expandability. In particular, images can be projected using a wide projection area formed by the upper rear screen 2902, the lower rear screen 2904, and the intermediate rear screen 2906. Moreover, it is possible to execute a game with expandability in which both the game in the game area 320 and the images projected on the upper rear screen 2902 and the lower rear screen 2904 can be viewed, and the game in the game area 320 and the image projected on the lower rear screen 2904 can be executed. While maintaining visibility with the image projected on the side rear screen 2904, it is now possible to perform a movable performance using the large accessory main body 230, making it possible to perform a new and unprecedented performance, increasing interest. becomes possible.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, an image is projected on the rear screen unit 290 arranged behind the gaming panel 300, and an image is projected on the front screen 512 arranged in front of the gaming panel 300. Both can be seen from the front. Moreover, the large accessory main body part 230 is configured to advance between the image projected on the upper rear screen 2902 and the image projected on the front screen 512 based on the result of an internal lottery. Further, a game panel 300 having a game area 320 is arranged between the image projected on the lower rear screen 2904 and the image projected on the front screen 512. In this way, it becomes possible to perform a new and unprecedented production with a sense of depth, such as a game in which a real object that is not an image is interposed between the rear image and the front image. It becomes possible to increase the

Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment has a front screen 512 on which an image as a performance based on the result of the internal lottery is projected on the opening window 5402 of the front door unit 500, and a front screen 512 that projects an image based on the result of the internal lottery. A decorative accessory 560 is arranged above the front screen 512 to perform an accessory effect that operates toward the front position of the front screen 512. The front screen 512 and the decorative accessory 560 described above can create a presence similar to that of a movable accessory placed above a liquid crystal display and a center accessory in a conventional pachinko machine, respectively. That is, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, both the video as a performance based on the result of the internal lottery and the accessory performance in which the decorative accessory 560 is activated in front of the front screen 512 are different from the conventional pachinko game. The game will be held at a location closer to the player than the machine. Furthermore, a firing handle 588 that can fire a game ball toward the game area 320 is arranged in the front door unit 500 below the front screen 512. Therefore, the player who plays the game on the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment can feel as if he or she is firing a game ball from the firing handle located below the game board in a conventional pachinko machine. This makes it possible to provide a novel gaming machine that has never existed before.

In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, a light guide plate (front light guide plate 234, rear light guide plate 236) is arranged behind the heavy large accessory 232 imitating the "7" symbol. The light guide plate is made to go around along the outer peripheral edge of the large accessory 232. Therefore, not only can an impactful accessory performance be performed, but also the large accessory object 232 can be made to appear larger than its actual size. Moreover, when the large accessory 232 is large and heavy, it is difficult to easily operate the large accessory 232, and even if it is activated, there is a possibility that only small movements can be made. However, even in such a case, in addition to making it possible to make it appear as if the large-sized accessory 232 is moving, it is possible to make the movable accessory larger, giving a greater impact, and It becomes possible to perform an effective performance that gives the impression that the character is making larger movements than the actual movements of the character.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the light guide plate (front light guide plate 234, rear light guide plate 236) arranged behind the large accessory 232 is located outside the periphery of the large accessory 232 when viewed from the front. They are approximately similar in size to the extent that they protrude. These light guide plates are moved around the large accessory 232 by a rotation mechanism (front light guide plate rotation drive mechanism 2340, rear light guide plate rotation drive mechanism 2360) and an up and down movement mechanism (light guide plate up and down drive mechanisms 239, 270). It is configured so that it can be rotated while moving up and down along the peripheral edge of the outer shape. In this way, it is possible to make the large accessory 232 appear larger than its actual size while not making the user aware that a light guide plate as a separate member is arranged behind the large accessory 232. In conventional pachinko machines, increasing the size of the movable characters makes it possible to perform character performances that can give a big impact, but on the other hand, the movable characters become heavier, and the movable characters become heavier. It becomes difficult to create a performance that gives movement to the character. In this regard, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in addition to being able to make the large accessory 232 look large, the actual movement of the large accessory 232 can be made while giving a greater impact by increasing the size of the large accessory 232. This makes it possible to perform an effective role-playing performance that appears to be making larger movements.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is made to "circulate along the outer edge of the large accessory 232" or "circle along the outer edge of the large accessory 232 while moving up and down". However, it is not limited to this. For example, the rear accessory (in this embodiment, the front light guide plate 234 and the rear light guide plate 236), which is placed facing the large accessory 232 and behind the large accessory 232, is arranged in such a manner that it can be viewed from the front. If the large accessory 232 can be rotated while facing behind the large accessory 232, the large accessory 232 can be emphasized, making the large accessory 232 appear larger than its actual size, or making the large accessory 232 appear larger than it actually is. Even when the large accessory 232 is stopped or only makes small movements, it is possible to make it appear as if the large accessory 232 is moving more than the actual movement. Note that the number of rear accessories may be one or two, and the number is not limited.

"To rotate the large accessory 232 while facing the rear of the large accessory 232 in a manner that is visible when viewed from the front" means that it is not necessary to be able to see the entire outer shape of the rear accessory, but a portion of the rear accessory (for example, the outer periphery) It is sufficient if the part) can be visually recognized.

Moreover, "rotation" is not necessarily limited to rotating through the operation start position, and may also be rotating while changing the rotation direction, for example, in a figure-eight pattern.

Further, the rear accessory is preferably a plate-like member rather than a three-dimensional object. This is because if the rear accessory is a plate-shaped member, it can be rotated while facing the large accessory 232 closely so as to overlap in the front-rear direction, so that the large accessory 232 can be emphasized more. From this point of view, it is preferable that the surface of the large accessory 232 also has a flat surface facing the rear accessory.

Further, the rear member does not necessarily have to be larger than the large accessory 232. Even if the rear member is smaller than the large accessory 232, if it rotates in a trajectory large enough to make the rear accessory visible when viewed from the front, the rear accessory will be rotating behind the large accessory 232 when viewed from the front. This is because it can be visually confirmed.

Further, in this embodiment, behind the large accessory 232, the rear accessory is rotated and moved up and down, but the movement other than rotation is not necessarily limited to vertical movement, and linear movement is also possible. It is fine as long as it is done. For example, it may be something that reciprocates linearly in the left-right direction, or it may be something that reciprocates linearly in an oblique direction.

In addition, in this embodiment, a front light guide plate 234 and a rear light guide plate 236 are provided as the rear accessory, and behind the large accessory 232, the rear light guide plate 236 is arranged close to the front light guide plate 236 facing each other. Although they rotate at substantially the same speed so as to follow the light plate 234, the relative movement between the front light guide plate 234 and the rear light guide plate 236 is not limited to this. For example, although the trajectory in which the front light guide plate 234 operates and the trajectory in which the rear light guide plate 236 operates are substantially the same trajectory when viewed from the front, their operating directions may be opposite. Furthermore, although the trajectory in which the front light guide plate 234 operates and the trajectory in which the rear light guide plate 236 operates are the same, and the directions in which they operate are also the same, their operating speeds may be different. Further, the sizes of the orbits that go around the rear of the large accessory 232 may be different between the front light guide plate 234 and the rear light guide plate 236. Alternatively, only one of the front light guide plate 234 and the rear light guide plate 236 may emit light toward the front, and the other may not emit light.

Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the large accessory main body section 230 is supported by the large accessory left drive mechanism 240 on the left side via the large accessory support arm 238, and the large accessory main body section 230 is supported on the left side by the large accessory left drive mechanism 240, and the large accessory main body section 230 is supported on the left side by the large accessory left drive mechanism 240. It is supported by the object right drive mechanism 260. In this way, when the large accessory main body part 230 is supported on both the left and right sides (that is, when it is supported on both sides), the lifting speed by the large accessory left drive mechanism 240 and the large accessory right drive mechanism If the elevating and lowering speeds according to 260 do not match, not only will smooth elevating and lowering be impossible, but in some cases, a situation may occur in which elevating and lowering cannot be performed. This tendency is particularly noticeable when it comes to large accessories that have a sense of weight, such as the large accessory 232. A discrepancy between the lifting speed of the large accessory left drive mechanism 240 and the lifting speed of the large accessory right drive mechanism 260 may be caused by a trivial thing such as a foreign object getting caught. In this regard, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the large accessory main body portion 230 (more specifically, the large accessory support arm 238) is moved upwardly on both the left and right sides so that the degree of freedom in the upward direction is increased. It is placed on a pedestal 252 so that it is not fixed. Therefore, even if the ascending and descending speed of the large accessory left drive mechanism 240 and the ascending and descending speed of the large accessory right drive mechanism 260 do not necessarily match, it is possible to maintain smooth elevation as much as possible. As a result, it is possible to increase the size of the large accessory 232 as a movable accessory, and it is possible to perform an accessory performance that can give a great impact.

Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the large accessory 232 is located at the origin position, the large accessory main body part 230 (more specifically, the large accessory supporting arm 238) is locked by the locking mechanism 250 at the origin position. Because it can be held, even if the large accessory 232 is made larger, it can be prevented from falling by itself due to gravity, and it is possible to perform an accessory performance that can give a big impact. Become. By the way, when supporting and holding the large accessory main body part 230 from below, if you try to release this holding by sliding the locking mechanism 250 against the lower surface of the large accessory support arm 238, the large accessory main body part 230 Considerable force is required due to the weight of the In this regard, according to the present embodiment, the holding state and the releasing state can be switched by the rotational movement of the locking mechanism 250 without sliding, so that the large accessory main body can be The locking mechanism 250 can be switched from a holding state to a releasing state with respect to the lower surface of the locking mechanism 230 .

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in addition to projecting an image onto the front screen 512 using image light projected from the front projection device 600 disposed on the overhanging portion 5520 of the front decorative frame 550, Since the large accessory 232 that can be operated based on the lottery result is provided on the projecting portion 5520 of the front decorative frame 550, it is possible to perform a new performance that has never been seen before. In particular, the decorative accessory 560 can be operated at a position closer to the player than in the past. Incidentally, the front projection device 600 and the decorative accessory 560 are arranged on the overhanging portion 5520 of the front decorative frame 550, but in order to properly project the image onto the front screen 512, it is necessary to It is necessary to always fix the front projection device 600 regardless of operation. Therefore, by providing a decorative accessory drive mechanism 570 that can operate only the decorative accessory 560 of the front projection device 600 and the decorative accessory 560 arranged on the overhanging part 5520 of the front decorative frame 550, It becomes possible to advance the movable accessory toward the front position of the upper rear screen 2902 while a clear image is being projected, and it becomes possible to suitably perform new performances that have never been seen before. .

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in addition to projecting an image onto the front screen 512 using image light projected from the front projection device 600 disposed on the overhanging portion 5520 of the front decorative frame 550, Since the overhanging portion 5520 of the front decorative frame 550 is provided with a decorative accessory 560 that can be activated based on the result of the lottery, it is possible to perform a new performance that has never been seen before. In particular, the decorative accessory 560 can be operated at a position closer to the player than in the past. Further, a front projection device 600 and a decorative accessory 560 are arranged on the overhanging portion 5520 of the front decorative frame 550, but in order to properly project an image onto the front screen 512, it is necessary to It is necessary to always fix the front projector 622 and the front mirror 624 regardless of operation. Therefore, a decorative accessory drive mechanism 570 is provided that can operate only the decorative accessory 560 among the front projector 622, the front mirror 624, and the decorative accessory 560 arranged on the overhanging portion 5520 of the front decorative frame 550. That's what I do. By the way, when only the decorative accessory 560 among the front projector 622, the front mirror 624, and the decorative accessory 560 is operated, the front side of the front mirror 624 arranged behind the decorative accessory 560 will be exposed. Therefore, in the present invention, the exposed portion of the front mirror 624 that is exposed when the accessory 560 is activated has a decorated portion. Thereby, it becomes possible to suitably perform a new performance that has never been seen before while ensuring the aesthetic appearance when the decorative accessory 560 is activated.

[13. Expandability of gaming machine according to first embodiment]
In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the image light projected from the front projection device 600 and the image light projected from the rear projection device 120 are projected onto different screens (the front projection device The image light projected from the rear projection device 600 is projected onto the front screen 512, and the image light projected from the rear projection device 120 is projected onto the rear screen unit 290). The positional relationship between the front screen 512 on which the image light projected from the front projection device 600 is projected and the rear screen unit 290 on which the image light projected from the rear projection device 120 is projected is shifted in the front-back direction. , the positional relationship is such that the images projected on both screens appear in overlapping areas when viewed from the front. However, a situation has arisen in which one of the images projected by the image light projected from the front projection device 600 and the image projected by the image light projected from the rear projection device 120 cannot be viewed. However, from the viewpoint of not interfering with the progress of the game, it is not necessarily necessary to provide two screens (front screen 512 and rear screen unit 290). For example, an image that can be viewed from the front is projected onto the back side of one screen using image light projected from the rear to the front, and an image that can be seen from the front is projected onto the front side of the screen from the front to the rear. An image that can be viewed from the front may be projected using the image light. In such a case, even if a situation occurs in which one of the images cannot be viewed, the progress of the game will not be hindered.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, an example of a mode in which an image is projected onto the rear screen unit 290 and the front screen 512 using image light projected from the rear projection device 120 and the front projection device 600, respectively, is shown below. , has been described using the schematic side view of FIG. 48, but instead of the configuration shown in FIG. 48, the configuration shown in FIG. 79 may be used. FIG. 79 is a diagram showing an example of a mode in which images are projected onto the rear screen unit 290 and the front screen 512, respectively, by image lights projected from the rear projection device 120 and the front projection device 600, respectively. This is a modification of No. 48. Note that since FIG. 79 is a schematic diagram like FIG. 48, there are some differences from the actual one, such as the installation angles of the projectors 122, 126, and 622.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 79, from the lower position of the front mirror 624 or the decorative accessory 560 to the lower position of the front screen 512, the width is approximately the same as or larger than the horizontal width of the front screen 512. An image light protection member 530 is provided to cover from the front including both sides. The image light protection member 530 is made of a transparent plate-like member (for example, a glass plate or a resin member) so that the rear side can be visually recognized. This allows the image light projected from the front projector 622 (the image light reflected by the front mirror 624) to be covered from the front, so that, for example, the player may block the image light and the image light is projected onto the front screen 512. Problems such as shadows entering the image can be prevented. In addition, as shown in FIG. 79, the video light protection member 530 is provided avoiding the operating range of the decorative accessory 560 (below the decorative accessory 560), so that the accessory effect by the decorative accessory 560 cannot be controlled. Execution is not hindered.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 79, in this modification, the first rear projector 122 projects the image light backward, and the image light projected backward from the first rear projector 122 is directed forward. A rear mirror 128 for reflection is provided. This makes it possible to increase the distance to the upper rear screen 2902, which is the projection surface, and to project a larger image onto the upper rear screen 2902.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment may be configured such that, for example, six levels of setting values from "1" to "6" can be set by, for example, a person involved in the hall. When the set value is changed, for example, the jackpot probability (internal winning probability) in the internal lottery is changed.

Although the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment has been described using a pachinko machine as an example, it can also be applied to a pachislot instead of the pachinko machine 1. When applied to Pachislot, for example, reels are placed in an area corresponding to the upper rear screen 2902, a panel is placed in an area equivalent to the lower rear screen 2904, and a stop button etc. is placed in an area corresponding to the intermediate rear screen 2906. An operation unit is arranged, and ornaments and the like are arranged in an area corresponding to the ornamental ornament 560. Alternatively, display means such as a liquid crystal display is arranged in an area corresponding to the upper rear screen 2902, and operating units such as a mini reel, a panel, and a stop button are arranged in areas corresponding to the intermediate rear screen and the lower rear screen 2904, Accessories and the like are arranged in an area corresponding to the decorative accessory 560. In this way, when the invention according to this embodiment is applied to a pachislot, that is, when the large accessory 230 can be operated beyond the frame of the game machine such as the cabinet and front door provided in a general pachislot. Even if there is, it is possible to achieve the same effects as the pachinko machine that is the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment.

[14. Other embodiments]
[14-1. Gaming machine according to second embodiment]
The configuration of the gaming machine 1000 according to the second embodiment will be briefly described with reference to FIGS. 80 and 81. FIG. 80 is an example showing a front view of the gaming machine 1000 of the second embodiment. FIG. 81 is an example of a schematic diagram showing a cross section taken along line XX shown in FIG. 80. Note that the gaming machine 1000 according to the second embodiment is, for example, a pachinko gaming machine.

The gaming machine 1000 according to the second embodiment includes a front decorative frame 5501 having a decorative accessory 5601, a right side decorative accessory 5801, a storage portion 5901, etc., a front projection device 6201 having a front projector 6221 and a front mirror 6241, and a front The screen unit 5101 includes a front screen 5121, a large accessory 2321, a game panel 3001 having a game area 3201, a game area partition glass 5201 arranged on the front of the game panel 3001, a main body frame 2101 including an upper horizontal frame 21261, It includes various members such as a firing handle 5881. These various members may have different shapes and arrangements, but in the gaming machine according to the first embodiment, the front decorative frame 550 has a decorative accessory 560, a right side decorative accessory 580, a storage section 590, etc. (see, for example, FIG. 32), a front projection device 600 having a front projector 622 and a front mirror 624 (see, for example, FIG. 40), a front screen 512 constituting the front screen unit 510 (see, for example, FIG. 34), a large accessory 232 (see, for example, FIG. 78), a game panel 300 (see, for example, FIG. 31), a game area partition glass 520 (see, for example, FIG. 34), and a main frame portion 210 including an upper horizontal frame 2126 (see, for example, FIG. 9). , corresponds to the firing handle 588 (see, for example, FIG. 32), so a description thereof will be omitted.

Note that in FIG. 81, illustration of a member corresponding to the rear unit 100 (for example, see FIG. 2) described in the gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment is omitted. Furthermore, drawings referred to in explaining the gaming machine 1000 according to the second embodiment (FIGS. 80, 81, and FIGS. 82 to 87 described later) include the gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment (for example, , see FIG. 1), for the sake of convenience, the reference numerals different from the reference numerals given in FIGS. 1 to 79 referred to in explaining the gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment are used. This will be explained below.

By the way, in the gaming machine 1000 according to the second embodiment, the length in the vertical direction of the front decorative frame 5501 is equal to the vertical length of the front decorative frame 550 (for example, see FIG. 32) of the gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment. less than the length in the direction. A lower display device 6001 capable of displaying an effect image is provided below the front decorative frame 5501.

Further, above the lower display device 6001, a game panel 3001 having a game area 3201 is arranged. That is, in the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 48, for example, the game panel 300 is arranged below and the production space 700 is formed above the game panel 300, but in the second embodiment This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that a lower display device 6001 is arranged below and a game panel 3001 is arranged above the lower display device 6001. However, in the gaming machine 1000 according to the second embodiment, the diameter of the gaming area 3201 is approximately 300 mm as in the first embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 81, the lower display device 6001 includes a rear projector 6061 capable of projecting image light, a rear mirror 6081 that reflects the image light projected from the rear projector 6061 forward, and a rear mirror 6081 that reflects the image light projected from the rear projector 6061. and a lower screen 6041 on which an image is projected using the image light projected from the rear projector 6061. The image projected on the lower screen 6041 can be viewed through the lower display window 6021 made of a transparent member. Note that the image light projected from the rear projector 6061 is controlled by the sub CPU 731 (for example, see FIG. 49).

The gaming machine 1000 according to the second embodiment further includes a liquid crystal display 2901 capable of displaying an effect image behind the gaming panel 3001, as shown in FIG. The image displayed on this liquid crystal display 2901 is controlled by a sub CPU 731 (see, for example, FIG. 49).

The liquid crystal display 2901 placed behind the game panel 3001 has approximately the same size as the game panel 3001, and is capable of displaying an image so that the effect image appears over almost the entire area of the game panel 3001. . However, the liquid crystal display 2901 displays an image so that a symbol production area 3301 (for example, see FIG. 80) appears approximately in the center of the game panel 3001, and also displays a variation production of symbols and characters in the symbol production area 3301. The image can be displayed as if it were a performance. In this way, although the liquid crystal display 2901 can display an image so that the effect image appears over almost the entire area of the game panel 3001, it is possible to display an image such that the effect image appears over almost the entire area of the game panel 3001. , visibility of the game ball flowing down the game area 3201 can be ensured.

Further, the large accessory 2321 described above is arranged behind the liquid crystal display 2901, but since it is behind the liquid crystal display 2901, it cannot be seen when viewed from the front. The origin position of the large accessory 2321 is the position shown in FIG. 81 (behind the liquid crystal display 2901), and is stopped at this origin position.

The large accessory 2321 is configured to be movable up and down by the large accessory drive mechanism 2401. This large-sized accessory drive mechanism 2401 is configured to raise and lower the large-sized accessory 2321 synchronously on the right end side and the left end side when viewed from the front. In addition, an opening 21264 corresponding to the shape of the large accessory 2321 is formed in the upper horizontal frame 21261, and when the large accessory 2321 rises, the large accessory 2321 is placed above the upper horizontal frame 21261 ( It is structured so that it can be extended to the outside.

The large-sized accessory drive mechanism 2401 includes a pedestal 2521 that supports the large-sized accessory 2321 below, a ball screw 2451 that can be rotated by a motor (not shown) to raise and lower the pedestal 2521, and a movable range of the pedestal 2521. An upper limit stopper 2531 and a lower limit stopper 2541 are provided. However, since the members constituting the large accessory drive mechanism 2401, such as the ball screw 2451, upper limit stopper 2531, and lower limit stopper 2541, are arranged behind the front decorative frame 5501 having the side decorative accessories 5801, etc., when viewed from the front It is no longer visible.

When the pedestal 2521 is raised until it comes into contact with the upper limit stopper 2531 by the drive of a motor (not shown), the large accessory 2321 advances above (outside) the upper horizontal frame 21261, and almost the entire large accessory 2321 is transferred to the upper horizontal frame 21261. exposed above. Note that a motor (not shown) is controlled by a sub CPU 731 (see, for example, FIG. 49).

With reference to FIGS. 82 to 86, an example of a performance executed in the gaming machine 1000 according to the second embodiment will be described. FIGS. 82 to 86 are examples of diagrams showing the progress of effects executed in the gaming machine 1000 according to the second embodiment.

When the result of the internal lottery is a specific result (for example, a jackpot or a possibility of a jackpot) and certain conditions are met (for example, when you win a predetermined production lottery or the random number of the symbol is a specific random number) ), the sub CPU 731 executes a collaborative performance using the large-sized accessory 2321, which is a real object, and a model image imitating the large-sized accessory 2321. Specifically, a collaborative performance is performed using a display performance in which a model image imitating the large-sized accessory 2321 is moved and displayed, and an operation performance in which the large-sized accessory 2321 is moved, which is performed in conjunction with this display performance.

In FIG. 82, a model image 3321 imitating the large accessory 2321 is displayed in the lower display window 6021 of the lower display device 6001, and is approximately the same size as the large accessory 2321. At this time, a model image imitating the large accessory 2321 is not displayed on either the liquid crystal display 2901 or the front screen 5121, and the large accessory 2321 is displayed behind the liquid crystal display 2901 (as shown in FIG. 81). location). After a still image of the mock image 3321 is once displayed in the lower display window 6021, the mock image 3321 is displayed so as to rise under the control of the sub CPU 731 (for example, see FIG. 49).

In FIG. 83, by displaying the simulated image 3321 shown in FIG. 82 in an ascending manner, a part of the large accessory 2321 (in FIG. A model image 3321 imitating a part of the large accessory 2321 (the upper half of the large accessory 2321 in FIG. 83) is displayed on the liquid crystal display 2901 (for example, see FIG. 81). A mock image 3331 is displayed. A mock image simulating the entire large accessory 2321 can be visually recognized by the simulated image 3321 displayed on the lower display window 6021 and the simulated image 3331 displayed on the liquid crystal display 2901. At this time, the large accessory 2321 is placed behind the liquid crystal display 2901 (the position shown in FIG. 81).

In FIG. 84, as a result of a model image simulating the entire large accessory object 2321 shown in FIG. 83 being displayed in an ascending manner, the large accessory object 2321 and A mock image 3331 imitating the large accessory 2321 with approximately the same size is displayed. The mock image 3321 is not displayed in the lower display window 6021 of the lower display device 6001. At this time, the large accessory 2321 is placed behind the liquid crystal display 2901 (the position shown in FIG. 81). However, the sub CPU 731 (for example, see FIG. 49) starts control to raise the large accessory 2321 starting from this time.

In addition, in FIG. 84, the simulated image 3331 is displayed over a wide area of the game panel 3001, including the area where the game ball flows down, but instead of this, the simulated image 3331 appears only in the pattern production area 3301, for example, The simulated image 3331 may not appear in the area where the game ball flows down. In this case, the simulated image 3331 can be displayed while ensuring the visibility of the game ball flowing down the game area 3201.

In FIG. 85, by displaying the simulated image 3331 shown in FIG. 84 so as to further rise, a part of the large accessory 2321 (in FIG. 85) is displayed on the liquid crystal display 2901 (for example, see FIG. 81). A mock image 3331 imitating the lower half of the large accessory 2321 is displayed. Note that a mock image that imitates a part of the large accessory 2321 that is not displayed on the liquid crystal display 2901 (the upper half of the large accessory 2321 in FIG. 85) is not actually displayed, but is similar to the decorative accessory 5601. It is possible to give the player the impression that the player is hiding behind the player. In addition, sub CPU731
(For example, see FIG. 49), by driving a motor (not shown) to rotate the ball screw 2451, as the simulated image 3331 is displayed rising, the large accessory 2321 as a real object also rises. to control.

Further, when the sub CPU 731 (for example, see FIG. 49) drives a motor (not shown) to rotate the ball screw 2451, as shown in FIG. Exposed above 21261. At this time, a simulated image imitating the large accessory 2321 does not appear on either the liquid crystal display 2901 (for example, see FIG. 81) or the lower display window 6021.

After the large accessory 2321 as a real object appears above the upper horizontal frame 21261 in this way, when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the end of the jackpot effect or the end of the jackpot game), the screen shown in FIGS. 82 to 86 is displayed. The performance is executed in the opposite flow to the flow of the performance described above. Specifically, the sub CPU 731 (for example, see FIG. 49) drives a motor (not shown) to rotate the ball screw 2451 so that the large accessory 2321 is positioned behind the liquid crystal display 2901 (at the position shown in FIG. 81). ) The large accessory 2321 is lowered so that it is placed at

The sub CPU 731 (for example, see FIG. 49) controls the liquid crystal display 2901 (see, for example, FIG. 81) to display a descending model image 3331 of the large accessory 2321 as the large accessory 2321 descends. (For example, see FIG. 85).

When the model image 3331 of the large accessory 2321 is displayed in a descending manner, a model image 3331 simulating the entire large accessory 2321 will eventually be displayed on the liquid crystal display 2901 (for example, see FIG. 81). (For example, see FIG. 84). At this time, the large accessory 2321 is located behind the liquid crystal display 2901 (the position shown in FIG. 81), and the sub CPU 731 (for example, see FIG. 49) controls the operation of the large accessory 2321 so that the operation of the large accessory 2321 is stopped. The motor (not shown) is stopped (rotation of the ball screw 2451 is stopped). Note that at this time, the mock image 3321 is not displayed in the lower display window 6021 of the lower display device 6001.

After that, the model image 3331 of the large accessory 2321 is displayed in a descending manner, so that the model image 3321 imitating a part of the large accessory 2321 is displayed in the lower display window 6021 of the lower display device 6001. . Then, the model image 3331 displayed on the liquid crystal display 2901 (for example, see FIG. 81) and the model image 3321 displayed on the lower display window 6021 allow a user to visually recognize the model image simulating the entire large accessory 2321. Can be done. At this time, since the large accessory 2321 has already stopped, it is placed behind the liquid crystal display 2901 (at the position shown in FIG. 81), as described above.

Furthermore, after that, the large ornaments 2321 and 3331 are displayed in a descending manner, so that the model image 3331 is hidden on the liquid crystal display 2901, and the lower display window 6021 displays a model image 3331 that imitates the entire large ornament 2321. An image 3321 is displayed (see, for example, FIG. 82). Then, after the still image of the mock image 3321 is once displayed in the lower display window 6021, it is hidden, and the collaborative performance ends.

Note that regardless of whether or not the simulated images 3321 and 3331 of the large accessory 2321 are displayed on the liquid crystal display 2901 (for example, see FIG. 81) or the lower display window 6021, images different from the simulated images 3321 and 3331 are displayed. (For example, a background image or a character image) may be displayed on the liquid crystal display 2901 or the lower display window 6021.

Next, with reference to FIG. 87, the control executed by the sub CPU 731 (see, for example, FIG. 49) will be described in chronological order. Here, FIG. 87 shows the display of a simulated image (simulated image projected by the rear projector 6061) of the large accessory 2321 appearing on the lower display window 6021 and the display of the large accessory 2321 displayed on the liquid crystal display 2901. This is an example of a time chart showing the timing at which the display of the simulated image and the operation of the large-sized accessory 2321, which is a real object, are respectively executed.

In FIG. 87, raised display means that the mock image is displayed raised (including displaying a still image once before being displayed raised), and non-display means that the simulated image is not displayed. The descending display means that the simulated image is displayed descending (including that a still image is temporarily displayed after being displayed descending).

If the result of the internal lottery is a specific result (for example, a jackpot or a possibility of a jackpot), and certain conditions are met (for example, if you win a predetermined production lottery, or if the random number of symbols is a specific random number) ), the sub CPU 731 (for example, see FIG. 49) first displays a still image of the mock image 3321 (for example, see FIG. control so that

The sub CPU 731 (for example, see FIG. 49) displays the mock image 3331 (for example, see FIG. 83) on the liquid crystal display 2901 in a raised manner after a certain period of time has elapsed since the raised display of the simulated image 3321 on the lower display window 6021. The simulated image 3321 in the lower display window 6021 is displayed in such a manner that the simulated image of the large accessory 2321 is maintained by the simulated image 3321 displayed in the lower display window 6021 and the simulated image 3331 displayed on the liquid crystal display 2901. Control is performed such that both the upward display of the model image 3331 and the upward display of the simulated image 3331 on the liquid crystal display 2901 are performed (for example, see FIG. 83).

After a certain period of time has elapsed since the upward display of the simulated image 3331 on the liquid crystal display 2901 started, the sub CPU 731 (for example, see FIG. The upward display of the simulated image 3321 in the display window 6021 is ended (hidden) (for example, see FIG. 84).

Immediately after the sub-CPU 731 (for example, see FIG. 49) completes the upward display of the mock image 3321 in the lower display window 6021, it drives a motor (not shown) (by rotating the ball screw 2451) to lift the large accessory 2321. control is started so that the upward display of the simulated image 3331 and the upward movement of the large accessory 2321 on the liquid crystal display 2901 are both performed (for the upward display of the simulated image 3331, see, for example, FIG. 85).

After a certain period of time has elapsed since starting the control to raise the large accessory 2321, the sub CPU 731 (for example, see FIG. 49) displays a mock image on the liquid crystal display 2901 while continuing the control to raise the large accessory 2321. The ascending display of 3331 ends.

The sub CPU 731 (for example, see FIG. 49) stops driving the motor (not shown) after a certain period of time has elapsed since the upward display of the simulated image 3331 on the liquid crystal display 2901 (hidden). (stops the rotation), and stops the control to raise the large accessory 2321. At this time, the large accessory 2321 is at the upper limit of the movable range of the pedestal 2521, and the pedestal 2521 is in contact with the upper limit stopper 2531 (see, for example, FIG. 2). However, it is not necessarily necessary to stop the control to raise the large accessory 2321 at the upper limit of the range of motion of the pedestal 2521, but to stop the large accessory 2321 below the upper limit of the range of motion of the pedestal 2521 to provide some margin. You can have it.

The sub CPU 731 (for example, see FIG. 49) stops the ascent of the large jackpot 2321, and then, when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the end of a jackpot performance or the end of a jackpot game), the sub CPU 731 (for example, see FIG. 49) controls a motor (not shown) to start the large jack Control for lowering the large accessory 2321 is started by rotating the object 2321 in the opposite direction to when raising the object 2321.

The sub CPU 731 (for example, see FIG. 49) starts displaying the simulated image 3331 (for example, see FIG. 85) on the liquid crystal display 2901 in a downward direction after a certain period of time has elapsed since starting the control to lower the large accessory 2321. , control is performed to lower the large accessory 2331 and to display the simulated image 3331 downward on the liquid crystal display 2901 (see FIG. 85, for example, regarding the descending display of the simulated image 3331).

After a certain period of time has elapsed since starting the downward display of the simulated image 3331 on the liquid crystal display 2901, the sub CPU 731 (for example, see FIG. The drive of the motor that is not used is stopped, and the control for lowering the large accessory 2321 is ended. Thereby, the large accessory 2321 is stopped in a state located behind the liquid crystal display 2901.

Immediately after the sub CPU 731 (for example, see FIG. 49) finishes the control to lower the large accessory 2321, it starts displaying the simulated image 3321 in the lower display window 6021, and the simulated image displayed on the liquid crystal display 2901. 3331 and the simulated image 3321 displayed in the lower display window 6021, the lower display of the simulated image 3331 on the liquid crystal display 2901 and the simulated image 3321 in the lower display window 6021 are performed in such a manner that the simulated image of the large accessory 2321 is maintained by the simulated image 3321 displayed on the lower display window 6021. The display is controlled so that the lowering display is performed at the same time (for example, see FIG. 83).

The sub CPU 731 (for example, see FIG. 49) temporarily displays a still image of the simulated image 3331 on the liquid crystal display 2901 after a certain period of time has elapsed since starting the descending display of the simulated image 3321 on the lower display window 6021 (for example, (See FIG. 82), and shortly thereafter, the display of the still image of the mock image 3331 on the liquid crystal display 2901 is ended (hidden).

In this way, by performing collaborative production using the large-sized accessory 2321, which is a real object, and the imitation images 3321, 3331 that imitate this large-sized accessory 2321, display performance using images and operation performance of the large-sized accessory 2321 can be achieved. are not only executed at the same timing, but as the simulated image as a display effect moves upward, it changes into a large accessory 2321 as a real object, and the large accessory that has changed into the real object. By performing an impactful performance in which the game machine 2321 advances beyond the frame of the gaming machine 1000 until it is located above (outside) the upper horizontal frame 21261, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest. Moreover, since the movement effect of the mock images 3321, 3331 or the large accessory 2321 is performed over a wide area between the lower display window 6021 and the upper horizontal frame 21261, the impact on the player is large. Furthermore, the large accessory 2321 as a real object that has advanced to the outside of the upper horizontal frame 21261 changes into a mock image as a display effect and is displayed on the liquid crystal display 2901 and the lower display window 6021. becomes. In this way, a display effect is performed in which the mock images 3321 and 3331 move upward as a display effect, and the simulated image that has moved upward changes into a large accessory 2321 as a real object and is positioned outside the upper horizontal frame 21261. By performing a series of collaborative performances such as advancing until the large accessory 2321 further descends and changing again to the mock images 3321 and 3331 as a display performance, a new performance that has never been seen before is executed. It becomes possible to do so.

In addition, in the second embodiment, a display effect is performed in which the mock images 3321 and 3331 move upward as a display effect, and the simulated image that has moved upward changes into a large accessory 2321 as a real object and moves to the upper horizontal frame. After performing a performance (first half performance) in which the large accessory 2321 advances until it is positioned above (outside) 21261, the large accessory 2321 further descends and changes to the mock images 3321, 3331 as a display performance again (second half performance) However, the present invention is not limited to this, and only the first half of the above-mentioned first half and second half may be executed. In this case, the sub CPU 731 (for example, see FIG. 49) executes the first half of the effect, and then rotates the motor (not shown) in the opposite direction to the direction used to raise the large accessory 2321, so that the large accessory 2321 is positioned outside the upper horizontal frame 21261. Although control is executed to lower the large accessory 2321 that has advanced up to that point, the effect of displaying a mock image of the large accessory 2321 is not executed.

Further, in the second embodiment, a mock image 3331 imitating the large accessory 2321 is displayed on the liquid crystal display 2901, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the image light projected from the front projector 6221 can be used to A mock image imitating the large accessory 2321 may be projected onto the front screen 5121. Further, a model image imitating the large accessory 2321 may be displayed on both the front screen 5121 and the liquid crystal display 2901.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, an image is projected onto the front screen 5121 in front of the gaming area 3201, and an image is displayed on the liquid crystal display 2901 behind the gaming area 3201. Both the front screen 5121 and the liquid crystal display 2901 are not necessarily required, and only one of them may be used.

Further, in the second embodiment, the lower display device 6001 is configured to project an image using the image light projected from the rear projector 6061, but the present invention is not limited to this. The lower display device 6001 may be any other device as long as it can display. Furthermore, the liquid crystal display 2901 may be any other device, such as a 7-segment display, as long as it can display images.

Furthermore, it is preferable that both the imitation image 3321 and the imitation image 3331 have approximately the same size as the large accessory 2321, but this is not necessarily the case. may be different, or the size of the mock image 3321 and the size of the mock image 3331 may be different. In addition, if the size of the mock images 3321, 3331 and the size of the large accessory 2321 are approximately the same, both the mock images 3321, 3331 and the large accessory 2321 should be large in order to easily give an impact. is preferable, but is not necessarily limited to this size, and may be any size that can be visually recognized by the player.

In addition, in the second embodiment, the simulated images 3321 and 3331 imitating the large accessory 2321 are displayed so as to move in the vertical direction, but the displayed images are not necessarily the simulated images simulating the large accessory 2321. 3321 and 3331, and the mode is not limited as long as it is an image (for example, an arrow image) that allows the player to understand the direction of movement.

In addition, in the second embodiment, as can be seen from, for example, FIG. 87, the display of the mock image 3321 in the lower display window 6021, the display of the mock image 3331 in the liquid crystal display 2901, and the raising of the large accessory 2321. Since these are not performed at the same time, there is no case where the large accessory 2321 can be viewed while both the mock image 3321 and the mock image 3331 are displayed. However, instead of this, for example, by making the large accessory 2321 larger or changing the origin position, the large accessory 2321 may be made visible while both the mock image 3321 and the mock image 3331 are displayed.

Note that in the second embodiment, the liquid crystal display 2901 is configured so that the large accessory 2321 placed behind the liquid crystal display 2901 cannot be viewed from the front, but this is not necessarily the case. The liquid crystal display 2901 is configured with, for example, a transmissive liquid crystal display that allows rearward visibility, and for example, as shown in FIG. It may be possible to do so. Here, FIG. 88 is an example of a modification of the effect shown in FIG. 84.

In FIG. 88, a large accessory 2321 located behind the transmissive liquid crystal display can be visually recognized. In addition, the sub CPU 731 (for example, see FIG. 49) uses the image light projected from the front projector 6221 to display a large-scale game on the front screen 512 (both see, for example, FIG. 81) arranged in front of the game panel 300. Control is performed so that an outer edge image 3341 that outlines the outer shape of the object 2321 is projected. Further, the sub CPU 731 (for example, see FIG. 49) executes control to move the large accessory 2321 and the outer edge image 3341 upward (or downward) while maintaining the state in which they overlap in the front-back direction. In this way, by displaying the large accessory 2321 and the outer edge image 3341 in an overlapping manner in the front-rear direction, it is possible to provide thicker visibility in the front-rear direction. In this way, the effect of moving the large accessory 2321 and the outer edge image 3341 upward (or downward) while maintaining the overlapping state in the front-back direction is a combination of the display effect and the operation effect of the large accessory 2321 as a physical object. It can be said that this is a fusion performance.

As described above, in the lowermost display window 6021 of the gaming machine 1000, a display effect of the mock image 3321 imitating the large accessory 2321 is performed, and above the lower display window 6021, the above-mentioned fusion effect is performed. Above that, a substantial accessory performance is performed in which a large accessory 2321 as a substantial object advances until it is located above (outside) the upper horizontal frame 21261. In other words, as the display effect that was performed at the bottom moves upward, it changes to a fusion effect, and as the fusion effect moves upward, it further changes to a physical role effect effect, creating a new and unprecedented effect. With this performance, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation for the gradual change from the display performance to the physical role performance.

In addition, as the physical role performance performed at the top of the gaming machine 1000 moves downward, it changes to a fusion performance, and as the fusion performance moves downward, it further changes to a display performance. It's okay.

In the modification shown in FIG. 88, a display effect is performed in the lowermost display window 6021 of the gaming machine 1000, the above-mentioned fusion effect is performed above the lower display window 6021, and above that, a physical role is displayed. Although the object presentation is performed, the present invention is not limited to this; the display presentation is performed at the top of the game machine 1000, the above-mentioned fusion presentation is performed below that, and further below that, the display presentation is performed as an actual object. It may also be possible to perform a physical performance that allows the operation to be visually confirmed.

Further, although the gaming machine 1000 according to the second embodiment has been described using a pachinko machine as an example, it can also be applied to a pachislot instead of a pachinko machine. When applied to Pachislot, for example, reels are arranged in an area corresponding to the gaming area 3201, a panel is arranged in an area corresponding to the lower display device 6001, and An operation unit such as a stop button is arranged in the corresponding area, and accessories, etc. are arranged in the area corresponding to the decorative accessory 5601. Alternatively, a display means such as a liquid crystal display is arranged in an area corresponding to the gaming area 3201, a mini-reel, a panel, an operation unit such as a stop button is arranged in an area corresponding to the lower display device 6001, and a decorative accessory 5601 is arranged. Accessories and the like are placed in the corresponding areas. In this way, when the invention according to the second embodiment is applied to pachi-slot, it is possible to operate the large accessory 2301 to a position beyond the gaming machine frame such as the cabinet or front door provided in a general pachi-slot. Even in this case, the same effects as the pachinko machine that is the gaming machine 1000 according to the second embodiment can be achieved.

[14-2. Gaming machine according to third embodiment]
The configuration of a gaming machine 2000 according to the third embodiment will be briefly described with reference to FIGS. 89 and 90. FIG. 89 is an example showing a front view of the gaming machine 2000 of the third embodiment. FIG. 90 is a schematic diagram showing a cross section taken along the YY line shown in FIG. 89, and is an example of a diagram showing a state when the large accessory 2322 is at the origin position. Note that the gaming machine 2000 according to the third embodiment is, for example, a pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIGS. 89 and 90, the gaming machine 2000 according to the third embodiment includes a front decorative frame 5502 having a decorative accessory 5602, a right side decorative accessory 5802, a storage portion 5902, etc., a front projector 6222, A front projection device 6202 having a front mirror 6242, a front screen 5122 forming the front screen unit 5102, a large accessory 2322, a game panel 3002 having a game area 3202, a game area dividing glass 5202 arranged in front of the game panel 3002, It includes various members such as a lower screen 6042, a rear projector 6062, a rear mirror 6082, a main body frame 2102 including an upper horizontal frame 21262, and a firing handle 5882. These various members may have different shapes and arrangements, but in the gaming machine according to the first embodiment, the front decorative frame 550 has a decorative accessory 560, a right side decorative accessory 580, a storage section 590, etc. (see, for example, FIG. 32), a front projection device 600 having a front projector 622 and a front mirror 624 (see, for example, FIG. 40), a front screen 512 constituting the front screen unit 510 (see, for example, FIG. 34), a large accessory 232 (see, for example, FIG. 78), a game panel 300 (see, for example, FIG. 31), a game area partition glass 520 (see, for example, FIG. 34), a lower rear screen 2904 and an intermediate rear screen 2906, a second rear projector 124, This corresponds to the rear mirror 126, the main body frame 210 including the upper horizontal frame 2126 (see, for example, FIG. 9), and the firing handle 588 (see, for example, FIG. 32), and therefore the description thereof will be omitted.

Additionally, in the third embodiment, illustration of a member corresponding to the rear unit 100 (for example, see FIG. 2) described in the gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment is omitted. In addition, the drawings (FIGS. 88 to 95) referred to when explaining the gaming machine 2000 according to the third embodiment include parts corresponding to the gaming machines 1 and 1000 according to the first and second embodiments. Even if it is a member, for convenience, it will be given a different reference numeral from the reference numeral given in the drawings (FIGS. 1 to 87) referred to in explaining the gaming machine 1,1000 according to each of the first and second embodiments. This will be explained below.

By the way, the gaming machine 2000 according to the third embodiment does not include the lower display device 6001 (for example, see FIG. 80) like the gaming machine 1000 according to the second embodiment, and the The length in the vertical direction is approximately the same as the length in the vertical direction of the front decorative frame 550 (for example, see FIG. 32) of the gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment.

Further, the gaming machine 2000 according to the third embodiment has a gaming panel 3002 arranged below and a production space 7002 above the gaming panel 3002, similar to the gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment. A large accessory 2322 is configured to be operable in this production space 7002. In addition, in the gaming machine 2000 according to the third embodiment, the diameter of the gaming area 3202 is approximately 300 mm similarly to the gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment and the gaming machine 1000 according to the second embodiment. ing.

The gaming machine 2000 according to the third embodiment further includes, as shown in FIG. It includes a large accessory drive mechanism 2402 that moves the large accessory 2322 up and down, a liquid crystal display device 2602 that can display an effect image, and a liquid crystal drive mechanism 2612 that moves the liquid crystal display device 2602 up and down.

As shown in FIG. 90, the large accessory 2322 is placed behind the decorative accessory 5602, and the liquid crystal display device 2602 is placed between the decorative accessory 5602 and the game panel 3002 when viewed from the front. The large accessory 2322 has its origin behind the decorative accessory 5602, and can not only move up and down in the performance space 7002, but can also advance to the upper side (outside) of the upper horizontal frame 21262. Note that when viewed from the front, it is impossible or difficult to visually recognize the large accessory 2322 at the origin position, but the effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 2602 can be visually recognized.

The large-sized accessory drive mechanism 2402 is configured to raise and lower the large-sized accessory 2322 synchronously on the right end side and the left end side when viewed from the front. In addition, the upper horizontal frame 21262 is formed with an opening 21265 corresponding to the shape of the large accessory 2322, and when the large accessory 2322 rises, the large accessory 2322 falls into the upper horizontal frame as described above. It is configured so that it can advance to the upper side (outside) of 21262.

Since the longitudinal drive mechanism 2552 is arranged so as to be hidden behind the large accessory 2322, it is difficult or impossible to visually recognize it when viewed from the front. The longitudinal drive mechanism 2552 is composed of a pantograph mechanism that expands and contracts back and forth by the rotation of the motor 2572, and its rear end is supported by the support plate 2562, and its front end supports the longitudinal drive mechanism 2552. Note that the motor 2572 is controlled by the sub CPU 731 (for example, see FIG. 49).

The large accessory drive mechanism 2402 includes a pedestal 2522 that supports the support plate 2562 of the front-rear drive mechanism 2552 below, a ball screw 2452 that can be rotated by a motor (not shown) to move the pedestal 2522 up and down, and the pedestal 2522. It is provided with an upper limit stopper 2532 and a lower limit stopper 2542 that define the range of motion. When the ball screw 2452 is rotated by the drive of a motor (not shown) and the pedestal 2522 is raised or lowered, the support plate 2562 supported by the pedestal 2522, the longitudinal drive mechanism 2552 supported by the support plate 2562, and the longitudinal drive mechanism 2552 All of the supported large accessories 2322 rise or fall together. Note that the support plate 2562 has cutouts for being supported by the pedestal 2522 at the lower corners of both left and right ends.

In addition, since the members constituting the large accessory drive mechanism 2402, such as the ball screw 2452, upper limit stopper 2532, and lower limit stopper 2542, are arranged behind the front decorative frame 5502 having the side decorative accessories 5802, etc., when viewed from the front It is no longer visible.

The liquid crystal drive mechanism 2612 includes a pedestal 2632 that supports the liquid crystal display device 2602 below, a ball screw 2622 that can be rotated by a motor (not shown) to raise and lower the pedestal 2632, and an upper limit that defines the range of movement of the pedestal 2632. It includes a stopper 2642 and a lower limit stopper 2652. When the ball screw 2622 is rotated by the drive of a motor (not shown) and the pedestal 2632 is raised or lowered, the liquid crystal display device 2602 supported by the pedestal 2632 is raised or lowered. Note that the liquid crystal display device 2602 has cutouts for being supported by the pedestal 2632 at the lower corners of both left and right ends.

Note that the members constituting the liquid crystal drive mechanism 2612, such as the ball screw 2622, the upper limit stopper 2642, and the lower limit stopper 2652, are also arranged behind the front decorative frame 5502 having the side decorative accessories 5802, etc., so they are not visible when viewed from the front. It is no longer visible.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 91 to 95, an example of a performance executed in the gaming machine 2000 according to the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 91 is a schematic diagram showing a cross section taken along the YY line shown in FIG. 89, and is an example of a diagram showing a state when the large accessory 2322 is lowered. FIG. 92 is an example of a front view when a descending effect of lowering the large accessory 2322 is executed in the gaming machine 2000 according to the third embodiment. FIG. 93 is a schematic diagram showing a cross section taken along the YY line shown in FIG. 89, and shows a state when the large accessory 2322 and the liquid crystal display device 2602 advance above (outside) the upper horizontal frame 21262. This is an example of a diagram. FIG. 94 is an example of a front view when a rising effect for raising the large accessory 2322 is executed in the gaming machine 2000 according to the third embodiment. FIG. 95 is a schematic diagram showing a cross section taken along the YY line shown in FIG. , also referred to as "advancement").

The sub CPU 731 (for example, see FIG. 49) determines whether or not to perform an ascending effect or a descending effect for the large accessory 2322 based on, for example, the result of an internal lottery or the result of an effect lottery, and based on the determination, performs an ascending effect or a descending effect. Execute the descending effect. When determining whether or not to perform an ascending effect or a descending effect for the large accessory 2322 based on the result of an internal lottery, the sub CPU 731 makes the decision based on the result of the internal lottery executed by the main CPU 721 (for example, see FIG. 49). (For example, see FIG. 49). In addition, when deciding whether or not to perform an ascending performance or a descending performance of the large accessory 2322 by a performance lottery, the performance lottery may be executed by the sub CPU 731 or by the main CPU 721, and the result is transferred to the sub CPU 731. The command may also be sent to the CPU 731.

First, the descending effect of the large accessory 2322 will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 and 92. When the sub CPU 731 (for example, see FIG. 49) determines to execute the descending effect of the large accessory 2322, it drives the large accessory drive mechanism 2402 by a motor (not shown), and moves the pedestal 2522, the front and back drive mechanism 2552, and Control is executed to lower the large accessory 2322. Then, when the pedestal 2522 descends until it comes into contact with the upper limit stopper 2533, the large accessory 2322 advances to the front of the liquid crystal display device 2602 (below the decorative accessory 5602 when viewed from the front), and almost the whole of the large accessory 2322 is moved forward. Becomes visible from the front.

The large accessory 2322 that has advanced to the front of the liquid crystal display device 2602 may further operate or move in front of the liquid crystal display device 2602.

Then, when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a condition for ending the performance period of the large accessory 2322 is satisfied), the sub CPU 731 drives the large accessory drive mechanism 2402 in the opposite direction to the above using a motor (not shown), Control is executed to return the large accessory 2322 (including the front-back drive mechanism 2552 and the support plate 2562) to the original position (the position shown in FIG. 90).

In this way, by advancing the large accessory 2322 in front of the liquid crystal display device 2602, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the result of the internal lottery may be a jackpot.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 93 and 94, an explanation will be given of the rising performance of the large accessory 2322. When the sub CPU 731 (for example, see FIG. 49) determines to execute the raising effect of the large accessory 2322, it drives the liquid crystal drive mechanism 2612 by a motor (not shown), and first, the pedestal 2632 and the liquid crystal display device 2602 Execute control to raise the

When the liquid crystal drive mechanism 2612 rises to the back of the large accessory 2322 at the origin position, the sub CPU 731 drives the large accessory drive mechanism 2402 by a motor (not shown), and moves the pedestal 2522, the front-rear drive mechanism 2552, and the large accessory 2322. Execute control to raise.

When the pedestal 2632 rises until it abuts the upper limit stopper 2642 and the pedestal 2522 rises until it abuts the upper limit stopper 2532, the large accessory 2322, the front-rear drive mechanism 2552, the support plate 2562, and the liquid crystal display device 2602 move toward the upper horizontal frame 21262. Advancing upward (outside), the large accessory 2322 and the liquid crystal display device 2602 are exposed above the upper horizontal frame 21262, and can be viewed from the front above the upper horizontal frame 21262. However, as described above, the front-rear drive mechanism 2552 is hidden behind the large accessory 2322, so it is difficult or difficult to see from the front.

In this way, the large accessory 2322 is not only advanced in front of the liquid crystal display device 2602, but also moved beyond the upper horizontal frame 21262 to the upper side (outside) of the upper horizontal frame 21262, which has an impact. By doing so, it becomes possible to suppress a decline in interest.

Next, with reference to FIG. 95, a description will be given of an effect in which the large accessory 2322 that has advanced above (outside) the upper horizontal frame 21262 is advanced further forward.

The sub CPU 731 (for example, see FIG. 49) causes the motor 2572 to move the front-rear drive mechanism 2552 in the extending direction (forward ), and executes control to advance the large accessory 2322 until it is located above the decorative accessory 5602.

As a result, the large accessory 2322 not only moves in the vertical direction over a wide area between the bottom of the decorative accessory 5602 and the top of the upper horizontal frame 21262, but also moves in the vertical direction above the upper horizontal frame 21262. A movement effect of the large accessory 2322 will also be performed in the front and rear directions. In this case, since the large accessory 2322 moves in a direction toward the player, it has a large impact on the player, and it becomes possible to perform a new performance that has never been seen before.

The sub CPU 731 (for example, see FIG. 49) may perform control to advance the large-sized accessory 2322 until it is located above the decorative accessory 5602, and then operate above the decorative accessory 5602.

Further, the sub CPU 731 (for example, see FIG. 49) executes control to advance the large-sized accessory 2322 until it is located above and in front of the decorative accessory 5602, and then It may be operated so that the large accessory 2322 descends in front of the.

Then, when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the condition for ending the performance period of the large accessory 2322 is satisfied), the sub CPU 731 causes the motor 2572 to move the front-rear drive mechanism 2552 in the opposite direction (the front-rear drive mechanism 2552 contracts). direction) to return the large accessory 2322 to its original position. Thereafter, the sub CPU 731 controls the large accessory drive mechanism 2402 to be driven in the opposite direction to the above using a motor (not shown) to return the large accessory 2322 and the like to the position shown in FIG. Control is executed to return the mechanism 2552 and support plate 2562 to the original position, and to return the liquid crystal display device 2602 to the production space 7002, thereby ending the rising production.

In addition, in the third embodiment, when executing the ascending effect, the sub CPU 731 (for example, see FIG. 49) advances the large accessory 2322 above (outside) the upper horizontal frame 21262, and then waits for a certain period of time. Although the control is executed to advance the large accessory 2322 forward when the time has elapsed, the control is not limited to this, and after the mold accessory 2322 is advanced above the upper horizontal frame 21262, the large accessory 2322 is immediately moved forward. Control may be executed to advance the vehicle forward.

In addition, in the third embodiment, the sub CPU 731 (for example, see FIG. 49) performs an effect in which the large accessory 2322 that has advanced above (outside) the upper horizontal frame 21262 is advanced further forward. Although the large accessory 2322 is advanced until it is located above the decorative accessory 5602, the present invention is not limited to this, and the large accessory 2322 is advanced until it is located further in front of the decorative accessory 5602. Alternatively, it may be stopped at a position behind the decorative accessory 5602.

Further, in the third embodiment, the front and rear drive mechanism 2552 has a configuration that does not allow the liquid crystal display device 2602 to move forward; however, the structure is not limited to this, and the front and rear drive mechanism 2552 can also move the liquid crystal display device 2602 along with the large accessory 2322. It is preferable to allow it to advance forward. In this case, it is preferable to arrange the liquid crystal display device 2602 close to the back of the large accessory 2322, and the sub CPU 731 (for example, see FIG. 49) allows both the large accessory 2322 and the liquid crystal display device 2602 to move forward. After that, or during the advance, it is preferable to execute both the operation effect of activating the large accessory 2322 and the display effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device 2602. In this case, it is preferable that a display effect related to an operation effect for activating the large accessory 2322 is executed on the liquid crystal display device 2602. In this way, by bringing not only the large accessory 2322 but also the liquid crystal display device 2602 close to the player, it becomes possible to execute a powerful performance, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

In addition, in the third embodiment, when the large accessory 2322 that has advanced above (outside) the upper horizontal frame 21262 is further advanced forward until it is located above the decorative accessory 5602, the Although the form and the form of the large accessory 2322 are independent, the decorative accessory 5602 and the large accessory 2322 can create a specific form (for example, a form representing a specific character). 5602 and the large accessory 2322 may be made to function as members constituting a specific form. As a result, the large accessory 2322 not only advances beyond the upper horizontal frame 21262 until it is located above (outside) the upper horizontal frame 21262, but also advances to the upper part of the decorative accessory 5602. Since a specific form is created by the object 2322 and the ornamental object 5602, it is possible to perform a performance with a greater impact.

In addition, in the above-mentioned ascending effect, control is executed to advance the large accessory 2322 above (outside) the upper horizontal frame 21262, and control is also executed to advance the large accessory 2322 forward. The control to advance the accessory 2322 forward is not necessarily essential, and after executing the control to advance the large accessory 2322 above the upper horizontal frame 21262, the control to advance the large accessory 2322 forward is not executed. In addition, control may be executed to return the large accessory 2322 and the like to the position shown in FIG. 90.

In addition, a first mode in which control is executed to advance the large accessory 2322 above (outside) the upper horizontal frame 21262, and further control is executed to advance the large accessory 2322 forward; After executing control to advance the upper horizontal frame 21262 upward, control is executed to return the large accessory 2322 etc. to the position shown in FIG. 90 without executing control to advance the large accessory 2322 forward. The increase performance may be executed in one of the second modes determined by lottery, for example.

Further, in the third embodiment, the sub CPU 731 (for example, see FIG. 49) executes the ascending effect or the descending effect based on the determination, but the present invention is not limited to this. An effect of moving between a position above (outside) the horizontal frame 21262 and a position below the decorative accessory 5602 may be performed. The effect of moving between the position above the upper horizontal frame 21262 and the position below the decorative accessory 5602 may be repeated (for example, movement back and forth). In this case, the liquid crystal display device 2602 may be moved together with the large accessory 2322, or the large accessory 2322 may be moved while the liquid crystal display device 2602 is stopped between the decorative accessory 5602 and the game panel 3002 when viewed from the front. It may be moved up and down.

Further, in the third embodiment, a liquid crystal display device 2602 is employed, but the invention is not limited to this, and for example, a dot display device, a 7-segment display device, or even a dot display device may be used. , a device in which an image is projected onto a screen using image light projected from a projection device such as a projector.

In the third embodiment, the sub CPU 731 (for example, see FIG. 49) executes control to advance both the large accessory 2322 and the liquid crystal display device 2602 until they are located above (outside) the upper horizontal frame 21262. However, when both the large accessory 2322 and the liquid crystal display device 2602 are advanced until they are located above the upper horizontal frame 21262, the image light is projected from the front projector 6222, and a predetermined effect image is displayed. Preferably, the image is projected onto the front screen 5122. In this case, the effect image can be projected both at the upper (outside) position of the upper horizontal frame 21262 and at the position between the decorative accessory 5602 and the game area 3202 when viewed from the front, which is unprecedented. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that can perform new display effects. However, it is not essential that the image be projected onto the front screen 5122, and therefore the front screen 5122 and the front projection device 6202 are not essential configurations.

In the third embodiment, the sub CPU 731 (for example, see FIG. 49) executes control to advance both the large accessory 2322 and the liquid crystal display device 2602 until they are located above (outside) the upper horizontal frame 21262. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the large accessory 2322 can be moved while the liquid crystal display device 2602 is stopped at the position (in the third embodiment, between the decorative accessory 5602 and the game panel 3002 when viewed from the front). It may be made to advance above the upper horizontal frame 21262.

Further, although the gaming machine 2000 according to the third embodiment has been described using a pachinko machine as an example, it can also be applied to a pachislot instead of a pachinko machine. When applied to Pachislot, for example, reels are placed in an area corresponding to the production space 7002, panels are placed in an area corresponding to the game area 3202, and the area corresponds to the lower area of the production space 7002 or the upper area of the game area 3202. An operation unit such as a stop button is arranged in the area, and accessories, etc. are arranged in the area corresponding to the decorative accessory 5602. Alternatively, a display means such as a liquid crystal display is arranged in an area corresponding to the production space 7002, and an operation unit such as a mini-reel, a panel, and a stop button is arranged in an area corresponding to the game area 3202, which corresponds to the decorative accessory 5602. Accessories, etc. are placed in the area. In this way, when the invention according to the third embodiment is applied to pachislot, it is possible to operate the large accessory 2322 to a position beyond the gaming machine frame such as the cabinet and front door provided in a general pachislot. Even in this case, the same effects as the pachinko machine that is the gaming machine 2000 according to the third embodiment can be achieved.

[14-3. Gaming machine according to fourth embodiment]
The configuration of a gaming machine 3000 according to the fourth embodiment will be briefly described with reference to FIGS. 96 and 97. FIG. 96 is an example of a front view of the gaming machine 3000 of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 97 is a schematic diagram showing a cross section taken along the ZZ line shown in FIG. 96, and is an example of a diagram showing an aspect when the large accessory 2323 is at the origin position. Note that the gaming machine 3000 according to the fourth embodiment is, for example, a pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIGS. 96 and 97, the gaming machine 3000 according to the fourth embodiment includes a front decorative frame 5503 having a decorative accessory 5603, a right side decorative accessory 5803, a storage portion 5903, etc., a front projector 6223, A front projection device 6203 having a front mirror 6243, a front screen 5123 forming a front screen unit 5103, a game panel 3003 having a game area 3203, a game area dividing glass 5203 arranged on the front of the game panel 3003, a lower screen 6043, a rear It includes various members such as a projector 6063, a rear mirror 6083, a main body frame portion 2103 including an upper horizontal frame 21263, and a firing handle 5883. These various members may have different shapes and arrangements, but in the gaming machine according to the first embodiment, the front decorative frame 550 has a decorative accessory 560, a right side decorative accessory 580, a storage section 590, etc. (see, for example, FIG. 32), a front projection device 620 having a front projector 622 and a front mirror 624 (see, for example, FIG. 40), a front screen 512 constituting the front screen unit 510 (see, for example, FIG. 34), a game panel 300 (for example, see FIG. 31), a main body frame including the gaming area dividing glass 520 (see, for example, FIG. 34), the lower rear screen 2904 and the intermediate rear screen 2906, the second rear projector 124, the rear mirror 126, and the upper horizontal frame 2126. 210 (see, for example, FIG. 9), and the firing handle 588 (see, for example, FIG. 32), so a description thereof will be omitted.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, illustration of a member corresponding to the rear unit 100 (for example, see FIG. 2) described in the gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment is omitted. Further, although the fourth embodiment also includes a large accessory 2323, the details will be described later, but it is configured as an accessory that can display an effect image, rather than an accessory that simply operates. Furthermore, the drawings (FIGS. 96 to 99) referred to when explaining the gaming machine 3000 according to the fourth embodiment include parts in the gaming machines 1, 1000, and 2000 according to each of the first to third embodiments. Even if the components correspond to the above, for convenience, the reference numerals attached to the drawings (FIGS. 1 to 95) referred to in explaining the gaming machines 1, 1000, and 2000 according to the first to third embodiments will be used. will be explained using different symbols.

By the way, in the gaming machine 3000 according to the fourth embodiment, the length of the front decorative frame 5503 in the vertical direction is similar to the gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment and the gaming machine 2000 according to the third embodiment. , is approximately the same length in the vertical direction as the front decorative frame 550 (see FIG. 32, for example).

The gaming machine 3000 according to the fourth embodiment has a gaming panel 3003 disposed below and the gaming machine 2000 according to the first embodiment and the gaming machine 2000 according to the third embodiment. A production space 7003 is formed above the panel 3003, and a large accessory 2323 is configured to be operable in this production space 7003. In addition, in the gaming machine 3000 according to the fourth embodiment, the diameter of the gaming area 3203 is approximately 300 mm, similarly to the gaming machines 1,1000, and 2000 according to the first to third embodiments. ing.

In the gaming machine 3000 according to the fourth embodiment, the large accessory 2323 is a bowl-shaped screen that has a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front and has a curved surface that bulges forward when viewed from the side. Furthermore, the gaming machine 3000 according to the fourth embodiment includes an upper rear projector 2343 capable of projecting image light. An image is projected onto the large accessory 2323 by the image light projected from the upper rear projector 2343.

The above-mentioned upper rear projector 2343 is housed in a box 2563 having an opening at the front, and a large accessory 2323 is provided so as to close the opening of the box 2563. Moreover, the large accessory 2323, the upper rear projector 2343, and the box body 2563 are unitized. In the following, the unitized large accessory 2323, upper rear projector 2343, and box body 2563 will be referred to as a large accessory unit 2320.

As shown in FIG. 97, the large accessory unit 2320 is arranged between the decorative accessory 5603 and the game panel 3003 when viewed from the front, and this position is the origin position. The large accessory unit 2320 can not only move up and down in the production space 7003, but can also advance to the upper side (outside) of the upper horizontal frame 21263. Note that when viewed from the front, when the large accessory unit 2320 is at the origin position, the effect image projected on the large accessory 2323 can be visually recognized.

The gaming machine 3000 according to the fourth embodiment further includes, in the performance space 7003, a large accessory drive mechanism 2403 that moves the large accessory unit 2320 up and down, as shown in FIG.

The large-sized accessory drive mechanism 2403 is configured to raise and lower the large-sized accessory unit 2320 synchronously on the right end side and the left end side when viewed from the front. In addition, an opening 21266 corresponding to the shape of the large accessory unit 2320 is formed in the upper horizontal frame 21263, and when the large accessory unit 2320 is raised, the large accessory unit 2320 is opened as described above. It is configured so that it can extend to the upper side (outside) of the upper horizontal frame 21263.

The large accessory drive mechanism 2403 includes a pedestal 2523 that supports the box body 2563 below, a ball screw 2453 that can be rotated by the drive of a motor (not shown) to move the pedestal 2523 up and down, and defines the range of movement of the pedestal 2523. It includes an upper limit stopper 2533 and a lower limit stopper 2543. When the ball screw 2453 is rotated by the drive of a motor (not shown) and the pedestal 2523 is raised or lowered, the entire large accessory unit 2320 is raised or lowered together via the box 2563 supported by the pedestal 2523.

Note that the members constituting the large accessory drive mechanism 2403, such as the ball screw 2453, the upper limit stopper 2533, and the lower limit stopper 2543, are arranged behind the front decorative frame 5503 having the side decorative accessories 5803, etc., so they cannot be seen from the front. It is no longer visible.

Next, with reference to FIG. 96, FIG. 98, and FIG. 99, an example of the effect executed in the gaming machine 3000 according to the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 98 is a schematic diagram showing a cross section taken along the Z-Z line shown in FIG. 96, and is an example of a diagram showing a state when the large accessory unit 2320 advances above (outside) the upper horizontal frame 21263. be. FIG. 99 is an example of a front view when the large accessory unit 2320 is advanced to above the upper horizontal frame 21263 in the gaming machine 3000 according to the fourth embodiment.

The sub CPU 731 (for example, see FIG. 49) determines whether or not to advance the large accessory unit 2320 to the upper side (outside) of the upper horizontal frame 21263 based on, for example, the result of an internal lottery or the result of a performance lottery, Based on the determination, control is executed to advance the large accessory unit 2320 to above the upper horizontal frame 21263. When deciding whether to execute the control based on the result of an internal lottery, the decision based on the result of the internal lottery executed by the main CPU 721 (for example, see FIG. 49) is made by the sub CPU 731 (for example, see FIG. 49). Command is sent. In addition, when determining whether or not to execute the control by a performance lottery, the performance lottery may be executed by the sub CPU 731 or by the main CPU 721, and the result is transmitted as a command to the sub CPU 731. Also good.

When the sub CPU 731 (for example, see FIG. 49) determines to execute control to advance the large accessory unit 2320 to the upper side (outside) of the upper horizontal frame 21263, the sub CPU 731 (see FIG. 49) drives the large accessory drive mechanism 2403 by a motor (not shown). , and executes control to raise the large accessory unit 2320.

As shown in FIG. 99, when the pedestal 2633 rises until it comes into contact with the upper limit stopper 2643, the large accessory unit 2320 advances above (outside) the upper horizontal frame 21263, and the large accessory unit 2320 moves to the upper horizontal frame. The image exposed above 21263 and projected onto the large accessory 2323 can be viewed from the front above the upper horizontal frame 21263.

In this way, by performing an impactful performance such as moving the large accessory unit 2320 beyond the upper horizontal frame 21263 to the upper side (outside) of the upper horizontal frame 21263, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest. It becomes possible.

Then, when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a condition for ending the performance period of the large-sized accessory unit 2320 is satisfied), the sub CPU 731 uses a motor (not shown) to move the large-sized accessory drive mechanism 2403 in the opposite direction (large-sized accessory unit 2320). Control is executed to return the large accessory unit 2320 to the original position (the position shown in FIG. 97) by driving the object unit 2320 in the downward direction).

Note that when the large accessory unit 2320 is at the origin position (the position shown in FIG. 97), the sub CPU 731 (for example, see FIG. 49) displays a reel model imitating a Pachislot reel on the large accessory 2323 as a screen. The upper rear projector 2343 is controlled so that an image is projected. That is, the sub CPU 731 (see, for example, FIG. 49) controls the image light projected from the upper rear projector 2343 to project a changing performance of the pachi-slot reels based on the result of the internal lottery. For example, when the result of the internal lottery is a jackpot, it is preferable that an image based on the result of the internal lottery is projected on the large accessory object 2323, such as a matching number of "7" symbols is projected.

Further, as shown in FIG. 99, when the large accessory unit 2320 advances beyond the upper horizontal frame 21263 to the upper side (outside) of the upper horizontal frame 21263, the sub CPU 731 (for example, see FIG. 49) Control is performed to project an image onto the large accessory object 2323 using the image light projected from the rear projector 2343, and control to project an image onto the front screen 5123 using the image light projected from the front projector 6223. In FIG. 99, the words "Jackpot" are projected on the large accessory 2323 by the image light projected from the upper rear projector 2343, and the words "Jackpot GAME" are projected on the front by the image light projected from the front projector 6223. It is projected onto a screen 5123. In this way, when the large accessory unit 2320 advances beyond the upper horizontal frame 21263 and above the upper horizontal frame 21263, the position above the upper horizontal frame 21263 and the decorative accessory 5603 and the game It is possible to project a presentation image at both positions between the area 3203 and the area 3203, thereby providing a gaming machine capable of executing a new display presentation never seen before. However, it is not essential that the image be projected onto the front screen 5123, and therefore the front screen 5123 and the front projection device 6203 are not essential configurations.

In the fourth embodiment, the large accessory 2323 is configured as a screen, and an image is projected onto the large accessory 2323 by the image light projected from the large accessory 2323. However, the large accessory 2323 may be configured with a dot display, a 7-segment display, or a liquid crystal display, for example.

Further, although the gaming machine 3000 according to the fourth embodiment has been described using a pachinko machine as an example, it can also be applied to a pachislot instead of a pachinko machine. When applied to Pachislot, for example, reels are placed in an area corresponding to the large accessory 2323, a panel is placed in an area equivalent to the game area 3203, and the area below the large accessory 2323 or the upper area of the game area 3203 is placed. An operation unit such as a stop button is arranged in the corresponding area, and accessories, etc. are arranged in the area corresponding to the decorative accessory 5603. Alternatively, a display means such as a liquid crystal display is arranged in the area corresponding to the large accessory 2323, a mini reel, a panel, a stop button, etc. are arranged in the area corresponding to the game area 3203, and the decorative accessory 5603 is Accessories and the like are placed in the corresponding areas. In this way, when the invention according to the fourth embodiment is applied to pachislot, it is possible to operate the large accessory 2323 to a position beyond the gaming machine frame such as the cabinet or front door provided in a general pachislot. Even in this case, the same effects as the pachinko machine that is the gaming machine 3000 according to the fourth embodiment can be achieved.

The second to fourth embodiments have been described above as other embodiments, but in the second to fourth embodiments, when the large accessories 2321, 2322 or the large accessory unit 2320 rises, the corresponding Although the configuration is such that the large accessories 23212321, 2322 or the large accessory unit 2320 can advance to the upper side (outside) of the upper horizontal frames 21261, 21262, 21263, it is not limited to this. For example, in the case of a pachinko machine, accessories (limited to large ones) can be extended to positions beyond the gaming machine frame (e.g. above (outside)) such as the outer frame, main body frame, front frame, or front door that make up a general pachinko machine. In the case of a pachislot, the structure may be such that the accessories (not included) can be extended to a position (e.g. above (outside)) beyond the frame of the game machine such as the cabinet or front door that constitutes a general pachislot. (not limited to large-scale) may be configured to allow for expansion.

In addition, in the second to fourth embodiments, the large accessories 2321, 2322 or the large accessory unit 2320 are configured so that they can advance to the upper side (outside) of the upper horizontal frames 21261, 21262, 21263, For example, if the position exceeds the gaming machine frame such as the outer frame, main body frame, front frame, or front door that constitutes a general pachinko machine, not only in the vertical and horizontal directions but also in the front and rear directions of the gaming machine frame. It may be configured so that it can advance to a position beyond the direction (outside).

[15. Expandability of gaming machines according to first to fourth embodiments]
The present invention can be applied to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment in all types of gaming machines in which a game is played using game media and a benefit is awarded based on the result of the game. That is, not only is the game played by ejecting or inserting game media through the physical actions of the player, and the game media are paid out based on the result of the game, but the main control circuit 720 itself It may also be possible to electromagnetically manage game media held by a player and to enable games played by circulating enclosed game balls or games played without medals. Further, the device that electromagnetically manages the game media owned by the player may be a game media management device that is attached to (connected to) the main control circuit 720 and manages the game media.

When managed by a gaming media management device connected to the main control circuit 720, the gaming media management device is a device that has a ROM and RWM (or RAM) and is installed in the gaming machine, It is connected to a two-way communication function via a media handling device and a predetermined interface, and provides the gaming media necessary for the gaming media lending operation (i.e., when the player performs the gaming media insertion operation). operation) or the payout operation of the game media when a prize is won (the role is established) related to the payout of the game media (i.e., payout of the game media to the player and win the necessary game media) It may be possible to perform an operation of electromagnetically recording a game medium used for a game. In addition, the gaming media management device not only manages the actual number of gaming media, but also displays the number of owned gaming media on the front of the gaming machine 1 based on the management result of the number of gaming media. A media number display device (not shown) may be provided, and the number of game media displayed on this owned game media number display device may be managed. In other words, the game media management device may be capable of recording and displaying the total number of game media that can be used by a player in a game using an electromagnetic method.

In addition, in this case, the game media management device has the ability to allow the player to freely transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media to the external game media handling device, and In addition to being operated directly by a person, the number of recorded game media cannot be reduced, and an external connection terminal board (not shown) is provided between the player and an external game media handling device. In some cases, it is desirable to have the ability to allow a player to transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media except through the external connection terminal board.

In addition to the above, the gaming machine is equipped with a lending operation means, a return (payment) operation means, and an external connection terminal board that can be operated by the player, and the gaming media handling device has an input slot for valuables such as banknotes, and a recording medium. (For example, an IC card) insertion slot, a non-contact communication antenna for depositing electronic money etc. from a mobile terminal, various operation means such as lending operation means, return operation means, external connection terminal board on the side of the gaming media handling device. (both not shown).

The flow of the game at that time is, for example, when the player deposits valuable value into the gaming media handling device using one of the methods, and subtracts a predetermined number of valuable values based on the operation of one of the lending operation means described above. Then, the amount of game media corresponding to the value subtracted from the game media handling device to the game media management device is increased. The player then plays the game and repeats the above operations if more game media are required. After that, as a result of the game, a predetermined number of game media are acquired, and when the game is finished, the number of game media is transmitted from the game media management device to the game media handling device by operating one of the return operation means, and the game The medium handling device ejects the recording medium on which the number of game media is recorded. When the game media management device transmits the number of game media, it clears the number of game media stored in itself. The player takes the ejected recording medium to a prize counter or the like to exchange it for prizes, or moves the game machine to play a game based on the game medium recorded on another machine.

In the above example, all game media are sent to the game media handling device, but the game machine or game media handling device only transmits the number of game media desired by the player, and the game media owned by the player is transmitted. It is also possible to divide and process. Furthermore, instead of just ejecting the recording medium, cash or cash equivalent may be ejected, or it may be stored in a mobile terminal or the like. Further, the game media handling device may be configured to be able to insert a member recording medium of a gaming parlor, and to store the membership recording medium in the member recording medium so that it can be played again at a later date.

Further, in the gaming machine or the gaming media handling device, by operating a predetermined operation means (not shown), a locking operation for locking the data communication of gaming media or valuable value can be performed on the gaming media handling device or the gaming media management device. Good too. In this case, information that only the player can know, such as a one-time password, may be set, or the player may be recorded using an imaging means provided in the game medium handling device.

In addition, although the above describes the case where the game media management device is applied to a pachinko game machine, the game media management device can also be applied to a pachislot machine, a slot machine that uses game balls, and an enclosed game machine. A player's gaming media can also be managed.

In this way, by providing the above-mentioned game media management device, the number of parts inside the game machine can be reduced compared to the case where game media are physically used in the game, and the cost and manufacturing cost of the game machine can be reduced. Not only can players be prevented from coming into direct contact with gaming media, the gaming environment can be improved, noise can be reduced, and the power consumption of gaming machines can also be reduced by reducing the number of parts. It also happens. In addition, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts through the game media and the game media input and payout ports. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can improve various environments surrounding the gaming machine.

In addition, communication cables are used to transmit data regarding increases and decreases in gaming media due to consumption, lending, and payout of gaming media to enclosed gaming machines that are configured to allow gaming without the gaming media being ejected to the outside. When the present invention is applied to a gaming system having a gaming media management device connected to the gaming media management device so as to be able to transmit and receive optical signals via the gaming media management device, the gaming system may be configured as follows.

Below, an outline of the enclosed gaming machine will be explained. In the enclosed game machine, the firing device is located above the game area and fires game balls as game media from above into the game area. When the player operates the handle, the ball feed solenoid is driven by the payout control circuit, and the ball feed pestle pushes out the waiting game ball toward the launch pad. This moves the game ball to the launch pad. Further, a subtraction sensor is provided on the path from the standby position to the launch pad, and detects the game ball moving to the launch pad. When a game ball is detected by the subtraction sensor, the number of balls held is subtracted by 1. Since the game ball is thus configured to be launched from above as a game medium into the game area, so-called return balls (foul balls) can be avoided in the enclosed game machine. The game balls ejected from the game area after rolling in the game area are polished by a ball polishing device. The game balls polished by the ball polishing device are transported upward by the lifting device and guided to the firing device. The game balls are not discharged to the outside of the enclosed game machine, but are configured so that a certain number (for example, 50) of game balls circulate through a series of paths in the game machine.

In an enclosed type game machine, the game balls are not discharged to the outside of the game machine, so an upper tray or a lower tray for temporarily holding the game balls is not provided. In an enclosed game machine, the game balls are not discharged to the outside, so the game balls are not actually in the hands of the player, and the number of game balls does not actually increase or decrease as a result of playing a game. In an enclosed game machine, a player starts playing after acquiring balls lent from a game media management device. Here, obtaining a ball means that the player obtains game media in terms of data management. Then, by firing the game balls from the firing device, the balls held are consumed, and the number of balls held decreases. In addition, when the game balls pass through each winning hole provided in the gaming area, the number of balls is paid out in accordance with the conditions set according to the winning hole, and the number of balls held increases. Furthermore, the number of balls held increases by lending from the game media management device. Note that "consumption, lending, and payout of game media" indicates that the balls held are consumed, loaned, and paid out. Further, "increase/decrease in game media" indicates an increase/decrease in the number of balls held due to consumption, lending, and payout. Furthermore, "data regarding increases and decreases in game media due to consumption, lending, and payout of game media" is data regarding the decrease in the number of balls held due to game balls being fired and the increase in the number of balls held due to lending and payout.

The enclosed gaming machine has a payout control circuit and a touch panel type liquid crystal display device. The payout control circuit is connected to various sensors that detect when the game ball passes through each winning hole. The payout control circuit manages the number of balls held. For example, when a game ball passes through each winning hole, the number of game balls paid out due to this is added to the number of balls held. Furthermore, when a game ball is fired, the number of balls held is subtracted. The payout control circuit transmits data regarding the number of balls held to the game media management device by the player's operation. Further, the above liquid crystal display device is located at the top of the gaming machine, and accepts requests for converting the gaming value managed by the gaming media management device into balls held (renting balls) and counting balls held (returning). Then, these requests are transmitted to the payout control circuit via the game media management device, and the payout control circuit is instructed to transmit data regarding the current number of balls held to the game media management device. Here, "gaming value" refers to money/banknotes, prepaid media, tokens, electronic money, tickets, etc., which can be converted into balls by the gaming media management device. In this embodiment, the game media management device is a so-called CR unit, and is configured to be able to accept banknotes, prepaid media, and the like. Further, the counted balls can be used for exchanging prizes, etc. at a game hall where the game system is installed.

Furthermore, the enclosed gaming machine has a backup power source. As a result, even if the power is turned off at night, the data immediately before the power is turned off can be retained. Further, by using this backup power source, for example, the door opening sensor may continue to detect the opening of the door frame. This can also prevent fraudulent acts at night. In this case, information such as the number of times the door frame has been opened may be stored. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, information such as the number of times the door frame has been opened may be output to a liquid crystal display device or the like of the gaming machine.

The gaming media management device has a gaming machine connection board. The game media management device is configured to transmit and receive data (transmission signals) to and from the game machine via the game machine connection board. The transmitted and received data includes the unique ID of the CPU provided in the main control circuit, the unique ID of the CPU provided in the payout control circuit, the gaming machine manufacturer code stored in the gaming machine, the security chip manufacturer code, and the gaming machine manufacturer code stored in the gaming machine. This is information such as the model code of the machine. Then, when the transmission source transmits a transmission signal with one of the gaming machine and the gaming media management device as the transmission source and the other as the transmission destination, the transmission destination that received the transmission signal receives the same signal as the transmission signal. A confirmation signal is transmitted to the transmission source, and the transmission source compares the transmission signal and the confirmation signal to determine whether or not they are the same.

In this way, by comparing the confirmation signal sent from the destination with the transmission signal at the transmission source and determining whether they are the same, the signal transmitted from the transmission source can be prevented from being tampered with. You can confirm that the message is being sent to the sender. Thereby, fraudulent acts such as tampering with transmission/reception signals between the gaming machine and the gaming media management device can be suppressed.

Further, in the gaming system, the transmission source has a modulation section that modulates a signal, and the transmission source transmits the signal modulated by the modulation section as the transmission signal, and the transmission destination transmits the signal modulated by the modulation section. It is also possible to include a demodulation section that performs demodulation.

As a result, even if the transmission and reception signals between the gaming machine and the gaming media management device were read, it would be difficult to decipher the signals, and the transmission and reception signals between the gaming machine and the gaming media management device would be difficult to decipher. Fraudulent acts such as falsification can be suppressed.

In addition, in the gaming system, when the transmission destination receives the transmission signal from the transmission source, the transmission destination sends an approval signal, which is a signal indicating that the transmission signal has been received, separately from the confirmation signal. It may also be sent to the sender.

By comparing the transmitted signal and the confirmation signal, it is possible to not only confirm that a legitimate signal has been transmitted and received, but also to confirm that a legitimate signal has been transmitted and received based on the authorization signal. Therefore, it is possible to further strengthen the suppression of fraudulent acts.

<Additional notes>
[1st to 13th gaming machines]
BACKGROUND ART Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball is received in a starting slot, an internal lottery is performed, and an effect image is displayed on, for example, a liquid crystal display based on the result of the internal lottery. Then, if the result of the internal lottery is a jackpot, a jackpot game is executed.

This type of gaming machine has a screen sheet placed in front of the display that switches between a transparent state and a milky white state (opaque state) when the power is turned on and off, and outputs a laser beam when the screen sheet is in an opaque state. There are known gaming machines that do this (for example, see Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-200478).

(First issue)
According to the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2014-200478, by combining the image display on the screen sheet and the display on the display section, it is possible to give a visual impact to the player. there is a possibility.

However, in recent years, there has been a demand for gaming machines that can increase interest by providing performances that can give an even greater visual impact.

In order to solve the above first problem, the present invention provides a first gaming machine having the following configuration.

[First gaming machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A gaming machine comprising a lottery means (for example, a main CPU 721) for performing a lottery, and in which a game proceeds based on the result of the lottery,
A game member having a game area (for example, a game panel 300),
a rear performance member (for example, rear screen unit 290) that is arranged behind the game member and performs the performance;
a front projection means (for example, front projection device 600) that is disposed in front of the game member and can project image light toward the rear;
a front performance member (for example, a front screen 512) that is arranged in front of the game member and performs a performance that can be seen from the front using image light projected from the front projection means;
Equipped with
The front direction member is
Not only the effect projected by the image light projected from the front projection means, but also the effect performed on the rear effect member is provided with a transparent projection area (for example, a mesh sheet 5124 is pasted) that is visible from the front. It is characterized by having a certain area).

According to the game machine of (1) above, the performance performed on the rear performance member (for example, the rear screen unit 290) disposed behind the game member (for example, the game panel 300), and the performance performed on the rear performance member (for example, the rear screen unit 290) disposed in front of the game member It becomes possible to visually recognize both the performance performed on the front performance member (for example, the front screen 512) and the performance performed from the front. Moreover, since a game member having a game area is arranged between the rear performance member and the front performance member, a game using a real object rather than an image is performed between the rear performance and the front performance. That will happen. This makes it possible to provide a new gaming machine that has never existed before, and to increase interest.

Note that the "gaming member having a gaming area" corresponds to, for example, a game panel (also referred to as a game board) in the case of a pachinko machine, and corresponds to a reel in the case of a pachislot machine.

In order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides a second gaming machine having the following configuration.

[Second gaming machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A game member having a game area (for example, a game panel 300),
a rear projection means (e.g., rear projection device 120) that is disposed behind the gaming member and is capable of projecting image light projected as an image toward a forward projection area (e.g., rear screen unit 290);
A front projection means (e.g., front projection means) disposed in front of the game member and capable of projecting image light projected as an image toward a rear projection area (e.g., an area to which the mesh sheet 5124 is pasted) device 600);
Equipped with
A projection area onto which the image light projected from the rear projection means is projected and a projection area onto which the image light projected from the front projection means are projected overlap in a front view. It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the projection area (for example, rear screen unit 290) on which the image light projected from the rear projection means (for example, rear projection device 120) is projected, and the front projection means (for example, The projection area (for example, the front screen 512) onto which the image light projected from the front projection device 600) is projected overlaps in a front view. This makes it possible to perform new display effects that have never been seen before, and to increase interest.

Note that "the projection area on which the image light projected from the rear projection means is projected and the projection area on which the image light projected from the front projection means is projected overlap when viewed from the front" refers to the projection target member. may be one or two. When there is only one member to be projected, for example, an aspect may be considered in which the image light projected from the rear projection means is projected onto the back surface, and the image light projected from the front projection means is projected onto the front surface. In addition, when there are two members to be projected, for example, the members to be projected are arranged in the front and back direction, and the image light projected from the rear projection means is projected onto the member to be projected rearward, and the forward projection is performed. A mode is conceivable in which the image light projected from the means is projected onto a projection target member disposed in front.

Further, the "gaming member having a gaming area" corresponds to, for example, a game panel (also referred to as a game board) in the case of a pachinko machine, and corresponds to a reel in the case of a pachislot machine.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The game member has a transparent area,
a rear projection member (e.g., rear screen unit 290) that is disposed behind the gaming member and onto which an image is projected by the image light projected from the rear projection means;
a front projected member (for example, a front screen 512) that is disposed in front of the gaming member and onto which an image is projected by the image light projected from the front projection means;
Furthermore,
The front projected member is
Transparency that allows not only the image projected by the image light projected from the front projection means but also the image projected onto the rear projection member by the image light projected from the rear projection means to be visible in a front view. It is characterized by having a projection area (for example, an area where the reticulated sheet 5124 is pasted).

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the rear projected member (for example, rear screen unit 290) and the rear projected member (for example, front screen 512) are arranged in an area that overlaps in the front-rear direction when viewed from the front. Further, the front projection member can visually recognize not only the image projected by the image light projected from the front projection means but also the image projected on the rear projection means when viewed from the front. Furthermore, since a game member having a game area is arranged between the rear presentation member and the front presentation member, a game using a real object that is not an image is played between the rear image and the front image. That will happen. This makes it possible to provide a new gaming machine that has never existed before, and to increase interest.

In order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides a third gaming machine having the following configuration.

[Third gaming machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A game member having a game area (for example, a game panel 300),
a rear projection means (e.g., rear projection device 120) that is disposed behind the gaming member and is capable of projecting image light projected as a performance toward a front projection area (e.g., rear screen unit 290);
rear control means (for example, sub CPU 731) for controlling image light projected from the rear projection means;
a front projection unit (for example, a front projection device 600) that is disposed in front of the gaming member and is capable of projecting image light projected as a performance toward a rear projection area (for example, a front screen 512);
a front control means (for example, sub CPU 731) that controls the image light projected from the front projection means;
Equipped with
A projection area onto which the image light projected from the rear projection means is projected and a projection area onto which the image light projected from the front projection means are projected overlap in a front view. ,
The rear control means and/or the front control means,
The present invention is characterized in that control is possible so that the effect projected by the image light projected from the rear projection means and the effect projected by the image light projected from the front projection means are the same. .

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, there is a projection area (for example, the rear screen unit 290) on which the image light projected from the rear projection means (for example, the rear projection device 120) is projected, and a projection area (for example, the rear screen unit 290) on which the image light is projected from the front projection means. The projection area (for example, the front screen 512) on which the image light is projected overlaps when viewed from the front. Moreover, since a game member having a game area is arranged between the rear performance member and the front performance member, a game using a real object rather than an image is performed between the rear performance and the front performance. That will happen. This makes it possible to provide a new gaming machine that has never existed before.

Further, the same effect is performed between the effect projected by the image light projected from the rear projection means and the effect projected by the image light projected from the front projection means. Therefore, for example, even if a situation occurs in which one of the performances is not performed, it becomes possible to visually recognize the other performance, and it is possible to avoid hindering the progress of the game. Furthermore, if the optical axis of the image light projected from the front projection means can be blocked by the player's hand, for example, shadows may enter the performance projected by the image light projected from the front projection means. There is a risk that it will happen. However, even in such a case, the effect projected on the rear projection member can be visually recognized, so that it is possible to avoid hindering the progress of the game.

Note that "the projection area on which the image light projected from the rear projection means is projected and the projection area on which the image light projected from the front projection means is projected overlap when viewed from the front" refers to the projection target member. may be one or two. When there is only one member to be projected, for example, an aspect may be considered in which the image light projected from the rear projection means is projected onto the back surface, and the image light projected from the front projection means is projected onto the front surface. In addition, when there are two members to be projected, for example, the members to be projected are arranged in the front and back direction, and the image light projected from the rear projection means is projected onto the member to be projected rearward, and the forward projection is performed. A mode is conceivable in which the image light projected from the means is projected onto a projection target member disposed in front.

Moreover, the "rearward control means and/or the forward control means described in the present invention may be configured to perform an effect projected by the image light projected from the rear projection means and a performance projected by the image light projected from the front projection means. "Can be controlled so that the same effect as the effect projected is performed" means ``The rear control means can control the same effect as the effect projected by the image light projected from the front projection means. ``a mode'', ``a mode in which the front control means controls the same effect as the effect projected by the image light projected from the rear projection means'', and ``a mode in which the front control means controls both the rear control means and the front control means. This includes both modes in which a similar effect is performed between the effect projected by the image light projected from the front projection means and the effect projected by the image light projected from the rear projection means.

Note that "similar effects" preferably have the same shape, size, color, movement, etc., but any of these may be within the range that can be recognized as similar from the player's perspective. may be different.

Further, the "gaming member having a gaming area" corresponds to, for example, a game panel (also referred to as a game board) in the case of a pachinko machine, and corresponds to a reel in the case of a pachislot machine.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The game member (for example, game panel 300) has a transparent area,
a rear projection member (for example, rear screen unit 290) located behind the gaming member;
a front projected member (for example, a front screen 512) disposed in front of the gaming member;
Furthermore,
The rear projection means (for example, rear projection device 120)
Projecting image light from behind the rear projection target member toward the rear projection target member,
The front projection means (for example, front projection device 600)
It is characterized in that image light is projected from in front of the front projection target member toward the front projection target member.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the rear projected member and the rear projected member are arranged in an area overlapping in the front-rear direction when viewed from the front. In addition, the front projected member allows not only the effects projected by the image light projected from the front projection means, but also the effects projected onto the rear projection means to be viewed from the front, allowing for a new display that has never been seen before. It becomes possible to perform a performance and increase interest.

In order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides a fourth gaming machine having the following configuration.

[Fourth gaming machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A gaming machine comprising a lottery means (for example, a main CPU 721) for performing a lottery, and in which a game proceeds based on the result of the lottery,
Projection means capable of projecting image light forward (for example, rear projection device 120);
An image can be projected by the image light projected from the projection means, and one projection member (for example, lower rear screen 2904) and another projection member (for example, intermediate rear screen 2906) are connected. A projected member (for example, rear screen unit 290) having a connection part,
a game member (e.g., game panel 300) having a game area (e.g., game area 320) and arranged in front of the one projected member;
Equipped with
The game member is
The peripheral part of the game member (for example, the upper side of the game panel 300) and the connection part of the projection target member (for example, the connection part between the lower rear screen 2904 and the intermediate rear screen 2906) are approximately the same orthogonal when viewed from the front. It is characterized by being configured so that it lies on a line.

According to the game machine of (1) above, an image is projected onto a projection target member to which one projection target member (for example, lower rear screen 2904) and another projection target member (for example, intermediate rear screen 2906) are connected. Since the image is projected, the image can be projected onto a wide projection area. Moreover, the peripheral portion (for example, the upper side of the game panel 300) of the game member (for example, the game panel 300) and the connecting portion of the projected member (for example, the connecting portion between the lower rear screen 2904 and the intermediate rear screen 2906) are Since they are configured to be substantially on the same straight line when viewed from the front, it is possible to minimize the influence that may have on the image projected onto the projection target member. Note that whether or not the peripheral edge of the gaming member and the connecting part of the projected member are substantially on the same straight line when viewed from the front depends on the angle from which the player is viewed from the front, so it may be difficult to determine whether the peripheral edge of the gaming member and the connection portion of the projected member are on the same straight line when viewed from the front. It is preferable that the peripheral portion of the game member and the connecting portion of the projected member be arranged on substantially the same straight line as viewed from the player's line of sight. For example, if the player is seated facing the gaming machine and the player's line of sight looking at the side of the gaming member (the line connecting the player's eyes and the side of the gaming member) is approximately horizontal, It is sufficient that the peripheral edge of the game member and the connecting portion of the projected member are on substantially the same straight line in the substantially horizontal direction.

In addition, the "periphery of the game member" refers to the peripheral part of the game member when the game member is rectangular and the two are connected such that one projection member is positioned above the other projection member. The periphery along the top side corresponds to this. Further, when the game member is rectangular and the two are connected such that one projection member is positioned below another projection member, the peripheral edge along the lower side of the game member corresponds to the game member. Further, when the game members are rectangular and the two are connected such that the other projection member is located to the left of one projection member, the peripheral edge along the left side of the game member corresponds to the game member. Further, if the game member is rectangular and the two are connected such that the other projection member is located to the right of one projection member, the peripheral edge along the right side of the game member corresponds to the game member.

Further, the "gaming member" corresponds to, for example, a game panel (also referred to as a game board) in the case of a pachinko machine, and corresponds to the reel in the case of a pachislot machine.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The game member (for example, game panel 300) is
It is characterized in that it is configured such that an image projected onto a projected member (for example, lower rear screen 2904) placed behind the gaming member can be viewed.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, it is possible to visually recognize the video projected on the projection target member disposed behind the gaming member while viewing the gaming area.

In order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides a fifth gaming machine having the following configuration.

[Fifth gaming machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A gaming machine comprising a lottery means (for example, a main CPU 721) for performing a lottery, and in which a game proceeds based on the result of the lottery,
a first projection means (for example, first rear projector 122) capable of projecting image light;
a first projected member (for example, an upper rear screen 2902) on which an image is projected by the image light projected from the first projection means;
a second projection means (for example, second rear projector 124) capable of projecting image light;
a second projection member (for example, lower rear screen 2904), which is disposed at a position apart from the first projection member when viewed from the front, and onto which an image is projected by the image light projected from the second projection means;
a third projection member (for example, intermediate rear screen 2906) disposed between the first projection member and the second projection member;
Equipped with
One of the first projected member and the second projected member is disposed in front of the other, so that the first projected member and the second projected member are arranged in a front-back direction with respect to each other,
The third projected member is
is arranged at an angle so as to fill the gap between the first projection target member and the second projection target member,
so that the first projected member, the second projected member, and the third projected member form one display area (for example, rear screen unit 290) in which a continuous image can be projected; The third projection target member is configured to be connected to the first projection target member and the second projection target member.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the first projection member (for example, the upper rear screen 2902) on which an image is projected by the image light projected from the first projection means (for example, the first rear projector 122); , a second projection member (for example, a lower rear screen 2904), and a third projection member (for example, an intermediate rear screen 2906) disposed between the first projection member and the second projection member. Although the first projected member and the second projected member are arranged in the front-rear direction, the third projected member fills the gap between the first projected member and the second projected member. The projection member is connected to the first projection member and the second projection member and is arranged at an angle. Thereby, one display area (for example, rear screen unit 290) can be formed even though the first projected member and the second projected member are shifted in the front-back direction. As a result, while minimizing the distance between each projection means and each projected member, even if one wide display area (for example, the rear screen unit 290) is shifted in the front and back direction, a continuous image can be maintained. can be projected. For example, with LCDs that have been commonly used in the past, increasing the display area increases costs, and even if multiple LCDs are lined up, images will not be displayed at the boundaries with other LCDs. Therefore, video continuity cannot be maintained. In particular, display areas that are shifted in the front-rear direction cannot be formed using a plurality of liquid crystal displays. In this regard, according to the present invention, it is possible to project a continuous image onto one wide display area that is shifted in the front-rear direction.

Note that the "third projected member disposed between the first projected member and the second projected member" may be composed of one member, or may be composed of a plurality of members. They may also be configured by being connected.

In addition, a third projection means for projecting image light onto a third member to be projected may be provided separately from the first projection means and the second projection means, and the first projection means and/or the second projection means may be provided. The third projection target means may be projected by the image light projected from the third projection target means.

In order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides a sixth gaming machine having the following configuration.

[Sixth gaming machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A gaming machine comprising a lottery means (for example, a main CPU 721) for performing a lottery, and in which a game proceeds based on the result of the lottery,
a first projection means (for example, first rear projector 122) capable of projecting image light;
a first projected member (for example, an upper rear screen 2902) on which an image is projected by the image light projected from the first projection means;
a second projection means (for example, second rear projector 124) capable of projecting image light;
a second projection member (for example, a lower rear screen 2904), which is disposed at a position apart from the first projection member when viewed from the front, and onto which an image is projected by the image light projected from the second projection means;
a third projection member (for example, intermediate rear screen 2906) disposed between the first projection member and the second projection member;
projection control means (for example, sub CPU 731) capable of controlling image light projected from the first projection means and/or the second projection means;
Equipped with
One of the first projected member and the second projected member is disposed in front of the other, so that the first projected member and the second projected member are arranged in a front-back direction with respect to each other;
The third projected member is
is arranged at an angle so as to fill the space between the first projection target member and the second projection target member,
so that the first projected member, the second projected member, and the third projected member form one display area (for example, rear screen unit 290) in which a continuous image can be projected; The third projected member is configured to be connected to the first projected member and the second projected member,
The projection control means
Collaborative projection control for controlling such that one continuous image is projected onto the one display area configured by the first projection target member, the second projection target member, and the third projection target member. means and
It is characterized by comprising an independent projection control means for controlling so that different images are projected on the first projection target member and the second projection target member.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the first projection member (for example, the upper rear screen 2902) on which an image is projected by the image light projected from the first projection means (for example, the first rear projector 122); , a second projection member (for example, a lower rear screen 2904), and a third projection member (for example, an intermediate rear screen 2906) disposed between the first projection member and the second projection member. Although the first projected member and the second projected member are arranged in the front-rear direction, the third projected member fills the gap between the first projected member and the second projected member. The projection member is connected to the first projection member and the second projection member and is arranged at an angle. Thereby, one display area (for example, rear screen unit 290) can be formed even though the first projected member and the second projected member are shifted in the front-back direction. As a result, while minimizing the distance between each projection means and each projected member, even if one wide display area (for example, the rear screen unit 290) is shifted in the front and back direction, a continuous image can be maintained. can be projected. For example, with LCDs that have been commonly used in the past, increasing the display area increases costs, and even if multiple LCDs are lined up, images will not be displayed at the boundaries with other LCDs. Therefore, video continuity cannot be maintained. In particular, display areas that are shifted in the front-rear direction cannot be formed using a plurality of liquid crystal displays. In this regard, according to the present invention, it is possible to project a continuous image onto one wide display area that is shifted in the front-rear direction. Furthermore, a mode in which one continuous image is projected onto one display area constituted by a first projected member, a second projected member, and a third projected member; The manner in which different images are projected on the two projected members can also be changed depending on, for example, the gaming state.

Note that the "third projected member disposed between the first projected member and the second projected member" may be composed of one member, or may be composed of a plurality of members. They may also be configured by being connected.

In addition, a third projection means for projecting image light onto a third member to be projected may be provided separately from the first projection means and the second projection means, and the first projection means and/or the second projection means may be provided. The third projection target means may be projected by the image light projected from the third projection target means.

In order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides a seventh gaming machine having the following configuration.

[Seventh gaming machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A gaming machine comprising a lottery means (for example, a main CPU 721) for performing a lottery, and in which a game proceeds based on the result of the lottery,
a first projection means (for example, first rear projector 122) capable of projecting image light;
a first projected member (for example, an upper rear screen 2902) on which an image is projected by the image light projected from the first projection means;
a second projection means (for example, second rear projector 124) capable of projecting image light;
A second projection means is arranged such that an image is projected by the image light projected from the second projection means, and the image is projected onto a different area in front view from the image projected onto the first projection member. A projected member (for example, lower rear screen 2904),
Equipped with
The first projected member is
It is characterized in that it is arranged behind the second projection member in such a manner that a space (for example, a performance space 700) is formed in front of the first projection member.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the first projection member (for example, the upper rear screen 2902) and the second projection means (for example, the lower rear screen 2904) project images in different areas when viewed from the front. They are placed so that they are offset. Further, the first projection member is arranged behind the second projection member in such a manner that a space (for example, a production space 700) is formed in front of the first projection member. This makes it possible to provide a gaming machine with expandability, such as performing various effects using the space formed in front of the first projection member.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The first projection target member (for example, the first rear projector 122) and the second projection target member (for example, the lower rear screen 2904) form one display area (for example, the lower rear screen 2904) that can project a continuous image. For example, it is characterized in that it is configured to be connected to form a rear screen unit 290).

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the first projected member (for example, the upper rear screen 2902) on which an image is projected by the image light projected from the first projection means (for example, the first rear projector 122); , and a second projection member (for example, the lower rear screen 2904) on which an image is projected by the image light projected from the second projection means (for example, the second rear projector 124). For example, with conventional LCD displays, although it is possible to create a space in front of a single LCD display by arranging multiple LCD displays in the front-rear direction, it is possible to cannot be projected. In this regard, according to the present invention, while minimizing the distance between each projection means and each projected member and projecting a continuous image onto one wide display area, This makes it possible to provide a gaming machine with excellent performance.

In addition, "a first projection member on which an image is projected by the image light projected from the first projection means and a second projection member on which the image is projected by the image light projected from the second projection means are connected" "Configured" does not mean that the first projected member and the second projected member are directly connected, but also that the first projected member and the second projected member are indirectly connected (e.g. Another projection member may be sandwiched between the first projection member and the second projection member.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
It has a game area (for example, the game area 320) and is arranged in front of the second projection member (for example, the lower rear screen 2904) in such a manner that the image projected on the second projection member can be viewed. The present invention is characterized in that it further includes a game member (for example, a game panel 300).

According to the game machine of (3) above, both the game in the game area (for example, the game area 320) and the image projected on the second projected member (for example, the lower rear screen 2904) can be visually recognized. Furthermore, it is possible to perform performances using the space (for example, the performance space 700) in front of the first projection member (for example, the upper rear screen 2902), and it is possible to provide a gaming machine with further expandability. It becomes possible.

Note that the "game component" corresponds to, for example, a game panel (also referred to as a game board) in the case of a pachinko machine, and corresponds to the reel in the case of a pachi-slot machine.

In order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides an eighth gaming machine having the following configuration.

[Eighth gaming machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A gaming machine comprising a lottery means (for example, a main CPU 721) for performing a lottery, and in which a game proceeds based on the result of the lottery,
A game member having a game area (for example, a game panel 300),
a rear performance member (for example, rear screen unit 290) that is arranged behind the game member and performs the performance;
a front projection means (for example, front projection device 600) that is disposed in front of the game member and can project image light toward the rear;
a front performance member (for example, a front screen 512) that is arranged in front of the game member and performs a performance that can be seen from the front using image light projected from the front projection means;
A movable accessory configured to be operable (for example, large accessory main body part 230);
Equipped with
The front direction member is
Not only the effect projected by the image light projected from the front projection means but also the effect projected onto the rear effect member is provided in a transparent projection area (for example, a mesh sheet 5124 is pasted) that is visible from the front. area),
The movable accessory is
Based on the result of the lottery, the present invention is characterized in that it is configured to be able to advance into a space between the performance performed in the front performance member and the performance performed in the rear performance member (for example, a performance space).

According to the game machine of (1) above, the performance performed on the rear performance member (for example, the rear screen unit 290) disposed behind the game member (for example, the game panel 300), and the performance performed on the rear performance member (for example, the rear screen unit 290) disposed in front of the game member It becomes possible to visually recognize both the performance performed on the front performance member (for example, the front screen 512) and the performance performed from the front. Furthermore, based on the results of the lottery, a movable accessory (such as a large-sized Since the accessory main body part 230) is configured to move forward, it becomes possible to perform a new performance that has never been seen before, and it becomes possible to further increase interest.

Note that the "gaming member having a gaming area" corresponds to, for example, a game panel (also referred to as a game board) in the case of a pachinko machine, and corresponds to a reel in the case of a pachislot machine.

In order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides a ninth gaming machine having the following configuration.

[Ninth gaming machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A gaming machine comprising a lottery means (for example, a sub CPU 731) for performing a lottery, and in which a game proceeds based on the result of the lottery,
A game member (for example, a game panel 300) having a game area (for example, a game area 320);
a frame-shaped member (for example, a front door unit 500) that is arranged in front of the gaming member and is formed with an opening window (for example, an opening window 5002) that makes the gaming area visible;
Equipped with
The frame-shaped member is
a display means (for example, a front screen 512) that is disposed in the opening window and displays an effect image based on the lottery result in a manner that allows the gaming area to be viewed from the front;
A decorative movable accessory (for example, a decorative figure) is disposed above the display means, is movable toward the front of the display means based on the result of the lottery, and has decorations indicating information related to the gaming machine. thing 560) and
a firing operation means (for example, a firing handle 588) capable of firing game media toward the game area below the display means;
It is characterized by having the following.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the display means (for example, the front screen 512) on which the performance image based on the result of the lottery is displayed is connected to the opening window (for example, the opening of the frame member (for example, the front door unit 500)). window 5002), and a decorative movable accessory (for example, a decorative accessory 560) that performs an accessory effect that operates toward the front position of the display means based on the lottery result is arranged above the display means. has been done. The above-mentioned display means and decorative movable accessory correspond to, for example, a movable accessory placed above the liquid crystal display and the center accessory in a conventional gaming machine, respectively. That is, in the present invention, both the effect image based on the lottery result and the effect effect in which a movable decorative object operates toward the front of the display means are positioned closer to the player than in conventional gaming machines. It will be carried out. Further, a firing operation means (for example, firing handle 588) that can fire the game medium toward the game area is arranged in the frame member below the display means. Therefore, the player who plays the game in the game machine of the present invention can feel as if he or she is firing a game ball from the firing handle located below the game board in a conventional pachinko machine. , it becomes possible to provide a novel gaming machine that has never existed before.

Note that the "gaming member having a gaming area" corresponds to, for example, a game panel (also referred to as a game board) in the case of a pachinko machine, and corresponds to a reel in the case of a pachislot machine.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The frame member (for example, front door unit 500) is
It has a projection means (e.g., front projection device 600) that projects image light toward the display means (e.g., front screen 512), and
The display means is
It has a projection area (for example, an area to which a mesh sheet 5124 is pasted) on which an image as the effect image is projected by projecting image light from the projection means,
The projection area is
It is characterized in that it is a transparent projection member (for example, a front screen 512) that allows viewing both the video as the performance image and the gaming area behind the display means from the front.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the display means (for example, the front screen 512) disposed in the opening window (for example, the opening window 5002) of the frame member (for example, the front door unit 500) displays the effect image as a Since both the video image and the gaming area behind the display means (for example, the gaming area 320) can be viewed from the front, it is possible to suitably provide an unprecedented and innovative gaming machine. .

In order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides a tenth gaming machine having the following configuration.

[10th gaming machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A gaming machine comprising a lottery means (for example, a sub CPU 731) for performing a lottery, and in which a game proceeds based on the result of the lottery,
a first projection means (for example, first rear projector 122) capable of projecting image light;
a first projected member (for example, an upper rear screen 2902) on which an image is projected by the image light projected from the first projection means;
a second projection means (for example, second rear projector 124) capable of projecting image light;
A second projection means is arranged such that an image is projected by the image light projected from the second projection means, and the image is projected onto a different area in front view from the image projected onto the first projection member. A projected member (for example, lower rear screen 2904),
A game member (for example, a game panel 300) that has a game area (for example, a game area 320) and is arranged in front of the second projection member in a manner that allows the image projected on the second projection member to be viewed. )and,
A movable accessory configured to be operable (for example, large accessory main body part 230);
Equipped with
The first projected member is
It is arranged behind the second projection member in such a manner that a space (for example, a production space 700) is formed above the game member and the second projection member,
The movable accessory is
It is characterized in that it is configured to be able to advance into the space formed above the game member and the second projection member based on the result of the lottery.

According to the game machine of (1) above, the first projected member (for example, upper rear screen 2902) and the second projected member (for example, lower rear screen 2904) project images in different areas when viewed from the front. They are placed offset so that they are projected. Then, the first projection member creates a space (for example, production space 700) above the game member (for example, the game panel 300) and the second projection member (that is, in front of the first projection member). The projection member is arranged rearward than the second projection member in the manner in which it is formed. A movable accessory (eg, large accessory 232) is configured to be able to advance into a space formed above the gaming member and the second projected member based on the result of the lottery. Thereby, an image can be projected onto a wide area by the first projection target member and the second projection target member. Moreover, it is possible to execute a game with expandability in which both the game in the game area and the image projected on the first projected member and the second projected member can be visually recognized, and the game in the game area and the image projected on the second projected member can be executed. While maintaining visibility with the image projected on the projection target member, it is now possible to perform a new type of performance using movable objects, making it possible to create a new type of performance that has never been seen before, thereby increasing interest. Become.

Note that the "game component" corresponds to, for example, a game panel (also referred to as a game board) in the case of a pachinko machine, and corresponds to the reel in the case of a pachi-slot machine.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The first projected member (e.g., upper rear screen 2902) and the second projected member (e.g., lower rear screen 2904) form one display area (e.g., , rear screen unit 290).

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the first projected member (for example, the upper rear screen 2902) on which an image is projected by the image light projected from the first projection means (for example, the first rear projector 122); , and a second projection member (for example, the lower rear screen 2904) on which an image is projected by the image light projected from the second projection means (for example, the second rear projector 124). For example, with conventional LCD displays, although it is possible to create a space in front of a single LCD display by arranging multiple LCD displays in the front-rear direction, it is possible to cannot be projected. In this regard, according to the present invention, a movable accessory (for example, large accessory 232) is placed in a space (for example, production space 700) formed above the game member (for example, game panel 300) and the second projected member. When the projector does not advance, it is possible to minimize the distance between each projection means and each projected member and project a continuous image onto one wide display area.

In addition, "a first projection member on which an image is projected by the image light projected from the first projection means and a second projection member on which the image is projected by the image light projected from the second projection means are connected" "Configured" does not mean that the first projected member and the second projected member are directly connected, but also that the first projected member and the second projected member are indirectly connected (e.g. Another projection member may be sandwiched between the first projection member and the second projection member.

In order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides an eleventh gaming machine having the following configuration.

[Eleventh gaming machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A gaming machine comprising a lottery means (for example, a sub CPU 731) for performing a lottery, and in which a game proceeds based on the result of the lottery,
A front door member (for example, a front door member) having a forwardly projecting projecting portion (e.g., projecting portion 5520), and a projection means (e.g., front projection device 600) capable of projecting a predetermined image light is disposed on the projecting portion ( For example, the front decorative frame 550),
a projected member (for example, a front screen 512) on which an image is projected by the image light projected from the projection means;
Equipped with
The projecting portion of the front door member includes an operable movable accessory (for example, a decorative accessory 560);
a drive mechanism (for example, a decorative accessory drive mechanism 570) capable of operating only the movable accessory among the projection means and the movable accessory;
It is characterized by the fact that it is located at

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the projection means (for example, the front projection device 600) disposed on the overhang part (for example, the overhang part 5520) of the front door member (for example, the front decorative frame 550) projects images. In addition to projecting an image onto a projected member (for example, the front screen 512) using the image light, a movable accessory (for example, a decorative accessory 560) that can be operated based on the lottery result is displayed on the front door member. Since it is provided on the overhang part of the screen, it is possible to perform new performances that have never been seen before. In particular, with regard to movable accessories, it is possible to perform an accessory effect in which the movable accessories are operated at a position closer to the player than in the past. By the way, the projection means and the movable accessory are arranged on the projecting part of the front door member, but in order to properly project the image onto the projection means, it is necessary to move the projection means regardless of the operation of the movable accessory. must be fixed at all times. Therefore, by providing a drive mechanism (for example, a decorative accessory drive mechanism 570) that can operate only the movable accessory among the projection means and the movable accessory arranged on the projecting part of the front door member, It becomes possible to advance the movable accessory toward the front position of the projected member (for example, the upper rear screen 2902) while a clear image is being projected, and it is possible to suitably create new performances that have never been seen before. , it becomes possible to do so.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
Further comprising a game member (for example, a game panel 300) having a game area (for example, a game area 320) behind the front door member (for example, the front decorative frame 550),
An opening window (for example, opening window 5002) is formed in the front door member so that the gaming area can be viewed from the front, and
The projection member (for example, the front screen 512) is supported by the opening window,
Furthermore, the projection target member is
The projector is characterized in that it is a transparent projection member that can not only project the image using the image light projected from the projection means, but also allow the gaming area at the rear to be viewed from the front.

Note that the "gaming member having a gaming area" corresponds to, for example, a game panel (also referred to as a game board) in the case of a pachinko machine, and corresponds to a reel in the case of a pachislot machine.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the accessory performance using the image and the movable accessory (for example, the decorative accessory 560) is performed at a position closer to the player than in the past, such as the front door member (for example, the front decorative frame 550). It is possible to do both, and it becomes possible to increase interest. Moreover, since the projected member (for example, the front screen 512) can see not only the image projected by the image light projected from the projection means but also the rear gaming area (for example, the gaming area 320) when viewed from the front. , it becomes possible to further increase interest.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
Further comprising a rear display means (for example, rear screen unit 290) arranged behind the game member (for example, the game area 320) and on which images are projected,
The game member is characterized in that it is configured such that an image displayed on the rear display means can be viewed from the front.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, the projection means (for example, the front projection device 600) disposed on the overhang part (for example, the overhang part 5520) of the front door member (for example, the front decorative frame 550) projects images. Both the image projected by the image light and the image projected on the rear display means (for example, the rear screen unit 290) can be viewed from the front, and a movable accessory (for example, , large-sized ornaments 232) are performed, making it possible to further enhance the interest.

In addition, the "rear display means on which an image is projected" described in the present invention is not limited to a specific part or member as long as an image is projected, and is not limited to any specific part or member, but may include any image projected from the projection means. It may be a projection member onto which an image is projected using light, or a display such as a liquid crystal display, a dot display, or a segment display.

In order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides a twelfth gaming machine having the following configuration.

[12th gaming machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A gaming machine comprising a lottery means (for example, a sub CPU 731) for performing a lottery, and in which a game proceeds based on the result of the lottery,
A front door member (for example, a front door member) having a forwardly projecting projecting portion (e.g., projecting portion 5520), and a projection means (e.g., front projection device 600) capable of projecting a predetermined image light is disposed on the projecting portion ( For example, the front decorative frame 550),
a projected member (for example, a front screen 512) on which a performance is projected by the image light projected from the projection means;
Equipped with
The projecting portion of the front door member includes:
The projection means includes a projection means (e.g., front projector 622) that projects image light forward, and a reflection means (e.g., front mirror 624),
an operable movable accessory (for example, a decorative accessory 560);
a drive mechanism (for example, a decorative accessory drive mechanism 570) capable of operating only the movable accessory among the projection means, the reflection means, and the movable accessory;
is located,
The reflecting means is
The movable accessory has an exposed part that is exposed when the movable accessory is activated, and the exposed part has a decorative part that is decorated.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the projection means (for example, the front projection device 600) disposed on the overhang part (for example, the overhang part 5520) of the front door member (for example, the front decorative frame 550) projects images. In addition to projecting the effect onto the projected member (for example, the front screen 512) using the image light, an operable movable accessory (for example, the decorative accessory 560) is provided on the projecting portion of the front door member. This makes it possible to perform new performances that have never been seen before. In particular, with regard to movable accessories, it is possible to perform an accessory effect in which the movable accessories are operated at a position closer to the player than in the past. In addition, a projection means (for example, the front projection device 600) and a movable accessory are arranged on the projecting part of the front door member, but in order to properly project the effect onto the projected member, it is necessary to The projection means (for example, front projector 622) and the reflection means (for example, front mirror 624) need to be fixed at all times regardless of the operation of the object. Therefore, a drive mechanism (for example, a decorative accessory drive mechanism 570) that can operate only the movable accessory among the projection means, the reflection means, and the movable accessory arranged on the projecting part of the front door member is provided. That's what I do. By the way, when only the movable accessory among the projection means, the reflection means, and the movable accessory is activated, the reflection means arranged behind the movable accessory will be exposed. Therefore, in the present invention, the exposed portion of the reflecting means that is exposed when the movable accessory is activated is provided with a decorated portion. Thereby, it becomes possible to suitably perform a new performance that has never been seen before while ensuring the aesthetic appearance when the movable accessory is activated.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
Further comprising a game member (for example, a game panel 300) having a game area (for example, a game area 320) behind the front door member (for example, the front decorative frame 550),
An opening window (for example, opening window 5002) is formed in the front door member so that the gaming area can be viewed from the front, and
The projection target member (for example, the front screen 512) is supported by the opening window,
Furthermore, the projection target member is
The projector is characterized in that it is a transparent projection member that can not only project the performance using the image light projected from the projection means, but also allow the gaming area at the rear to be viewed from the front.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, it is possible to perform both the performance and the performance using the movable accessory at a position closer to the player than in the past, such as the front door member (for example, the front decorative frame 550), It is possible to increase interest. Moreover, the projected member (for example, the front screen 512) is not limited to the production projected by the image light projected from the projection means (for example, the front projection device 600), but also the rear game area (for example, the game area 320). This can also be seen from the front, making it even more interesting.

Note that the "gaming member having a gaming area" corresponds to, for example, a game panel (also referred to as a game board) in the case of a pachinko machine, and corresponds to a reel in the case of a pachislot machine.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
Further comprising a rear display means (for example, rear screen unit 290) arranged behind the game member (for example, the game area 320) and on which an effect is performed,
The game member is characterized in that it is configured such that the performance performed on the rear display means can be viewed from the front.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, the projection means (for example, the front projection device 600) disposed on the overhang part (for example, the overhang part 5520) of the front door member (for example, the front decorative frame 550) projects images. While being able to visually recognize both the performance projected by the image light and the performance performed on the rear display means (for example, rear screen unit 290) from the front, movable accessories (for example, Since the accessory effect is performed using the ornamental accessory 560), it is possible to further enhance the interest.

Note that the "rear display means for performing effects" described in the present invention is not limited to specific parts or members as long as effects are performed; It may be a projected member on which an effect is performed, or a display such as a liquid crystal display, a dot display, or a segment display.

In order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides a thirteenth gaming machine having the following configuration.

[13th gaming machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A gaming machine comprising a lottery means (for example, a sub CPU 731) for performing a lottery, and in which a game proceeds based on the result of the lottery,
A front door member (for example, a front door member) having a forwardly projecting projecting portion (e.g., projecting portion 5520), and a projection means (e.g., front projection device 600) capable of projecting a predetermined image light is disposed on the projecting portion ( For example, the front decorative frame 550),
a projected member (for example, a front screen 512) on which an effect is projected by the image light projected from the projection means;
Equipped with
The projecting portion of the front door member includes:
The projection means includes a projection means (e.g., front projector 622) that projects image light forward, and a reflection means (e.g., front mirror 624),
a movable accessory (for example, a decorative accessory 560) that can be activated based on the result of the internal lottery;
a drive mechanism (for example, a decorative accessory drive mechanism 570) capable of operating only the movable accessory among the projection means, the reflection means, and the movable accessory;
is located,
The reflecting means is
The movable accessory has an exposed part that is exposed when it is activated, and the exposed part has a decorative part decorated with decoration,
In the decorative part,
It is characterized by being decorated to form a predetermined shape together with the movable accessory.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the projection means (for example, the front projection device 600) disposed on the overhang part (for example, the overhang part 5520) of the front door member (for example, the front decorative frame 550) projects images. In addition to projecting the effect onto the projected member (for example, the front screen 512) using the image light, an operable movable accessory (for example, the decorative accessory 560) is provided on the projecting portion of the front door member. This makes it possible to perform new performances that have never been seen before. In particular, with regard to movable accessories, it is possible to perform an accessory effect in which the movable accessories are operated at a position closer to the player than in the past. In addition, although a projection means and a movable accessory are arranged on the projecting part of the front door member, in order to properly project the effect onto the projection means, it is necessary to (eg, front projector 622) and reflecting means (eg, front mirror 624) need to be fixed at all times. Therefore, a drive mechanism (for example, a decorative accessory drive mechanism 570) that can operate only the movable accessory among the projection means, the reflection means, and the movable accessory arranged on the projecting part of the front door member is provided. That's what I do. By the way, when only the movable accessory among the projection means, the reflection means, and the movable accessory is activated, the reflection means arranged behind the movable accessory will be exposed. Therefore, in the present invention, the exposed portion of the reflecting means that is exposed when the movable accessory is activated has a decorative portion decorated with decoration. Thereby, it becomes possible to suitably perform a new performance that has never been seen before while ensuring the aesthetic appearance when the movable accessory is activated. Moreover, since the decorative part is decorated to form a predetermined form together with the movable accessory, the movable accessory operates in a predetermined form that is not visible to the player before the movable accessory is activated. This makes it possible to visually recognize the content, making it even more interesting.

Note that the "predetermined form" corresponds to, for example, a specific character, a specific logo, or the like.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
Further comprising a game member (for example, a game panel 300) having a game area (for example, a game area 320) behind the front door member (for example, the front decorative frame 550),
An opening window (for example, opening window 5002) is formed in the front door member so that the gaming area can be viewed from the front, and
The projection target member (for example, the front screen 512) is supported by the opening window,
Furthermore, the projection target member is
The projector is characterized in that it is a transparent projection member that can not only project the performance using the image light projected from the projection means, but also allow the gaming area at the rear to be viewed from the front.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, it is possible to perform both the performance and the performance using the movable accessory at a position closer to the player than in the past, such as the front door member (for example, the front decorative frame 550), It is possible to increase interest. Moreover, the projected member (for example, the front screen 512) is not limited to the production projected by the image light projected from the projection means (for example, the front projection device 600), but also the rear game area (for example, the game area 320). This can also be seen from the front, making it even more interesting.

Note that the "gaming member having a gaming area" corresponds to, for example, a game panel (also referred to as a game board) in the case of a pachinko machine, and corresponds to a reel in the case of a pachislot machine.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
Further comprising a rear display means (for example, a rear screen unit 290) that is arranged behind the game member (for example, the game area 320) and performs an effect,
The game member is characterized in that it is configured such that the performance performed on the rear display means can be visually recognized when viewed from the front.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, the projection means (for example, the front projection device 600) disposed on the overhang part (for example, the overhang part 5520) of the front door member (for example, the front decorative frame 550) projects images. While being able to visually recognize both the performance projected by the image light and the performance performed on the rear display means (for example, rear screen unit 290) from the front, movable accessories (for example, Since the accessory effect is performed using the ornamental accessory 560), it is possible to further enhance the interest.

It should be noted that the "rear display means" described in any of the first to thirteenth gaming machines of the present invention having the above configuration is not limited to specific parts or members as long as the performance is performed. Instead, it may be a projected member on which effects are performed using image light projected from a projection means, or a display such as a liquid crystal display, a dot display, or a segment display. In addition, regarding the "front presentation member", if it is a device that displays (including projection) an image in a manner that makes the rear visible, such as a transmissive liquid crystal, the image light projected from the projection means (e.g., a projector) The present invention is not limited to, for example, a projected member (for example, a screen) on which an image is projected.

According to the first to thirteenth gaming machines of the present invention having the above configurations, it is possible to provide gaming machines that can increase interest.

[14th to 18th gaming machines]
BACKGROUND ART Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball is received in a starting slot, an internal lottery is performed, and an effect image is displayed on, for example, a liquid crystal display based on the result of the internal lottery. Then, if the result of the internal lottery is a jackpot, a jackpot game is executed.

As a gaming machine of this kind, there is a gaming machine in which, based on the result of an internal lottery, for example, a movable accessory appears in front of the liquid crystal display, making people look forward to the result of the internal lottery (for example, , see Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2015-092885).

(Second issue)
When a movable accessory effect is performed in which a movable accessory advances to the front of the liquid crystal display, as in the game machine described in the above-mentioned Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2015-092885, players can have expectations.

However, in recent years, there has been a desire for a gaming machine that can increase interest by providing a performance that can give an even greater impact.

In order to solve the second problem, the present invention provides a fourteenth gaming machine having the following configuration.

[14th gaming machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A gaming machine comprising a lottery means (for example, a main CPU 721) for performing a lottery, and in which a game proceeds based on the result of the lottery,
A main object (for example, a large accessory 232) having a storage space (for example, a storage space 2324) at the rear,
a first rear accessory (e.g., front light guide plate 234) disposed behind the main character and facing the main character;
A first drive mechanism (for example, a front light guide plate rotation drive mechanism 2340,
a second rear accessory (for example, the rear light guide plate 236) located further rear than the first rear accessory;
A second drive mechanism (for example, a rear light guide plate rotation drive mechanism) that is arranged behind the second rear accessory and can operate the second rear accessory behind the first rear accessory. 2360) and
Equipped with
The first drive mechanism is
It is arranged in the storage space on the back side of the main character, and is configured to be able to rotate the first rear accessory behind the main character,
The second drive mechanism is
The second rear accessory is configured to be able to operate the second rear accessory to perform a movement different from that of the first rear accessory.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the first drive mechanism (for example, the front light guide plate rotation drive mechanism 2340) that can operate the first rear accessory (for example, the front light guide plate 234) is It is arranged in front of the accessory, and is also arranged in a storage space (e.g., storage space 2324) on the back side of the main object (for example, large-sized accessory 232), and the first rear accessory is located behind the main object. It is configured so that it can be rotated. Further, the rear light guide plate rotation drive mechanism 2360 that can operate the second rear accessory (for example, the rear light guide plate 236) is disposed rearward than the second rear accessory. The object is configured to be able to be operated behind the first rear accessory object so as to perform a movement different from that of the first rear accessory object. Therefore, the first rear accessory is brought close to the main character so that it rotates behind the main character, and the second rear accessory is brought close to the first rear accessory so that it moves differently from the first rear accessory. As a result, the main object can be made to look larger while being compact in the front-rear direction, and a movement that emphasizes the main object can be performed. Furthermore, even if the main object is stationary or making only small movements, it is possible to make it appear as if the main object is moving more than it actually is. In conventional game machines, when the main character is enlarged, it becomes difficult to perform a role effect that gives movement to the main character, but according to the present invention, in addition to being able to emphasize the main character, It becomes possible to perform an effective performance of a role character that makes it appear as if the main character is making larger movements than the actual movement.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The main character (for example, the large accessory 232) has a flat rear side, and
The first rear accessory (for example, front light guide plate 234) and the second rear accessory (for example, rear light guide plate 236) are both plate-shaped members,
A plane formed on the rear side of the main character and the first character are close to each other and face each other,
The first accessory and the second accessory are configured to face each other in close proximity.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the main character object (for example, the large-sized accessory object 232) has a flat rear side, and the first rear accessory object (for example, the front light guide plate 234) and the second rear object (for example, the front light guide plate 234) The rear accessories (for example, the rear light guide plate 236) are all plate-shaped members, and the plane formed on the rear side of the main character and the first accessory closely face each other, and the first accessory and the first accessory are close to each other and face each other. Since the dual role objects are configured to face each other in close proximity, the front and back direction can be made even more compact. Moreover, since the front light guide plate 234 and the rear light guide plate 236 operate at positions closer to the main object, it is possible to make the main object appear even larger.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
The rear accessory (for example, the front light guide plate 234, the rear light guide plate 236) is
It is configured so that it can emit light toward the front, and
It is characterized by having a substantially similar shape that is larger than the main object (for example, the large accessory 232) when viewed from the front.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, since the rear accessory objects (for example, the front light guide plate 234, the rear light guide plate 236) are configured to be able to emit light toward the front, the main object (for example, the large accessory object) By rotating behind the main object while facing 232), combined with the afterimage of the light emitted from the rear object, the main object can be made to look even larger and the actual movement of the main object can be visualized. This makes it possible to make it appear as if a larger movement is being made. Moreover, since the rear accessory has a substantially similar shape that is larger than the main character when viewed from the front, it is possible to emphasize the main character itself and make it difficult to make the viewer aware of the existence of the rear accessory as a separate member.

In order to solve the second problem, the present invention provides a fifteenth gaming machine having the following configuration.

[15th gaming machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A lottery means (for example, main CPU 721) that performs a lottery,
a movable accessory (for example, large accessory main body part 230) configured to be operable based on the result of the internal lottery;
A gaming machine in which a game proceeds based on the result of the lottery,
The movable accessory is
It has a main character (e.g., large-sized accessory 232) and a rear accessory (e.g., front light guide plate 234, rear light guide plate 236) arranged behind the main character to face the main character,
The rear accessory is
It is characterized in that it is configured to face the main character and to be rotatable while performing linear movement behind the main character.

According to the game machine of (1) above, the rear accessory (for example, the front light guide plate 234, the rear light guide plate 236) placed behind the main character (for example, the large accessory 232) is connected to the main character. It faces the main object and is configured to be rotatable while moving linearly behind the main object, making it possible to emphasize the main object. Even in such a case, it is possible to make it appear as if the main character is moving more than the actual movement. In conventional game machines, when the main character is enlarged, it becomes difficult to perform a role effect that gives movement to the main character, but according to the present invention, in addition to being able to emphasize the main character, It becomes possible to perform an effective performance of a role character that makes it appear as if the main character is making larger movements than the actual movement.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The rear accessory (for example, the front light guide plate 234, the rear light guide plate 236) is
A first rear accessory (for example, front light guide plate 234),
a second rear accessory (for example, the rear light guide plate 236) that is arranged behind the first rear accessory, facing the first rear accessory;
has
The first rear accessory and the second rear accessory are configured to be operable in a manner that both can be visually recognized when viewed from the front.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the first rear accessory (for example, the front light guide plate 234) and the second rear accessory (for example, the rear accessory) arranged behind the first rear accessory Since the side light guide plates 236) can be operated in a manner that allows them to be seen when viewed from the front, it is possible to further emphasize the main object or to make it appear as if the main object is making a larger movement than the actual movement of the main object. It becomes possible to show the

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
The rear accessory (for example, the front light guide plate 234, the rear light guide plate 236) is
It is configured so that it can emit light toward the front, and
It is characterized by having a substantially similar shape that is larger than the main character when viewed from the front.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, since the rear accessory objects (for example, the front light guide plate 234, the rear light guide plate 236) are configured to be able to emit light toward the front, the main object (for example, the large accessory object) 232) and rotate it while moving in a straight line behind the main object, and together with the afterimage of the light emitted from the rear object, it can make the main object appear even larger. , it is possible to make it appear as if the main character is making larger movements than they actually are. Moreover, since the rear accessory has a substantially similar shape that is larger than the main character when viewed from the front, it is possible to emphasize the main character itself and make it difficult to make the viewer aware of the existence of the rear accessory as a separate member.

In order to solve the second problem, the present invention provides a sixteenth gaming machine having the following configuration.

[16th gaming machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A gaming machine comprising a lottery means (for example, a main CPU 721) for performing a lottery, and in which a game proceeds based on the result of the lottery,
A movable accessory configured to be operable (for example, large accessory main body part 230);
a drive mechanism capable of operating the movable accessory (for example, large accessory left drive mechanism 240, large accessory right drive mechanism 260);
a movable control means (for example, sub CPU 731) that controls the drive of the drive mechanism;
Equipped with
The movable accessory is
A main character (for example, a large character 232),
It has a rear accessory (for example, a front light guide plate 234, a rear light guide plate 236) that is arranged behind the main character and facing the main character,
The drive mechanism is
a rotation mechanism (for example, a front light guide plate rotation drive mechanism 2340, a rear light guide plate rotation drive mechanism 2360) capable of rotating the rear accessory behind the main character while facing the main character; ,
a linear motion mechanism (e.g., light guide plate vertical drive mechanism 239, light guide plate vertical drive mechanism 270) capable of linearly operating the rear accessory behind the main character while facing the main character;
has
The movable control means (for example, sub CPU 731)
By driving both the rotating mechanism and the linear motion mechanism, it is possible to perform a movement of the rear accessory that combines rotation and linear movement behind the main character. do.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the rear accessory (for example, the front light guide plate 234, the rear light guide plate 236) arranged behind the main character (for example, the large accessory 232) is placed opposite to the main character. Since it is possible to achieve both a rotating movement behind the main character while facing the main character, and a linear movement behind the main character while facing the main character, the main character can be emphasized, and the main character can be Even if the object is stationary or making only small movements, it is possible to make it appear as if the main object is moving more than the actual movement. In conventional game machines, when the main character is enlarged, it becomes difficult to perform a role effect that gives movement to the main character, but according to the present invention, in addition to being able to emphasize the main character, It becomes possible to perform an effective performance of a role character that makes it appear as if the main character is making larger movements than the actual movement.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The rear accessory (for example, the front light guide plate 234, the rear light guide plate 236) is
A first rear accessory (for example, front light guide plate 234),
a second rear accessory (for example, the rear light guide plate 236) disposed behind the first rear accessory;
has
The movable control means (for example, sub CPU 731)
The present invention is characterized in that it is possible to perform control to operate the first rear accessory object and the second rear accessory object in a manner that both can be visually recognized when viewed from the front.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the first rear accessory (for example, the front light guide plate 234) and the second rear accessory (for example, the rear accessory) arranged behind the first rear accessory The side light guide plates 236) can be operated in such a manner that they are all visible when viewed from the front, so that the main object can be further emphasized, or the main object (for example, the large accessory 232) can be moved more clearly than the actual movement. It is possible to make it appear as if a large movement is being made.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
The rear accessory (for example, the front light guide plate 234, the rear light guide plate 236) is
It is configured so that it can emit light toward the front, and
It is characterized by having a substantially similar shape that is larger than the main character when viewed from the front.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, since the rear accessory objects (for example, the front light guide plate 234, the rear light guide plate 236) are configured to be able to emit light toward the front, the main object (for example, the large accessory object) 232) and rotate it while moving in a straight line behind the main object, and together with the afterimage of the light emitted from the rear object, it can make the main object appear even larger. , it is possible to make it appear as if the main character is making larger movements than they actually are. Moreover, since the rear accessory has a substantially similar shape that is larger than the main character when viewed from the front, it is possible to emphasize the main character itself and make it difficult to make the viewer aware of the existence of the rear accessory as a separate member.

In order to solve the second problem, the present invention provides a seventeenth gaming machine having the following configuration.

[17th gaming machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A gaming machine that is equipped with a lottery means (for example, a main CPU 721) that performs a lottery, and in which a game proceeds based on the result of the lottery,
A predetermined accessory member (for example, large accessory main body part 230),
a left side elevating mechanism (for example, large accessory left drive mechanism 240) capable of raising and lowering the predetermined accessory member in the vertical direction while supporting the predetermined accessory member on the left side;
a right side elevating mechanism (for example, large accessory right drive mechanism 260) capable of raising and lowering the predetermined accessory member in the vertical direction while supporting the predetermined accessory member on the right side;
Lifting control means (for example, sub CPU 731) capable of driving the left side lifting mechanism and the right side lifting mechanism to lift and lower the predetermined accessory member supported on both the left and right sides;
Equipped with
The left side lifting mechanism and/or the right side lifting mechanism,
It has a pedestal (for example, pedestal 252) on which the predetermined accessory member is placed,
The predetermined accessory member is
It is characterized in that it is supported by the left side elevating mechanism and/or the right side elevating mechanism by being placed on the pedestal so as not to be fixed upward on the left side and/or right side.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the predetermined accessory member (for example, the large accessory main body part 230) is moved by the left side elevating mechanism (for example, the large accessory left drive mechanism 240) on the left and/or right side. ) and/or the right side lifting mechanism (for example, the large accessory right drive mechanism 260). In this way, when a predetermined accessory member is supported on both the left and right sides (that is, when it is supported on both sides), the lifting speed of the left lifting mechanism and the lifting speed of the right lifting mechanism must match. For example, not only will it not be possible to move up and down smoothly, but in some cases, it may not be possible to go up and down. This tendency is particularly noticeable when the predetermined accessory member is heavy. The discrepancy between the lifting speed of the left lifting mechanism and the lifting speed of the right lifting mechanism may be caused by a trivial thing such as a foreign object being caught. In this regard, according to the present invention, in order to increase the degree of freedom in the upward direction, the predetermined accessory member is placed on the pedestal (for example, the pedestal 252) so that it is not fixed upwardly on the left and/or right side. has been done. Therefore, even if the lifting speed of the left lifting mechanism and the lifting speed of the right lifting mechanism do not necessarily match, it is possible to maintain smooth lifting as much as possible. As a result, it is possible to increase the size of the predetermined accessory member, and it becomes possible to perform an accessory performance that can give a large impact.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The left side lifting mechanism (for example, large accessory left drive mechanism 240) and/or the right side lifting mechanism (for example, large accessory right drive mechanism 260),
A fall prevention member (for example, arm support guide 247) that restricts the movement of the predetermined accessory member (for example, large accessory main body part 230) in the front and rear direction that is placed on the pedestal (for example, pedestal 252) is provided. It is characterized by having.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the movement of the predetermined accessory member (e.g., large accessory main body part 230) placed on the pedestal (e.g., pedestal 252) in the front-rear direction is regulated. , While increasing the degree of freedom of the predetermined accessory member in the upward direction, it is possible to prevent the predetermined accessory member from falling from the pedestal.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
The left side elevating mechanism (for example, the large accessory left drive mechanism 240) is
It has a pedestal (e.g., pedestal 252) on which the predetermined accessory (e.g., large accessory main body part 230) is placed on the left side, and
The right side lifting mechanism (for example, the large accessory right drive mechanism 260) is
It has a pedestal (for example, pedestal 252) on which the predetermined accessory is placed on the right side,
The predetermined accessory member is
The left and right sides are placed on the pedestals, respectively, so that they are supported by the left side lifting mechanism and the right side lifting mechanism.

According to the gaming machine described in (3) above, since the predetermined accessory members are placed on the pedestal on both the left and right sides so as not to be fixed upward, smooth lifting and lowering can be further maintained. This makes it possible to further increase the size of the predetermined accessory member.

In order to solve the second problem, the present invention provides an eighteenth gaming machine having the following configuration.

[18th gaming machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A gaming machine comprising a lottery means (for example, a sub CPU 731) for performing a lottery, and in which a game proceeds based on the result of the lottery,
A predetermined accessory member (for example, large accessory 232),
an elevating mechanism (for example, large accessory left drive mechanism 240, large accessory right drive mechanism 260) capable of raising and lowering the predetermined accessory member in the vertical direction while supporting the predetermined accessory member;
Lifting control means (for example, sub CPU 731) capable of driving the lifting mechanism to raise and lower the predetermined accessory member;
Equipped with
The elevating mechanism is
having a locking mechanism (for example, a locking mechanism 250) capable of holding the predetermined accessory member in the upper position when the predetermined accessory member is located above;
The locking mechanism is
A holding mode in which the predetermined accessory member can be held above by supporting it from below, and an opening mode in which the holding mode is released by retreating from the vertical movement locus of the predetermined accessory member. It is characterized by being configured such that it can be switched between by rotational motion.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, when the predetermined accessory member (for example, the large accessory member 232) is located above (for example, the origin position), the locking mechanism (for example, the lock Since it can be held by the mechanism 250), even if the specified accessory member is made larger, it can be prevented from falling by itself due to the action of gravity, and an accessory performance that can give a big impact can be carried out. It becomes possible to do so. By the way, when a predetermined accessory member is supported and held from below, if an attempt is made to release the holding mechanism by sliding the locking mechanism against the lower surface of the predetermined accessory member, the weight of the predetermined accessory member will cause a considerable amount of damage. It takes a lot of force. In this regard, according to the present invention, it is possible to switch between the holding mode and the opening mode by the rotational movement of the locking mechanism without sliding, so that the lower surface of the predetermined accessory can be The locking mechanism can be switched from the holding mode to the opening mode.

Note that "to retreat from the vertical movement locus of a predetermined accessory member" described in the present invention means to move a predetermined accessory member (for example, large accessory member 232) by a locking mechanism (for example, locking mechanism 250). ) is equivalent to moving the locking mechanism to a position where it does not collide with the predetermined accessory member when it moves from the top to the bottom so that the vertical movement of the accessory member is not obstructed. .

According to the fourteenth to eighteenth gaming machines of the present invention having the above-mentioned configurations, it is possible to suitably provide a gaming machine that can increase interest.

[19th and 20th gaming machines]
BACKGROUND ART Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is received in a starting slot, an internal lottery is performed, and an effect image is displayed on, for example, a liquid crystal display based on the result of the internal lottery. Then, if the result of the internal lottery is a jackpot, a jackpot game is executed.

As a gaming machine of this kind, a gaming machine is known in which, based on the result of an internal lottery, a movable accessory is advanced toward the front of a liquid crystal display, for example, to create anticipation for the result of the internal lottery. (For example, see Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2015-092885).

When an accessory performance in which a movable accessory advances toward the front of the liquid crystal display like the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-092885 is performed, players can have expectations.

(Third issue)
However, in recent years, there has been a demand for gaming machines that can increase interest by providing performances that can give even more impact.

In order to solve the third problem, the present invention provides nineteenth and twentieth gaming machines having the following configurations.

[19th gaming machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A gaming machine (for example, gaming machine 1000) having a gaming machine frame (for example, a main body frame including an upper horizontal frame 21261),
a display area where a predetermined image is displayed (for example, a display area of the liquid crystal display 2901);
a display control means (for example, sub CPU 731) capable of controlling an image displayed in the display area;
A movable accessory configured to be operable (for example, large accessory 2321);
Accessory control means (for example, sub CPU 731) that controls the operation of the movable accessory;
Equipped with
The display control means includes:
A mock image (for example, a mock image 3331) imitating the movable accessory can be displayed in the display area, and the simulated image displayed in the display area can be displayed outside (for example, above) the gaming machine frame. It can be displayed to move toward
The accessory control means includes:
After the mock image is displayed so as to move toward the outside of the gaming machine frame, the movable accessory is configured to be able to advance until it is located outside the gaming machine frame. Features.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the imitation image imitating the movable accessory (for example, the large accessory 2321) moves toward the outside of the gaming machine frame (for example, the main body frame including the upper horizontal frame 21261). After this is displayed, the movable accessory as a real object advances until it is located outside the gaming machine frame. In other words, the display performance using images and the performance using movable accessories are not only executed at the same timing, but also when the movable accessories as real objects that have changed from the simulated images move within the frame of the gaming machine. By performing an impactful performance that extends beyond the gaming machine frame to a position outside the gaming machine frame, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
A game member (for example, a game panel 3001) having a game area (for example, a game area 3201),
a lower display area (for example, lower display window 6021) in which a predetermined image is displayed below the gaming area;
Furthermore,
The display area (for example, the display area of the liquid crystal display 2901) is an upper display area provided above the lower display area and behind the gaming area,
The movable accessory is provided behind the upper display area,
The display control means includes:
Prior to displaying the simulated image displayed in the upper display area so as to move toward the outside of the gaming machine frame, the movable accessory is simulated from the lower display area to the upper display area. It is characterized by being configured so that a mock image (for example, the mock image 3321) can be displayed in a moving manner.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, from the lower display area (eg, lower display window 6021) below the gaming area (eg, gaming area 3201) to the upper display area (eg, the display area of the liquid crystal display 2901) After the simulated image (for example, simulated image 3321) is displayed moving toward After that, the movable accessory (for example, large accessory 2321) as a real object advances until it is located outside the gaming machine frame. That is, a movement effect is performed using a mock image (for example, the mock images 3321, 3331) or a movable accessory as a real object over a wide area from the lower display area below the gaming area to a position outside the gaming machine frame. This makes it possible to perform performances with even more impact.

Note that the "gaming member having a gaming area" corresponds to, for example, a game panel (also referred to as a game board) in the case of a pachinko machine, and corresponds to a reel in the case of a pachislot machine.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
The game member (for example, game panel 3001) has a transparent area so that the rear of the game area (for example, game area 3201) can be visually recognized, and
The upper display area (for example, the display area of the liquid crystal display 2901) has a transparent area so that the rear of the gaming area can be viewed,
The display control means includes:
When the movable accessory (for example, the large accessory 2321) is located behind the upper display area, an image in which the outer shape of the movable accessory is framed is used as the mock image (for example, the outer edge image 3341). It is characterized by being configured so that it can be displayed.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, the lower display area (for example, the lower display window 6021 ), only the simulated image (for example, the simulated image 3321) appears, while both (for example, the outer edge image 3341 and the large accessory 2321) appear in the upper display area (for example, the display area of the liquid crystal display 2901), and the gaming machine frame ( For example, only a movable accessory appears outside the main body frame (including the upper horizontal frame 21261), so that a staged effect changes from a simulated image to a movable accessory as a real object along the movement direction. This makes it possible to suppress a decline in interest.

(4) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (3) above,
The accessory control means (for example, sub CPU 731)
Operates to move the movable accessory (for example, large accessory 2321) that has advanced to the outside of the gaming machine frame (for example, the main body frame including the upper horizontal frame 21261) to the inside of the gaming machine frame. It is possible and
The display control means (for example, sub CPU 731)
After the movable accessory operates from the outside to the inside of the gaming machine frame, a simulated image (e.g., imitation images 3321, 3331) of the movable accessory is moved inside the gaming machine frame (e.g., from below). ) can be displayed so as to move toward

According to the gaming machine of (4) above, the simulated image (for example, the simulated image 3321) that appears in the lower display area (for example, the lower display window 6021) is displayed in the upper display area (for example, the display area of the liquid crystal display 2901). After changing into a movable accessory (e.g., large accessory 2321), the changed movable accessory advances until it is located outside the gaming machine frame (e.g., the main body frame including the upper horizontal frame 21261), Furthermore, the display performance and the accessory performance can be performed in both directions, such as a movable accessory moving from the outside to the inside of the gaming machine frame changing into a mock image and moving to the upper display area. This makes it possible to suppress a decline in interest.

[20th gaming machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A gaming machine (for example, gaming machine 2000) having a gaming machine frame (for example, a main body frame including an upper horizontal frame 21262),
a display means (for example, liquid crystal display device 2602) on which a predetermined image is displayed;
A movable accessory configured to be operable (for example, large accessory 2322);
Accessory control means (for example, sub CPU 731) that controls the operation of the movable accessory;
Equipped with
The accessory control means includes:
When the first condition is satisfied, the movable accessory is advanced toward a predetermined position within the gaming machine frame (for example, in front of the liquid crystal display device 2602), and when the second condition is satisfied, the game It is characterized by being configured so that it can be advanced until it is located outside (for example, above) the machine frame.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, when the first condition is met, a movable accessory (such as a large prize When the second condition is satisfied, the object 2322) advances until it is located outside the gaming machine frame (for example, the main body frame including the upper horizontal frame 21262). In other words, when the second condition is met, the movable accessory not only moves within the gaming machine frame, but also moves beyond the gaming machine frame to be located outside the gaming machine frame, creating an impactful performance. By doing so, it becomes possible to suppress a decline in interest.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
Further comprising a decorative accessory (for example, a decorative accessory 5602) arranged on the front side of the gaming machine frame (for example, the main body frame including the upper horizontal frame 21262),
The movable accessory (for example, large accessory 2322) is
is placed behind the decorative accessory, and advances toward a predetermined position within the gaming machine frame behind the decorative accessory;
The game machine is characterized in that when it advances to a position outside the gaming machine frame, it advances forward until it is located above the decorative accessory.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when the movable accessory (for example, the large accessory 2322) advances toward a predetermined position within the gaming machine frame (for example, the main body frame including the upper horizontal frame 21262) Although it only moves behind the decorative accessory (for example, the decorative accessory 5602), when it advances until it is located outside the gaming machine frame, it does not just move until it is located outside the gaming machine; , it advances forward until it is located above the decorative accessory. As a result, the movable accessory that has advanced until it is located outside the gaming machine will move further in the direction closer to the player, making it possible to perform an even more impactful performance.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
The movable accessory (for example, large accessory 2322) is
Advance until it is located outside the gaming machine frame (for example, the main body frame including the upper horizontal frame 21262), and further advance toward the front until it is located above the decorative accessory (for example, the decorative accessory 5602) In this case, the present invention is characterized in that it is configured to be able to create a specific form (for example, a form representing a specific character) with the decorative accessory.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, when the movable accessory (for example, the large accessory 2322) is moving inside the gaming machine frame (for example, the main body frame including the upper horizontal frame 21262), the movable Accessories and decorative accessories (for example, decorative accessory 5602) only perform their respective functions, but when the movable accessory advances to the outside of the gaming machine frame, the movable accessory becomes a decorative accessory. It advances forward until it is located above the object, and a specific form (for example, a form representing a specific character) is created with the decorative accessory. As a result, when a movable accessory advances beyond the gaming machine frame until it is located outside the gaming machine frame, the movable accessory will not only advance until it is located outside the gaming machine frame. Since a specific form is created with the decorative accessories, it is possible to create a performance with a greater impact.

(4) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (3) above,
Further comprising display operating means (for example, liquid crystal drive mechanism 2612) capable of operating the display means (for example, liquid crystal display device 2602),
The display operating means is
The display means is moved until the movable accessory (e.g., large accessory 2322) is positioned outside the gaming machine frame (e.g., the main body frame including the upper horizontal frame 21262), and the gaming machine It is characterized by being configured so that it can advance to a position outside the frame.

According to the gaming machine of (4) above, when the movable accessory (for example, the large accessory 2322) advances to the outside of the gaming machine frame (for example, the main body frame including the upper horizontal frame 21262), the movable Not only the characters but also the display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 2602) are configured to extend beyond the frame of the gaming machine, allowing for innovative performances that are not limited by the framework of conventional gaming machines. This makes it possible to suppress a decline in interest.

According to the nineteenth and twentieth gaming machines of the present invention having the above configurations, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

[21st gaming machine]
BACKGROUND ART Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is received in a starting slot, an internal lottery is performed, and an effect image is displayed on, for example, a liquid crystal display based on the result of the internal lottery. Then, if the result of the internal lottery is a jackpot, a jackpot game is executed.

In order to enhance the visual effect, this type of gaming machine is equipped with, for example, a lens member that is illuminated by illumination light from a lighting member, and a cover member that includes the illumination light and the lens member. A gaming machine is known (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-47256).

(Fourth issue)
However, in recent years, it has been desired to provide a gaming machine that can suppress a decline in interest by providing new visual effects different from those of conventional gaming machines.

In order to solve the fourth problem, the present invention provides a twenty-first gaming machine having the following configuration.

[21st gaming machine]
(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A light emitting source (for example, LED5870) capable of emitting light toward the front;
a transparent body (for example, a decorative lens 5862) that is disposed in front of the light emitting source and can transmit the light emitted from the light emitting source;
A gaming machine (for example, gaming machine 1) comprising:
The transparent body is
an opposing surface (for example, opposing surface 58622) that faces the light emitting source and is capable of receiving light emitted from the light emitting source;
a non-opposing surface (for example, the left surface 58624) as a surface different from the opposing surface,
The non-facing surface is
When viewed in a cross section horizontally crossing the opposing surface, the surface is formed to have a wavy curved surface including at least one concave portion (for example, point a) where light incident from the opposing surface gathers. do.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, light incident from the opposing surface (eg, opposing surface 58622) is collected in the recess (eg, point a), and a light emitting source other than the light emitting source (eg, LED 5870) is activated. It is possible to create an unprecedented new visual effect that makes it appear as if the recess is present.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The opposing surface (for example, opposing surface 58622) is
It is characterized by having an uneven surface so that the incident angle of light emitted from the light emitting source (for example, LED 5870) is not constant.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, since the opposing surface on which the light emitted from the light emitting source (for example, LED 5870) is incident is an uneven surface, the interior of the transparent body (for example, decorative lens 5862) Instead of the incident light going straight ahead and being emitted, the incident light is more likely to be collected in the recess.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
The transparent body is columnar, and
A plurality of the light emitting sources (e.g., LED 5870) are arranged along the length direction of the columnar transparent body (e.g., decorative lens 5862), and
The columnar transparent body is characterized in that the recesses are formed in a row along the longitudinal direction of the columnar transparent body.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, it appears as if a light source other than the light source (for example, the LED 5870) exists along the longitudinal direction of the columnar transparent body (for example, the decorative lens 5862). It is possible to produce new visual effects that have never been seen before, and to suppress a decline in interest.

According to the twenty-first gaming machine of the present invention having the above configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

1,1000,2000,3000 Gaming machine 120 Rear projection device 122 First rear projector 124 Second rear projector 230 Large accessory body part 232, 2321, 2322 Large accessory 234 Front light guide plate 236 Rear light guide plate 239 Light guide plate top and bottom Drive mechanism 240 Large accessory left drive mechanism 250 Lock mechanism 252 Pedestal 260 Large accessory right drive mechanism 270 Light guide plate vertical drive mechanism 2340 Front light guide plate rotation drive mechanism 2360 Rear light guide plate rotation drive mechanism 290 Rear screen unit 2902 Upper rear screen 2904 Lower rear screen 2906 Intermediate rear screen 300, 3001, 3002, 3003 Game panel 320, 3201, 3202, 3203 Game area 290 Rear screen unit 500 Front door unit 550 Front decorative frame 560, 5601, 5602, 5603 Decorative accessories 570 Accessory drive mechanism 588, 5881, 5882, 5883 Launch handle 600, 6201, 6202, 6203 Front projection device 622, 6221, 6222, 6223 Front projector 624, 6241, 6242, 6243 Front mirror 510 Front screen unit 512 Front screen 700 Performance space 721 Main CPU
731 Sub CPU
2126, 21261, 21262 Upper horizontal frame 2602 Liquid crystal display device 2901 Liquid crystal display device 3001 Game panel 3321, 3331 Mock image 3341 Outer edge image 5124 Reticulated sheet 5520 Overhang portion 6021 Lower display window

Claims (1)

A gaming machine comprising a lottery means for performing a lottery, and a game progresses based on the result of the lottery,
a movable accessory that can be operated based on the result of the lottery;
movable control means for controlling the operation of the movable accessory;
a first display area capable of displaying information based on the lottery results and provided toward the front of the gaming machine;
a second display area capable of displaying information based on the lottery results and provided toward the front of the gaming machine;
a third display area capable of displaying information based on the lottery results and provided toward the front of the gaming machine;
Equipped with
The first display area is
It can be displayed behind the movable accessory by display control by the first display control means,
The display may become difficult to see due to the operation of the movable accessory,
The second display area is
Due to display control by a second display control means different from the first display control means, at a position shifted from the first display area in the front and back direction and at a position shifted from the center of the first display area in the vertical direction. It is possible to display
The display will not become difficult to see due to the operation of the movable accessory, and
The third display area is
Display can be performed in front of the first display area and the second display area by display control by a third display control means different from the first display control means and the second display control means,
Even when the display is performed in the third display area, it is possible to visually recognize the movable accessory in operation and the display in the first display area and/or the second display area,
The movable accessory is
It has a first movable accessory and a second movable accessory,
configured to be able to advance into a production space formed between the first display area or the second display area and the third display area in the front-rear direction ,
The movable control means is
When it is determined to operate both the first movable accessory and the second movable accessory, the timing of starting the operation of the first movable accessory and the start of the operation of the second movable accessory starting the respective operations at different timings , and the operation performance of the first movable accessory performed after the operation of the first movable accessory starts , and the second movable accessory. A game machine characterized in that it is possible to perform, in the performance space, an operation performance in which the second movable accessory is performed on a different trajectory from the movement performance performed after the second movable accessory starts to operate.

Images